MASTER 
 NEGA TIVE 
 NO. 92-80674 
 
MICROFILMED 1 992 
 COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES/NEW YORK 
 
 as part of the 
 "Foundations of Western Civilization Preservation Project" 
 
 Funded by the 
 NATIONAL ENDOWMENT FOR THE HUMANITIES 
 
 Reproductions may not be made without permission from 
 
 Columbia University Library 
 
COPYRIGHT STATEMENT 
 
 The copyright law of the United States ~ Title 17, United 
 States Code ~ concerns the making of photocopies or other 
 reproductions of copyrighted material... 
 
 Columbia University Library reserves the right to refuse to 
 accept a copy order if, in its judgement, fulfillment of the order 
 would involve violation of the copyright law. 
 
 .• 
 
A UTHOR : 
 
 OSWALD, MICHAEL 
 
 MATTHIAS 
 
 TITLE: 
 
 USE OF PREPOSITIONS 
 IN APOLLONIUS ... 
 
 PLACE: 
 
 NOTRE DAME 
 
 DA TE : 
 
 1904 
 
COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES 
 PRESERVATION DEPARTMENT 
 
 Master Negative # 
 
 32^- BO 6-1 U- .k 
 
 mmimmm0»i* 
 
 Restrictions on Use: 
 
 BIBLIOGRAPHIC MICROFORM TARGET 
 
 Original Material as Filmed - Existing Bibliographic Record 
 
 w i ll m i 
 
 ■W^^P-^W H I nil fi 
 
 >■« ■•HJ 
 
 88Ap7 
 DO 
 
 Oswald, Michael Matthias P. 
 
 Tlio use of the prepositions in Apollonius Rhodius, 
 eoniparod with Ihoir use in Ilonior ... Notre Dame, Ind.. 
 Notre Dame university press, 1904. 
 
 cm 
 
 208 p. m 
 
 Thesis (pir. D.)— Catholic university of America, 
 iiibliogniphy: p. i5i-8. 
 
 :?-ie773 
 
 Library of Congress 
 
 u 
 
 6—16762 
 
 FILM SIZE:____^>jim 
 
 TECHNICAL MICROFORM DATA 
 
 REDUCTION RATIO: ^2f_ 
 
 IMAGE PLACEMENT: lA (^ IB IIB 
 
 DATE FILMED: 3j:M7fJr. INITIALS U"^, 
 
 HLMEDBY: RESEARCH PUBLICATIONS. INC WOODBRIDGE. CT 
 
c 
 
 Association for information and Image Management 
 
 1100 Wayne Avenue. Suite 1100 
 Silver Spring, Maryland 20910 
 
 301/587-8202 
 
 Centimeter 
 
 UN 
 
 12 3 4 5 
 
 iiiiiiiiiiimniiiniiiiiiiilimliiiiliiiilnii 
 
 n 
 
 7 8 9 10 
 
 liiiiliiiiliiiiliiiiliiiiliiiili 
 
 6 
 
 iiiliiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii 
 
 m 
 
 fi 
 
 11 
 I 
 
 12 13 
 1 
 
 14 15 mm 
 
 iiliiiiliiiil 
 
 rrr 
 
 Inches 
 
 1 
 
 T 
 
 T 
 
 TTT 
 
 1.0 
 
 U^ 2.8 
 
 IJL 
 
 It ^ 
 
 1.4 
 
 2.5 
 22 
 
 I.I 
 
 2.0 
 1.8 
 
 1.6 
 
 1.25 
 
 TTT 
 
 MRNUFRCTURED TO fillM STRNDflRDS . 
 BY APPLIED IMRGE, INC. 
 
THE PREPOSITIONS 
 IN APOLLONIUS RHODIUS 
 
 COMPARED WITH THEIR USE 
 
 IN HOIWER 
 
 BY 
 
 MICHAEL M. F. OSWALD, C. S. C, 
 
 NOTRE DAME UNIVERSITY PRESS 
 
 NOTRE DAME, INDIANA 
 1904 
 
 ' •: 
 
Columbta Winibtifiitp 
 
 intfteCitpof^toHorb 
 
 LIBRARY 
 
THE USE OF THE PREPOSITIONS 
 IN APOLLONIUS RHODIUS 
 
 COMPARED WITH THEIR USE 
 IN HOMER 
 
 DISSERTATION 
 
 SUBMITTED TO THE FACULTY OF PHILOSOPHY 
 OF THE CATHOLIC UNIVERSITY OF AMERICA 
 FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY 
 
 BY 
 
 MICHAEL M. F. OSWALD, C. S. C 
 
 \''. 
 \:'' 
 
 ■X,, 
 
 
 NOTRE DAME UNIVERSITY PRESS 
 
 NOTRE DAME. INDIANA 
 1904 
 
 ^\ 
 
III 
 
 r 
 
 4 
 
 mtf 
 
 TO 
 
 DR. GEORGE M. BOI.UNG, 
 
 >'■ 'tiiiiigiiiiiiii 
 
 ipi 
 
 "I 
 
 *■ (, 
 
 T 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 MY ESTKliMKD PROFESSOR 
 
 OF 
 
 GREEK, SANSKRIT AND COMPARATIVE PHII^OLOGY 
 
 THIS WOIUv 
 
 IS CORDIALLY AND RESPECTFULLY 
 
 DEDICATED. 
 
 f 
 
s 
 
 ^ 
 
 \ 
 
 *',> 
 
 
 A 
 
 t\ 
 
 BIBLIOGRAPHY. 
 
 A. GENERAI, W ORKS OF REFERENCE. 
 
 Paui,, H., Principien der Sprachgeschichte, 3te Aufl.; Halle, 
 
 1899. 
 ScHOBMANN, G. F., Die Lehre von den Redeteilen; Berlin, 
 
 1862. 
 
 Strong, Logeman and Wheeler, The History of lyanguage; 
 
 New York, 1891, 
 VOGRINZ, G., Sprachgeschichtliche Beraerk. z. Lehre v. d. 
 
 Prapositionen; Berl. Phil. Wochenschr., 1885, Sp. 225-230. 
 
 B. GRAMMATICAL WORKS. 
 
 Brugmann, K., Griech. Grammatik, 3te Aufl.; Miinchen, 
 1900. 
 
 CuRTius, G., Erlauterungen zur Griech. Grammatik; Prag. 
 
 1875. 
 Dei,brueck, B., Vergleich. Syntax der Indogerm. Sprachen; 
 
 Strassburg, 1893. 
 
 Delbrueck, B., Syntaktische Forschungen, Vol. V., Halle, 
 1888. 
 
 Fairbanks, A., The Dative in Sophocles; Trans, of Am. 
 
 Phil. As., XVII., (1886), pp. 78-126. 
 Gii.DERSi,EEVE, B. L., Problems in Greek Syntax; A.J. P., 
 
 XXIII., 1902. 
 
 G00DEI.1., T. D., The Genitive in Sophocles; Trans, of Am. 
 
 Phil. As., XV., (1884), pp. 4-35. 
 JoosT, A., Sprachgebrauch Xenophons in der Anabasis; 
 
 Berlin, 1892. 
 
 Krueger-Poekel, Griechische Sprachlehre; Leipzig. 1875- 
 1894. 
 
 Kuehner-Gerth, Ausf. Grammatik der Griech. Sprache; 
 Leipzig, 1898. 
 
— 6 — 
 
 — 7 — 
 
 Main, J. H., Locative Expressions in the Attic Orators; Johns 
 
 Hopkins Dissert., 1892. 
 Monro, D. B., Homeric Grammar, ( 2nd. ed.); Oxford, 1891. 
 Rutherford, W. G., The New Phrynichus; London, 1881. 
 RzACH, A., Grammatische Studien zu ApoUonius Rhodius; 
 
 Wien, 1878. 
 VoGRiNZ, G., Grammatik des Homerischen Dialektes; Pader- 
 
 born, 1889. 
 
 C. WORKS ON PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Ai^viN, A. R , De Usu Praepositionis vapd apud Thucydidem; 
 
 Upsaliae, 1873. 
 DEBBhRT, P., De Praepositionum irepl et dfi(pl usu Thucydideo, 
 
 Regimonti Pr. , 1880. 
 Eggers, J. H. C, Abhandlung iiber den urspriinglichen 
 
 Gebrauch der griechischen Praposiiionen; Altona, 1846. 
 Form AN, L., The Difference between the Genitive and Dative 
 
 with erf to denote Superposition; Johns Hopkins Dissert., 
 
 1894. 
 Geyer, M., Observationes Epigraphicae de Praep. Graec. 
 
 Forma et Usu; Altenburgi, 1880. 
 GOWSH, E. J., De Praep. Usu Thucydideo, (P.l.-VI.); 
 
 Schweidnitz, 1859-1877. 
 Haggett, a. S., a Summary of the Prepositions in Homer, 
 
 in "Studies in Honor of Basil L. Gildersleeve"; Balti- 
 more, 1902. 
 
 Kahi,e, a., De iiri Praepositionis Usu Euripideo, (P. I.); Mar- 
 burgi Cattorum, 1888. 
 
 Krapp, F., Der Substantivierte Infinitiv, abhangig von 
 Prapositionen und Propositions - Ad verbien in der his- 
 torischen Gracitat. (Herodotus bis Zosimus); Heidel- 
 berg, 1892. 
 
 Krebs, F., Die Prapositionen bei Polybius; Wiirzburg, 1881. 
 
 Krieger, E., Die Prapositionen iirL und t/mJj in Xenophons 
 Anabasis; Gumbinnen, 1895. 
 
 KoEMMEL, C, De Praepositionis iiri cum Casibus Conjunctae 
 Usu Thucydideo; Bonnae, 1875. 
 
 / 
 
 i; 
 
 'f 
 
 Laun, E., De Praepositionum Usu apud Aeschylum; Upsaliae, 
 
 1885. 
 LUNDBERG, C. A., De Ratione Herodotea Praepositionibus 
 
 Utendi a Scriptoribus Atticis Diversa. Upsaliae, 1869. 
 LuTz, L., Die Prapositionen bei den Attischen Rednern; 
 
 Neustadt a. d. H., 1887. 
 LuTz, L., Die Casus - Adverbien bei den Attischen Rednern; 
 
 Wiirzburg, 1891. 
 MeThner, J., De Praepositionum Graecarum Natura atque 
 
 Usu; Lesnae. 
 MOMMSEN, T., Beitr. z. d. Lehre v. d. Griech. Prap.; Berlin, 
 
 1895. 
 Pierson, W., Ueber die Tmesis der Prapositionen vom Ver- 
 
 bum bei den Griech. Dichtern, insbes. bei den Dramati- 
 
 kern und Lyrikem; Rhein. Mus., 1857. 
 Przybii,i,a, K., De Praepositionum Kard et dvd Usu Lucianeo; 
 
 Konigsberg, 1883. 
 Rau, F. H., De Praepositionis Tapd Usu; Lipsiae, 1870. 
 Rosberg, M., De Praepositionibus apud Homerum, quae cum 
 
 solo genitivi Casu conjunguntur; Upsaliae, 1870. 
 Schumacher, J. , De Praepositionum cum tribus casibus Con- 
 
 junctarum Usu Euripideo, (P. I.); Bonnae, 1884. 
 Soboi^ewski, S., De Praepositionum Usu Aristophaneo; 
 
 Mosquae, 1890. 
 Tyi,er, W. S., On the Prepositions in the Homeric Poems; 
 
 Trans, of Am. Phil. As., 1874. 
 Wentzel, E., De Praepositionum Tmesi apud Herodotum; 
 
 Vratislaviae, 1829. 
 Westphal, F., Die Prapositionen bei Xenophon; Freienwalde 
 
 a. Oder, 1888. 
 Wrede, F., De Origine Praepositionis eis et varia apud 
 
 Graecos Scriptura; Monasterii, 1868. 
 
 D. SPECIAL WORKS ON APOLLONIUS. 
 
 Beneke, F., Beitrage zur Metrik der Alexandriner; Berlin, 
 
 1884. 
 Choi,evius, Ueber den griech. Epiker ApoUonius Rhodius; 
 
 Konigsberg, 1882. 
 
8 — 
 
 H 
 
 Gerhard, E., Lectiones Apolloniauae; Lipsiae, 1816. 
 
 CouAT, A., La Po^sie Alexandrine; Paris, 1882. 
 
 Gbrcke, a., Alexandrinische Studien; Rhein. Mus., 1887, 
 
 1889. 
 Goodwin, C. J., Apollonius Rhodius, His Figures, Syntax 
 
 and Vocabulary" Baltimore, 1891. 
 KoFi^ER, J., Gleichnisse bei Apollonius Rhodius; Brixen, 
 
 1890. 
 La Roche, J., Der Hexameter bei Apollonius, Aratos und 
 
 Callimachos; Wiener Studien, XXI., (1900), pp. 161-197. 
 LiNSENBARTH, O., De Apollouii Rhodii Casuum Syntaxi; 
 
 Lipsiae, 1887. 
 
 RzACH, A., Grammatische Studien zu Apollonius Rhodius; 
 Wien, 1878. 
 
 Seaton, R. C, Imitation of Homer by Apollonius; Journal 
 of Philol. XIX., 1890. 
 
 WeicherT, a., Ueber das Leben u. Gedicht des Apollonius 
 von Rhodus; Meissen, 1821. 
 
 ft 
 
 E. TEXTS. 
 
 Apollonius is cited according to the small edition of Merkel, 
 except that in the matter of accentuation the traditional rules 
 are followed. The "Editio Major" of Merkel ( Lipsiae, 1854) 
 was unfortunately inaccessible. The Teubner-Text has been 
 used for the citations from Homer and other authors. Edi- 
 tions of Apollonius and Homer frequently consulted are : 
 Brunck, R., Apollonii Rhodii Argonautica; Lipsiae, 1810. 
 LEHRS, F. S., Apollonii Rhodii Argonautica; Parisiis, 1862. 
 Seaton, R. C, Apollonii Rhodii Argonautica; Oxonii, 1900. 
 
 Weli^auer, a., Apollonii Rhodii Argonautica, (Cum 
 Scholiis); Lipsiae, 1828. 
 
 Ameis -Hentze, Homers Odyssee; Leipzig, 1895. 
 
 La Roche, J., Homers Ilias; Leipzig, 1883. 
 
 P. INDICES AND LEXICA. 
 
 Ebblinc, H., Lexicon Homericum; Lipsiae, 1885. 
 
 Gehring, a.. Index Homericus; Lipsiae, 1891. 
 
 Nauck, a., Tragicae Dictionis Index; Petropoli, 1892. 
 
 Seber, W., Index Vocabulorum in Homeri lliade et Odyssea- 
 Oxonii, 1780. ' 
 
 ^ 
 
 \ 
 
 %, J 1 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 A 
 
 The study of Apollonius Rhodius offers many 
 points of special interest to the classic student, on 
 account of the almost endless variety of epic usages 
 reflected from the Homeric poems. How far Apol- 
 lonius succeeded in imitating Homer has been shown 
 {i) for the forms by Rzach; {2) for the vocabulary by 
 Merkel, (Prolegomena), by Schmidt, (De Apollonii 
 Rhodii Elocutione, Muenster, 1853), and by Seaton, 
 (Journal of Philology, XIX., 1890); {2>^ for the 
 syntax of the cases by Cholevius and Linsenbarth; 
 (4) for the figures, syntax arid vocabulary hy Goodwin; J 
 ( 5 ) fo^ Ihe participle by Boiling, ^ 
 
 The aim of the present work is to compare Apol- 
 lonius with Homer in prepositional usages. The 
 prepositions make a good, though rugged, field for 
 comparison, because the standard taken by Apollonius 
 had to be not only negative, by avoiding post- Homeric 
 uses, but also positive, by adopting forms and uses 
 which had never crossed the boundaries of epic poetry 
 and were, for that reason, artificial. For many 
 valuable suggestions in the work I wish to acknowl- 
 edge my indebtedness to Dr. Boiling. To Dr. 
 Miller of the Johns Hopkins University I am grate- 
 ful for the final examination of the manuscript. 
 
 9 
 
/ 
 
 A 
 
 -M 
 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 The classification of the parts of speech, generally 
 accepted by grammarians, is convenient but not 
 accurate. When examined in the light of compara- 
 tive linguistic science, the division is found to be ir* 
 a large measure arbitrary. The cardinal difficulty 
 lies in the fact that words are grouped together and 
 differentiated either according io form, or according 
 io function', but the differences of form and function 
 do not always go parallel. Hence a division accord- 
 ing to one does not fit the other. In the development 
 of a language the original meaning of a word often 
 fades and the word may even pass from one part of 
 speech to another. This process of change is well 
 recognized as one of the most interesting phenomena 
 in the history of language. Cf. Paul, Principien der 
 Sprachgeschichte, p. 312; also B. I^. Gildersleeve, 
 A. J. P., XXIII. , p. 14. 
 
 As regards the form of the prepositions, some un- 
 doubtedly originated in noun-cases; e. g. a(j.<pi, «vrf', 
 and Tzepi are locatives, drrip is probably also a locative 
 without the suffix. The form with suffix is seen in 
 Sanskrit updri, Greek o-eip^ if = ^b-nipt. Other pre- 
 positions show adverbial suffixes. Here belong most 
 of the pseudo-prepositions. Others, as 5«a, ;ra/)d, (tov^ 
 cannot be classified. Cf. Curtius, Erlauterungen, 
 ch. 17; Brugmann, Griechische Grammatik, p. 430; 
 Vogrinz, Gram, des hom. Dialektes, p. 88. 
 
 Also in regard to function^ the prepositions are 
 
 XI 
 
-M 
 
 — 12 — 
 
 perhaps the most unsettled part of speech, shifting 
 from one function to another and finally laying claim 
 to several functions at the same time. Thus the im- 
 proper prepositions are used as simple independent 
 adverbs and in case-construction; while the preposi- 
 tions proper share three distinct functions, i. e. they 
 may be used : (a) as simple adverbs, (b) in composi- 
 tion or tmesis with verbs, or (c) in ca^^e-regimen. 
 The name " pre-position " {7:po-*^sfTi^, prae-positio) 
 has come chiefly from the second usage, and partly 
 also from the last, because the normal position in 
 post-Homeric Greek was preposition + case. The 
 Alexandrian grammarians looked upon the post- 
 position in Homer ( case + preposition ) as a devia- 
 tion from the ordinary usage; though there are 
 strong reasons for believing that in Indo-European 
 the prepositions in the construction with cases were 
 post-positive Cf. Delbriick, Vergl. Syn. Vol. i., Sec, 
 275; Vol. III., Sec. 44. 
 
 Tyler. The Prepositions in the Homeric Poems, 
 Am. Phil. Ass., Vol. V., p. 7, says that " of all the parts 
 of speech the preposition has been the most unfortu- 
 nate in its nomenclature, being the only part of 
 speech whose name expresses nothing of its nature or 
 office, but merely its position with reference to the 
 verb of which it is the prefix, or the noun which it 
 precedes; and that position, usual indeed, but by no 
 means universal, still less essential or founded in the 
 nature of things. If it must be named from an acci- 
 dental circumstance instead of an essential character- 
 istic, its position is so generally a /r^-position as 
 
 / 
 
 A 
 
 I 
 
 i^ i 
 
 — 13 — 
 
 perhaps to justify the name on the principle of 
 logicians : ' a potiori nomenfit. ' * ' 
 
 For a correct understanding of the so-called prepo- 
 sitions, nothing is more important than the generally 
 admitted fact that they belong ultimately to the same 
 category of words as the adverbs. Cf Krtiger- 
 Pokel, P. II., 68 1-2; Kiihner-GerthjSec. 443; Brug- 
 mann. Or. Gr.^ p. 430; Vogrinz, Gram. d. Hom. Dial, 
 p. 206; Monro, Hom. Gram., Sec. 175; Schoemann, 
 Die Lehre von den Redeteilen, p. 138. Strong, The 
 History of I^anguage, p. 361; says: '* Prepositions 
 were once adverbs, serving to denote more closely the 
 direction of the verbal action; as to go in^ to carry off^ 
 to throw up, to fall down. They then became dis- 
 placed, i. e. detached from the verb, and came to 
 belong to the noun, furthering the disappearance of 
 its case-endings and assuming their office.** 
 
 In much the same way is the course of the develop- 
 ment of the different functions of the prepositions 
 mapped out by Delbriick, Synt. Forsch., Vol. V.,p. 126; 
 Vergl. Synt., Vol. I., p. 664; Vogrinz, Berl. Phil. 
 Wochenschr., 1885, Sp. 225-230. Compare also 
 Monro, Hom. Gram., Sec. 178; Kiihner-Gerth, 
 Sec. 428, 4-5. 
 
 The strongest proof that the prepositions were 
 originally adverbs, is to be found in the Homeric 
 language, where we have the actual transition-period 
 from adverbs to prepositions and where consequently 
 we find cases of these words in which it is hard to 
 decide whether their adverbial or prepositional nature 
 predominates. 
 
 Accordingly, after disposing of the improper pre- 
 
 k 
 
— 14 — 
 
 positions (Chap. I.), we proceed to take up the 
 prepositions: (a) as simple adverbs (Chap. II.) and 
 (b) in tmesis with the verb (Chap. III.). Then, dis- 
 cussing briefly the reasons why prepositions are rarer 
 in poetry than in prose and pointing out : (a) the 
 examples in Apollonius of the simple cases and (b) 
 the examples with the suffixes in-'5£v and-<J^ to denote 
 the local relations whence, where and whither, which 
 in prose would usually be expressed by a preposition 
 with its case (Chap. IV.), —we pass on to the pre- 
 positions in case construction (Chap. V.), and con- 
 clude with the prepositions in adverbial phrases 
 (Chap. VI.). 
 
 It will be noticed at a glance that chapters I., II., 
 III., and IV., belong almost exclusively to the 
 domain of poetry (chiefly epic), while in chapters 
 V. and VI. the poetic element appears at once in 
 the large bulk of the examples of prepositions to de- 
 note local relations and also in such metaphoric 
 usages as are distinctively poetic. 
 
 Some uses, which are found in Homer, do not 
 occur in the Argonautica. The reason for this is not 
 always easy to find. The Homeric examples are 
 generally few in number, and at first sight it would 
 seem to be the easiest explanation to assume that the 
 absence of these constructions in Apollonius is purely 
 accidental, the bulk of his work being only one-fifth 
 of that of Homer. This may sometimes have been 
 the case; but, on the other hand, in accordance with 
 the tendency of imitative authors to overdo rare con- 
 structions, we might expect to find in Apollonius a 
 large increase of just such constructions as are repre- 
 
 /^ 
 
 A «4-< 
 
 ii 
 
 — 15 — 
 
 sented in Homer by only a few examples. The only 
 restrictions to this tendency in the case of Apollonius 
 seem to have been two principles diametrically op- 
 posed to each other, (i) When the Homeric con- 
 struction is one that, like iJ-erd with the genitive, or 
 Tzpoi with the dative, or even r.apd with the accusative 
 of the person, afterwards became the ordinary prose 
 construction, Apollonius avoided it, because at his 
 time it was felt to be prosaic. (2) On the other 
 hand, a construction like dvd with the genitive or 
 dative, that never obtained a solid foothold even in 
 later poetry, was possibly felt to be too archaic and 
 too strange, and was for that reason avoided by Apol- 
 lonius. Similarly he avoids forms like erVt' for iv as 
 too poetic, and iryt)^, aveu^ etc., as too prosaic. 
 
 Little work having been done in the department 
 of the Homeric prepositions **by the statistical har- 
 row " ( A. J. P., XXIII., p. 25 ), Kbeling's Uxicon 
 Homericum and Gehring's Indek Homericus had to 
 supply this deficiency. Of valuable assistance for the 
 'Homeric statistics was Haggett's contribution to the 
 "Studies in Honor of Basil L. Gildersleeve. * ' Also 
 the chapters on the prepositions in the Homeric 
 grammars of Monro and Vogrinz have afforded a 
 convenient outline for the principal Homeric usages. 
 Sobolewski (for Aristophanes) and Lutz (for the 
 Orators) have been most frequently consulted to 
 establish the Attic prose-usage. For the later prose 
 Polybius has sometimes been cited through the dis- 
 sertation of Krebs. Finally, the explanation for some 
 deviations from Homer I sought in the **Kpic Cycle'* 
 and in Tragedy; also in Herodotus, because to the 
 
— i6 — 
 
 I 
 
 later Greek writers ** Ionic" and "poetic" were 
 synonymous terms. 
 
 It is to be expected that in the classification of the 
 prepositions with all their epic peculiarities, some 
 doubtful cases will come up, which can hardly be put 
 in any fixed category. Here belong especially : (a) 
 examples in which the preposition might be taken as 
 a simple adverb, or with the verb ( tmesis ). or with 
 the noun (case-construction); and (b) examples of 
 prepositions in case-regimen, but standing on the 
 boundary line of two different meanings, as causal 
 and instrumental. As regards the settling of some 
 of these puzzling examples, the words of Goethe hold 
 good : '*Es irrt der Mensch, so lang er strebt.'* 
 
 A 
 
 '^ 
 
 A 
 
 I- . 
 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 THE IMPROPKR OR PSEUDO - PRKPOSITIONS. 
 
 The improper prepositions, mostly adverbs of place, 
 hold an important position in poetry. I^ike the 
 proper prepositions, they govern cases, and are 
 especially frequent with the genitive. The only 
 essential distinction between an improper and a 
 proper preposition is that the former never entered 
 into composition with verbs as the latter did 
 
 A large portion of the pseudo- prepositions or case- 
 adverbs belongs to the epic language exclusively. 
 Some are loose compounds (Ttaprh^era rather than 
 irovt^era), formed from a preposition and an adverb; 
 
 e. g. av-j-TTcViJ^^ev, ar-«v£t»»9£v, aro-vo^r^^v, Sc-a/iTzepi^ 
 xar-avTtxptj^ xar-e'j-avriov^ xar-oTttffH-^ //er oTtarHe^ etC. Cf. 
 
 Vogrinz, Gram. d. hom. Dial., p. 230; Monro, Hom. 
 Gram., Sec. 228. 
 
 In the treatment of the improper prepositions, no 
 better method could be followed than that pointed 
 out by T. Mommsen in his * * Beitrage zu der I^hre 
 von denGriech. Prapositionen "; Kxcurs III., Casus- 
 Adverbia, pp. 764-766; viz. to discuss from a com- 
 parative point of view the questions (a) of frequency, 
 (b) of position and (c) of case-government. Stylistic 
 peculiarities occur in almost every writer. Apollonius 
 has especially many, which will be pointed out in 
 their respective places. 
 
 17 
 
i\ 
 
 — iS — 
 FRKQUENCY. 
 
 As regards tlie frequency of the improper preposi- 
 tions compared with that of the prepositions proper, 
 Mommsen says ** dass die Dichter iiberhaupt sie weit 
 haufiger und weit mannigfaltiger haben als de Pros- 
 aiker. Im Durchschnitt ist das Verhaltniss der C. A. 
 zu den Prapositionen in der Poesie hochstens wie 
 1 :6 (Sophocles, Apol. Rhod.), mindestens wie 1:13 
 (Pindar, Lyrici Min.). das mittlere Verhaltniss ist 
 1:8 (Homer, Hesiod, lambogr. )» oder 1:9 ( Euri^ 
 
 pides) In der Attischen Prosa ist das Durch- 
 
 schnittsverhaltniss 1:18, in der altern (Thucyd.) 
 ein geringeres 1:22 (24); die lonische Prosa hat 
 einen starkern Verbrauch von C. A. (1:12), des- 
 gleichen Antiphon; Xenophon urd Platon (1:10), 
 (9), gehen am weitsten, nahern sich also der 
 
 Poesie. '* 
 
 Homer has 11 12 examples of improper preposi- 
 tions in case-construction; Apollonius has 275. This 
 gives for Apollonius one improper preposition per 
 21.2 lines; for Homer one per 24.9 lines, and shows, 
 as does Mommsen' s calculation, a slight gain in 
 Apollonius. The adverbs which Apollonius construes 
 with cases more frequently than Homer are chiefly : 
 avsu^'^zv (Apol. 7, Hom. 9), ixrjTt (Apol i6, Hom. 3), 
 £XT«»V£ (Apol. 12, Hom. 2), and i&rt (Apol. 4, 
 Hom. 2 ). On the other hand Apollonius shows a 
 marked decrease in aWa (Apol. i, Hom. 23), and 
 7tp6iT'9e(v) ( Apol. I, Hom. 35). 
 
 POSITION. 
 
 According to Mommsen, the pre-positives hold in 
 
 /^ 
 
 i 
 
 ^'i^... 
 
 — 19 — 
 
 Homer a relation to the post-positives as eight to six. 
 In Apollonius I find 142 prepositives and 97 post- 
 positives, showing that Apollonius (3:2) uses the 
 prepositives in a slightly larger proportion than 
 Homer (8:6).— Homer has 70 cases of inter-posita; 
 Apollonius has 36, which is a large increase over 
 Homer, in proportion to his work. 
 
 It is surprising that in the use of pre-positives and 
 post-positives Apollonius leans more toward the 
 prose usage (4:1 ), whereas the common tendency in 
 poetry was for the post-positives to increase. Thus 
 in Pindar, Aeschylus and Sophocles the prepositives 
 balance with the post-positives, but in Euripides the 
 post-positives increase considerably. 
 
 WITH CASES. 
 
 From the following comparison of the statistics of 
 Homer and Apollonius it is evident that the use with 
 the genitive increases in Apollonius, while the use 
 with the dative, and especially with the accusative 
 decreases in accordance with the general tendency of 
 the language. 
 
 Homer: — Gen 750, Dat. 250, Ace. 112. 
 
 Apollonius: — Gen. 235, Dat. 35, Ace. 5. 
 
 Apollonius has altogether 82 improper prepositions: 
 69 with the genitive, 6 with the dative, one ( itipt^ ) 
 with the acusative; 5 with the genitive and dative, 
 one ( eUw ) with the genitive and accusative. 
 
 For the greater part, Apollonius imitated the 
 Homeric usage. He differs from Homer chiefly in 
 the large number of case-adverbs ( 13 c. gen., 3 c. 
 dat., I c. ace), which do not occur in Homer at all; 
 
%'* 
 
 20 — 
 
 also in using words as case-adverbs (12 c. gen., 4 c. 
 dat.), which in Homer are used only in an absolute 
 sense. With s.'Vw Apollonius has reversed the 
 Homeric order. Homer uses it 3 times with the 
 genitive and 49 times with the accusative; but Apol- 
 lonius has it 7 times with the genitive and only twice 
 with the accusative. 
 
 A. WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 
 a) APOLLONIUS AGREES WITH HOMER. 
 
 ' *Ayxi' — I- 25 ocoTtiYJg TlifinTiYjiSog ayxi\ 
 similar examples are: I. 67, 553; II. 94; III, 
 219; IV. 209. For Homer compare: 117, I 
 43, K 161,0 3()2;/^417, etc. 
 
 'Ay;g6^t: — I. 37 opeog ^xiKkYiiov ayjo^v^ 
 also II. 1047; IV. 484. Cf. H412,* 762; v 103. 
 Homer never uses the word in an absolute 
 sense, which is found in Apollonius: IV. 330, 
 336, etc. 
 
 "^ kvBv%nn — I. 855 'HpaxXiJog av^v^^v, also 
 III. 641, 781, 987, 1030; IV. 744, 1008.— Cf. 
 E 185, 4> 78, X 88; n 192, n 239, etc. The prose 
 form av^v is not found in Apollonius. though it 
 occurs nine times with the genitive in Homer: 
 P 407, * 387, etc. 
 
 "Arra: — III. 44 avua ^i^pdur. Cf. B G26, 
 T 69, 73, 75; a 334, etc. 
 
 'Avrta: — I. 790 dj^rta h(snQivr^g\ IV. 1710 
 
 r 
 
 21 
 
 'Innov^ilog dvTia vrjcfov. Cf. 4> 481, T 80, 88, 
 113, 118; etc. In Homer dvria is always con- 
 strued with a case; in Apollonius it occurs also 
 in an absolute sense, as in I. 799, III. 287. 
 
 'A7tdv8v^i:{v): — I. 863 dndvEv^e yvvaixidv] 
 also II. 874, 1210; III. 114, 333; IV. 371. Cf. 
 A 48, 549, E 30, etc. 
 
 "^ A7tov6(y(pL: — III. 9 Aioq 5' avrolo xal dT^Xidv 
 d^avdrcdv dnovoatpi ^euv. Cf. A 541; s 113, etc. 
 
 ^A(JGov:-lV. 780 daaov tola, Cf. X 4; p 303. 
 
 "Arep: — I. 397 Yipd^^vdrep dXXwr; II. 55 nd- 
 Xov drfp, 1009 xafidrcdv drfp. Cf. A 498, A 
 376, E 473, 753; I 604, 292, ^ 50, etc. 
 
 ""A^pig: — III. 874 Xevx^g smyovvlhog d^pig, 
 1382 d^pig xid^idv. Cf. G 370, where Homer 
 uses d;^pf in a temporal sense. The form d;^pt is 
 not used by Apollonius. In two passages Apol- 
 lonius uses d;^p($ to emphasize a preposition 
 (like Latin "usque ad"); III. 762 vno veiarov 
 Iviov d;^pf$, and IV. 1401 d;^p^ in axvyjanv. 
 
 Aia^nepeg: — II. 319 rduv . . SiafiTtepeg; IV. 
 1251 hiaiine^eg . . nsr^didv. Cf. M 429, T 362, 
 etc. 
 
 'Eyyv^c—l, 633 eyyv^t vriaov, also III. 926; 
 IV. 1072, 1442. Cf. Z 317, I 76; v. 156, (o 358. 
 The prose form iyyvg^ which occurs forty-six 
 times in Homer, is not used by Apollonius. 
 
 Kivexa: — I. 666 tov . . . elvexa; II. 180 
 
] 
 
 22 
 
 slvExa ^lavroavvyjg; also II. 2C1; III. 721; IV. 
 191, 398, 648, 807, 1097. Cf. A 174, F 100, 
 128, Z ;?28, 3o(>, H 89, T o8, X 236, * 608, II 
 501; 5 145, etc. Of the variants, evexev occurs 
 once with the genitive in ApoUonius: IV. 364 
 acdr h'8X8v xatidrcdP, with which compare for 
 Homer p 288, 310. The form ehexev, which is 
 not Homeric, is Ibund four times with the geni- 
 tive in the Argonautica: I[. 21 (> avr^g eivexep 
 "Hp>7g; similarly II. 1133; IV. 1032, 1714. 
 Here may he mentioned also ovvexa, which 
 is used only absokitely in Homer, but in Apol- 
 lonius it governs the genitive three times: I. 
 1325 = III. 356 olo Tttp ovv8x\ III. 370 rdv 
 yap a(pe i^iereX^euev ovvex aUTta. In these 
 passages ovvexa is equivalent in meaning to 
 evexa. The absolute sense "because" is seen in 
 I. 615; III. 246, 334, 470, 626, 1124; IV. 791. 
 Cf. y 53, 61, etc. The prose form evsxa, 
 which occurs twenty-six times in Homer with 
 the genitive, is found only once in ApoUonius 
 (IV. 1521), and only in the absolute sense 
 "because." 
 
 'Exdg: — I. 84 tardg Kolxc^v; similarly 11.134, 
 858; III. 207; IV. 131, 566, 1649. For Homeric 
 parallels compare E 791, I 246, N 263; y 260, 
 t/i/, exc. 
 
 '•'I*' 
 
 'Exdrep^8v:—IL 678=IV. 1660 napetduv 
 txdr8p^8v. Cf. r 340, * 813. 
 
 "ExYiri: — 1) Of gods, "by the aid of:'' I. 
 116 Aiuivvooio 8XYii:i. Cf o 319, t 86, i; 42. This 
 is the only use in Homer. ApoUonius uses it also: 
 
 2) Of persons: I. 902 Hf^tao Ixriri', likewise 
 1. 334; 11. 253, 297, 526, 757; III. 621, 1059; IV. 
 1085, 1197. 
 
 3) Of things, "for the sake of," as equivalent 
 to 8lv8xa: I. 773 (piT^orYirog cxyjrt; II. 1156=111. 
 266 xT8dvidv 'A^dfiavrog exyitl; IV. 390 ExyjTL 
 y8 avi^^8aLdidv, 1016 Exyjri napyoavvYjq. Cf. 
 Find. N. 8, 81; Aesch. Choe. 701; Soph. Phil. 
 669; Eurip. Med. 1235. In Homer iorr^n (dat. 
 of iorr^g) is used of gods and mortals; cf S 396, 
 T 9; Yi 214, X 384, a 234; also ApoUonius III. 
 542, IV. 1030. In Aeschylus, Pro. 557, it is 
 used of the occasion, as loran ydiiuv "on the 
 occasion of the marriage." 
 
 "ExTo^cv: — I. 1037 d!)6VX8o<; 8xro^8v dryjg; 
 III. 1200 ndrov 8xro^8v. Cf a 132; also 
 Aesch. Pers. 871, Sept. 629. In IV. 520 Apol- 
 lonius has the adverbial prepositional phrase ex 
 r6^8v (not exro^ev as Brunck, Wellauer and 
 Lehrs would have it.) 
 
 *Exro^i: — I. 243. yaiyjg Uava^au^og 8xro^L 
 ^dX?M; I. 659 = I. 793, IV. 47, 1180 hro^i 
 nipyidv. Other examples are: I. 833, 1291; 
 
— 24 — 
 
 III. 373, 1198; IV. 1296, 1546, 1755. For Ho- 
 mer compare 391, X 439,— the only two pas- 
 sages in which he uses the word. ApoUonius 
 has it in an absohite sense in III. 255. 
 
 'Exrog: — 11. 1174 ixrog dvYipeipeog nsXe 
 VYjov; 111. 472 f^Yiaov re xai aareog ixrog el3Yjaav 
 Simihirlj- IV. 211, 1655. Cf. I 67, T 49, 8 678, 
 eio. 
 
 "ExtocSf: — I. 634 nvlkdv hroa^e; IT. 894 
 nerpdijp hroa^e. Cf. I 552; 4^ 148, etc. 
 
 "Ei^f^o^^r: — I. 929 'Poir6id(iog ev^o^sv dxr^g. 
 Cf.Z 247,11 161; (5 74. 
 
 *Ei^f^o3<:— I. 936 Jlponovri^og ev8o^i; simiLar 
 examples are: II. 346, 1265; IV. 333, 508, 
 1374, 1383. Cf. 2 287; h. Cer. 355. 
 
 ''Ev(hp: — I. 906 JlEXaayi^og hSov ^hdXxov. 
 Cf. T 13, * 200, etc. 
 
 ''Ep8p^8{v):— II. 846 axpy:g rvr^v evepy 
 'Ax^povalSog; III. 1158 xXivr^pog Evep^ev; IV. 
 535 TtoXXov evep^fv ov^eog. Cf. 16, A 252. 
 
 The form V6p^e{v), which in Homer is 
 twice construed with the genitive (H 204, 2. 
 302), is used thus by ApoUonius only in con- 
 nection with a preposition, as 1. 155 vep^e xard 
 Z^ovog, 745 vep'^ev vnex fia^olo. 
 
 'Evrog: — I. 782 7iv?i6uv re xai doreog iv- 
 T6g. Cf. M 374, 380, etc. 
 
 ""Evroa^eiv): — II. 761 ^eydpcov hroa^e; III. 
 
 [I 
 
 \ 
 
 — 2S — 
 
 754 cryj^ecoj' hroa^ev; also IV. 1066, 1133, 
 1778. For Homer compare A 454; a 380, (3 
 145, etc. 
 
 'E^eri:— II. 784 = IV. 250, 430 i^en xei- 
 mv (temp.); IV. 789 e^ki vyinvriYig, Cf. I. 106; 
 ^245. 
 
 In I. 976 en is best taken with veov in 
 the sense of ^^recently," — e^ alone governing 
 narpog. Another possibility would be to change 
 veov to the genitive veov governed by ei^-en. Cf. 
 Kuehner-Gerth, p. 540 A. 
 
 ''E^o;^a: — 1. 859 e^o^a h' aXXcor d^avdrcdv, 
 Cf. E 257, a 113, 134. 
 
 'l^ig: _ I. 1032 i^vg ioio; 11. 254 rod 5' 
 l^vg. Cf E 849, 322, M 106, 254, H 584, P 
 340, n 471; o 511, et€. 
 
 Ka^vnep^e: — III. 581 ^iaaiyjg xa^vnep^e 
 xo2.6vY!g; IV. 1377 xa^vnep^e 3aXd(7a>7$. Cf y 
 170, ^ 279, etc. 
 
 Karavrixpv:—Il, 626 i^ieftevoio xaravrixpv 
 {xar' dvrixpvl) UeXiao. Cf. x b59z=X 64,— the 
 only example in Homer. 
 
 Karonia^ei—ll. 273 rdcov 5' av xaroTtia^e, 
 Cf. X6z=fi 148. 
 
 Aa^pyj: — II. 125 Xd^pyj ivpptvoiv re xvvuv 
 avruv re vo^yjov, Cf. E 269; p 43; h. Cer. 240. 
 
 MeGT^yv:—lY . 1573 fieayjyv \ py^yfitvov, Cf. 
 259, 560, I 549, A 448, 570, N 568, n 396; x 
 
26 — 
 
 27 — 
 
 I 
 
 93, 442, 459, etc. Apolloiiius reversed the Ho- 
 meric usage of this word. Homer construed it 
 with the genitive twenty thnes; Apollonius only 
 once. Homer uses it in an absolute sense five 
 times (A 573, 316, T 371, * 521; >? 195); 
 Apollonius has it eighteen times (I. 85; II. 51, 
 270, 337, 1231); III. 307, 441, 665, 723, 929; 
 IV. 525, 600, 880, 1231, 1360 ^eaariyvg'- III. 
 1316; IV. 579, 582 ^leaaYjyv). 
 
 Mf(T<|)a:— IV. 337 ^lea^a ^akayyCivog nora^ 
 fiov xal NeaTL^og alyjg. Cf. 508 (the only ex- 
 ample of fieacpa in Homer). The phrase iii.0fa 
 airig ''untiF' occurs twice in Apollonius: II. 
 1230, 1261. 
 
 MfToTKdS'K— I. 1064 noaiog ueroTtta^e. Cf. 
 I 504; L 529. 
 
 Neto.^sp: — I. 1197 SaneSoio . . rivd^ag\v8i- 
 6^6P. Cf. Liddell and Scott s. v. The word oc- 
 curs only once in Homer: K 10 veio^ev ex x^a- 
 hiYig, for which Apollonius has two close paral- 
 lels: I. 385 vHo'^ev e^ E^py^g and I. 1313 veio- 
 ^ev 8x ?My6vidv, Apollonius lias the word also 
 in the absolute sense in I. 1288; II. 205; III. 
 383, 1302, 1357; IV. 142. 
 
 NaoSc— I. 63 e^vaero veio^i yaiyjg, 255 vsl- 
 6^1 yaiYig xslro; III. 62 veio'^i Sfaacar:— The 
 word occurs only once in Homer <t> 317 vho^l 
 Tii^vYjg. Apollonius uses it absolutely in I. 990, 
 
 .!#« 
 
 1098, 1326; II. 355; III. 164, 706; IV. 1613. 
 Nd(7c/)t(i^):— I. 197 voGipLV y '"^pax^nog, 322 
 nokvioc; v6a<pi. Similarly I. 1207, 1294; II. 275; 
 III. 577; IV. 10, 346, 352, 406, 819. Cf. A 349; 
 a 20, 185, 7t 383, w 212, 308, etc. 
 
 ^07t(5^F(r):- IV. 329 om^ev norauolo. Cf. P 
 468 om^e hlxppoio. 
 
 UdpOL^8{v): — II. 52 ^yjxe ndpot^e 7to5wr, 
 909 avrpoLO ndpoi^Ev; IV. 245 ndpoi^' ''AXvog 
 noraiiolo. Cf. A 360; h 625, etc. Absolutely: 
 (1) ndpot^Bv I. 208, 529; II. 89, 582, 654, 889; 
 III. 694; Cf. A 185, ri 125, etc. (2) to Ttapot- 
 ^ev "before" I. 254, 284, 630, 816; II. 1061; 
 III. 324, 473, 526, 894; IV. 862, 882; cf. a 322, 
 -/?312, (T 275. 
 
 ndpog: — II. 101 rov he ndf^og; III. 22= 
 422, 1062 nohm> ndpog. Cf. 254. 
 
 Ilpondpot^£{v):—I. 215 'D.iggov Ttpondpoi^s. 
 Other examples are H. 68, 529, 862; III. 254, 
 317; IV. 1475. For Homer compare A 348, n 
 218, 66; S 355, etc. In Apollonius npoTtdpot- 
 ^8P is always post-positive; in Homer it stands 
 also before the case, as in N 205; a 117, etc. 
 
 np6(T3f(r):-IV. 2U7tp6a^8a82.yjvaiy^g. This 
 is the only example of npoaS^ev with the geni- 
 tive in Apollonius. In Homer, however, we 
 find thirty-five examples; cf. M 145, N 385, T 
 13; X 4, etc. 
 
— 28 — 
 
 j^lr,-lU. 1334 ryjXe 5' tolo, Cf. A 817, H 
 539, X 291; [3 333, etc. Witli preposition: I. 
 1278 r^le 8'dn dxrijg; TV. 1472 rvj^^e k' inei- 
 po(o. Cf. A 358, n 117; e 315, etc. The ad- 
 verbial phrase TYi'X.e nape^ occurs twice in Ap- 
 ollonius: 11. 272; III. 1233. 
 
 TyiU^ev— 11. 506 ryjlo^ef Mifioviyjg. Cfl 
 Find. N. 2, 18; Soph, Aj. 204; Eurip. H. F. 
 1112. In Homer always with a preposition, as: 
 A 270, B 849, 857, 877, 2 208, etc. With e 
 283 ry^X6^8v ix ^o?.vf.icdP opkdv compare for Ap- 
 ollonius II. 402 Wt.iaparTC}v ryj-Jlo^fj^ i^ opscdv. 
 In III. 879 the genitive depends on the verb. 
 
 TYjU^t— II, 588 ryjU^i , . . TiErpdcdv. In 
 II, 795 ryj?Mi^i raierdovrog ev6a<pioai' 'UpaxX^og, 
 the genitive is absolute, and so is tyiXo^l. For 
 Homeric examples of ryi?J^i c. gen. compare A 
 30, n 461, :i 99, a 86, 541; ^ 365. 
 
 In IV. 1206 it is doubtful whether we 
 are to write dno rYi?y6^L (Brunck, Becker, Mer- 
 kel) or dnoTYjlo^i (Wellauer, Seaton). The 
 same holds good for IV. 726, 1186. The form 
 dnory^Xo^i is not Homeric; but Apollonius may 
 have used it as a variant for dnor^Xov (t 117). 
 
 XdpiJ^: — I. 851 'H^aiaroio x^?^^ noXv^Yi- 
 riog. Cf. 744, which is Jilso the only example 
 in Homer. 
 
 
 
 — 29 — 
 
 b) APOI.I.ONIUS HAS CASE -CONSTRUCTION, WHERE 
 HOMER HAS ONLY THE ABSOLUTE SENSE. 
 
 *Av8lx^' — I- ^^8 dvSixoL Tolo dpaxrog; II. 
 929 dvfiLXOi <5' at ;^i;T^(jr. 
 
 Absol.: II. 577; III. 23; IV. 31. Cf. U 
 412, 578, 2 511, T 387, X 120. 
 
 'ATto-TtpoS't: — III. 313 fidXa noXkov dno- 
 7ipo%i ^ok^ihog oiYig, 372 rxp^a'Xiucdv [lot dnonpo- 
 S^t, 1064 dnonpo^i noX?i6v eolo. 
 
 Absol.: I. 602; IV. 287, 553, 1633. Cf. 
 S 757, 811, 6 80, L 18, 35, etc. 
 
 KarEiuvrlov: — II. 360 xarevavriov dpxrov. 
 This is the only instance of the word in Apol- 
 lonius; Homer has it likewise only once <& 567, 
 and in the absolute sense. 
 
 Ilpocrw: — IV. 1266 ;^Fpcroi; noXkov Ttpdcrw. 
 Cf. Soph. Aj. 204.— Absol.: A 572, M 274, etc. 
 
 "Tnep^Bv: — I. 534, 573, 622 vnep^' dkog, 
 1088 vTiEp^ev vyjiov, 1096 vnep^sv aelo; III. 
 1222 vLcpoEvrog vnep^ev KavxdGov, IV. 95(5 aly- 
 Xyjevrog imep^ev oifavov, 1139 rolo 5' vnsp^sv. 
 — Cf. Aesch. Sept. 228, Ag. 232.— Absol.: II. 
 322, 734, 1035, 1067; III. 205, 883, 1259; IV. 
 571. Cf 8 184, ^ 393, 476, v 2, etc. 
 
 'r^i.6^8v:— II. 808 I46^8v dxpr.g; IV. 168 
 iij/oS'fJ^ . . . v7tcopo(pLov ^akdfioLO. Cf. Pind. 01. 
 III. 12. — Absol.: I. 1203; III. 542; IV. 1374. 
 Cf. M 383; /3 147, et«. 
 
 I 
 
I 
 
 — 30 — 
 
 'rU^i: — 11. 571 H6^t S' dx^yjg, 1081 
 
 v^'oS'f vYjog; IV. 84() nepaiyjg v^ld^i yairig, 924 
 7tvpL^a?.7teog vyl^o^i nerpYjg. — AbsoL: I. 590; IL 
 354, 935; IV. 46, 1285, 1422, 1680, 1707. Cf. 
 K 16, P 676, T 376. 
 
 Note: Homer, on the other hand, hag 
 sometimes case-construction, where ApoUonius 
 has only the absohite sense; e. g. dy^ov (ft 709; 
 ^ 5); d^<pig (c. gen. B 384, 444; c. dat. E 723; 
 c. ace. H 274; ^ 266); dvtLxpv (E 130, 819; x 
 559). Simihirly dvriov, i^om^sv, rep^ev, bni- 
 crw (oTticTCTco) , TtpoTfpo, T)7/loi;, VTthe^^BV. 
 
 C) APOLLONIUS HAS CASE-ADVERBS, NOT FOUND 
 
 IN HOMER. 
 
 ' A j^TiTtf p)73fi^: — II. 1032 dvrmepYi'^ev v^ 
 aov; III. 1270 aareog avr iTtepyj^sv. — AbsoL: I. 
 613, 977; II. 1177; IV. 470.— Ai^Tf7ifp>7i; is 
 used only absolutely in ApoUonius. The pas- 
 sages cited by Linsenbarth for case-construction 
 are examples of the absolute use. In II. 177 
 the dative (not the genitive) depends on the 
 verb, and in I. 722 and IV. 68 the genitive is 
 adnominal. 
 
 "^ Anoxpi^ov; — II. 15 aTtoxpiSdv . . . 6fj.L?x)v. 
 Cf Liddell and Scott s. v. 
 
 ''Ancj^ev: — IV. 323 amd^sv . . . 'Ayyov- 
 
 /- 
 
 — 31 — 
 
 pov optog, 952 dTtw.^cz' nerpdcov. Cf Eurip. 
 Iph. T. 108. 
 
 The absolute sense occurs ten times in 
 ApoUonius: I. 583; II. 48, 86, 433, 983; III. 
 1136, 1190; IV. 443, 1170, 1569. 
 
 ^ExTto^ev:— III. 262 exm^ei^ dryjg, 1288 
 sxno^Ev dippdaroLO xev^iimfog j(^^oviov. 
 
 'Eraj-ioiSa^tg: — I. 380 rcdv S^ eva^0i[3ahig 
 avrol ereoja^ev dfKpoTEpcxi^ev. A similar ex- 
 ample is IV. 199 duoii3a^ig dvspog dvi^p ii^o^evog^ 
 although here we may have a blending of 
 two constructions. Cf Solon 12 (4), 1. 43cr7ifi;- 
 ^81 (V d/lXoJ>ci' d?.?^og; but Theocr. I. 34 nap Se 
 ol di^^peg I xaTiOV s^£Lpd^ovT£g df^iotiSafiig aXXo^ev 
 a?i?iog I v6LX8iovG' eTtttoai. 
 
 'EvoTiayig — IV. 1505 hnorphoaprog ivuna- 
 S/g.— AbsoL: IV. 354, 718, 1413. 
 
 'Ead;^pt: — I. 604 iod^pt Mvptpyjg. 
 
 Karevavria: — IL 1118 xarevavrla v/iaov. 
 Cf Dion. P. 114. 
 
 Mejjo^t: — II. 172 ^eaao^L vyjog. Here fiea- 
 ao^L is a poetic variant for fisra^v. — AbsoL: I. 
 1278. 
 
 MeroTtiv: — IV. 1762 (.leromv . . . Ev(py!uoLO. 
 
 UapoLrepo: — II. 427 rcSvSs napoLTepu. Ab- 
 soL: II. 686. 
 
 nfpia;i;ia: — II. 217 nepiaXXa ^euv. AbsoL: 
 III. 529; Hom. h. XIX. 46. 
 
— 32 — 
 
 Uporepoae: — L 1241 lov npoTspidae xe^^ev- 
 S^ov; II. 394 vrjaov ^e TtporepcjGe xai rjteipoio its- 
 pairig (pepfiovrai ^iT^vpeg. — Absol.: I. 306, 391, 
 592, 964, 1014; 11. 369, 554, 621; III. 1287; 
 IV. 498, 1375, 1608. Cf. Horn. h. 32, 10. 
 
 B. WITH THE DATIVE. 
 
 As T. Mommsen (p. 186) observes, there 
 are two characteristic differences between the 
 Alexandrian poets and the early bards; (1) the 
 decrease of ^srd with the dative (and to some 
 extent also of a^ua) and (2) the increase of syn- 
 onymous adverbs, as fiiya, a^iiiya and the like 
 with the dative. 
 
 a) APOLLONIUS AGREES WITH HOMER. 
 
 "Alia: — 1) temporal: I. 607 au r.eXloio (3o- 
 Xalg. Similar examples are: I 1362; II. 945, 
 1123; III. 1171. Cf. 1 682, 2 136, 210, etc. 
 
 2) sociative: I. 257 xp(c5 afi. Similar 
 examples are: I. 656, 637; II. 210, 419; III. 
 256, 880, 915, 1242; IV. 363.— Cf. K 196, etc. 
 
 3) concomitant: I. 425 afj.' evj^uXf, 
 III. 632 aaa xXayyii; IV. 1599 aaa 5' fij^oX^- 
 atv. Cf.^ 161; Horn. h. 24, 15. 
 
 'Ouov: — II. 121 ofiov 8i ol eaasvovro Aiaxl- 
 8aL, 788 oiiov MvgoIglv. Other examples are: 
 
 
 Ai^ 
 
 — sa- 
 il. 841, 891, 964; IV. 1329. Cf. E 867, 118, 
 etc. 
 
 "Eyyv^evi—II. 137 a^iaiv iyyv^ev. Cf. P 
 554, 2 133. 
 
 b) APOLLONIUS HAS CASK - CONSTRUCTION, WHERK 
 HOMER HAS ONI.Y THE ABSOLUTE SENSE. 
 
 "Avri^v: — III. 100 avryiv \ d?.?L^XaLg. — 
 Absol.: III. 1009, 1065. Cf. 11 223; e 77, etc. 
 
 C) APOLLONIUS HAS CASE- ADVERBS, NOT FOUND 
 
 IN HOMER. 
 
 *A[i(iiya: — I. 573=11. 985 afifiiya navpoig-, 
 III. 1404 afifitya KoXxoig. Cf. Herod. VI. 58, 
 16 av/ifitya yvvat^i — Absol.: IV. 626, 1194. 
 
 Mtya:— IV. 1343 fiiya ^Yi^^^vrepYiGLV. Cf. 
 Find. Pyth. IV. 113. Similarly fxiySa in Ho- 
 mer 437. 
 
 C. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 UepL^ (not Homeric): — II. 204 yalav Si 
 Ttepi^, 573 vyja , . , nepi^; III. 1213 nepi^ Se 
 fiiv iare^dvcipro. Cf. Aesch. Pers. 368; Eurip. 
 H. F. 243. In Herodotus the word governs the 
 accusative frequently, and the genitive twice: 
 I. 179; II. 91. The absolute sense is found in 
 ApoUonius in I. 1097; III. 1290; IV. 272, 281 
 1518, with which compare Aesch, Pers. 418; 
 Soph. Ant. 1301; Eurip. Andr. 266. 
 
--34 — 
 
 D. WITH THE GENITIVE AND DATIVE. 
 
 Of the five adverbs that govern the geni- 
 tive and the dative in Apollonius, only ax^hov 
 has both cases in Homer. IlfXag governs only 
 the genitive in Homer. 'ETtttTj^epo and e^vne^- 
 ^€v are nsed only absolutely in Homer; Avhile 
 imax^Sop is not a Homeric word. 
 
 Xxe^6v:—1) With the genitive: I. 402 aXog 
 ax^Sov, 408 [3(a^ov axe^ov. 1243 Uyjyecjv axe^op. 
 Similarly H. 1099, 1193, 1255; EL 1072; IV. 
 469, 506, 1123, 1311, 1742. Cf. T 263; S 439, 
 e 288, etc. 
 
 2) With the dative: I. 671 r^ xai Ttapi^- 
 evixal nlavpeg ax^^ov tlipiouvro. Cf. [i 284, i 22. 
 
 UeXagi—l) With the genitive: III. 1073 
 vrjaov niXag; IV. 1343 op^oio nsXag. Cf o 257 
 TYi^ief^iaxov nsXag (the only example of niXag 
 c. gen. in Homer). Likewise, the word is found 
 only once in the absolute sense in Homer {x 
 516); whereas Apollonius has it more often; 
 cf I. 737; n. 187, 984; HI. 59, 1235; IV. 718! 
 
 2) With the dative: II. 1049 Tte^a^ n^lv. 
 Cf. Find. 01. VII. 34, N. XL 4; Aesch, Supp. 208. 
 
 "Eniaxep6: — 1) With the genitive: IV. 451 
 imaxBpcd . . . doiS^g. 
 
 2) With the dative: I. 528 iniaxepo dXX- 
 rfkoKSiv, Absol.: III. 170, 1268. Cf A 668, 
 2 68, ip 125. 
 
 t' 
 
 I 
 
 iir 
 
 i -^. 
 
 '^U 
 
 \ 
 
 — 35 — 
 
 'E<^i;7tfp^f(r): — 1) With the genitive: 11. 
 395 *ai;p(jj^ 5' €>i;7tep^fi^; III. 217 €<^i;7tep3f 
 SofiOLo; IV. 1706 SoLOUdV Se fii^g i(pv7t8p^ev. 
 
 2) With the dative: III. 833 d^/?po(T6w S' 
 i^vnep^e xapyjan ^dXke xaXvnrpyjp, — Absol.: 
 IV. 176. Cf a 645: S 298, etc. 
 
 'EmaxeSop: — 1) With the genitive: 11. 
 1286 sTtiaxs^op . . . veiGof.iepidP ; IV. 946 
 ni^a^oevrog emax^^op aiytakolo. Cf h. Ap. 3 
 imcxs^op €p;^0|Mf j'oto. 
 
 2) With the dative: II. 606 intaxe^ov 
 (U;i>7Xy?(Ttr:— Absol.: 11. 492; IV. 1108, 1185, 
 1348. 
 
 E. WITH THE GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 EI(TG):— 1) With the genitive: L 372 
 elcTw a?i6g; II. 136 slao) Be(3pvxiyjg, 579 elcrw 
 Tterpdcdp; III. 311 hnspcyjg bIgo} ;^3oj^og. The 
 variant eao c. gen. occurs three times : I. 
 357=390 €G(j a;i6$; XL 73 eaco rolxoto. Cf Z 
 284=X 425; yj 135; ^ 290;— Aesch. Sept. 232, 
 539, Ag. 1022; Soph. 0. T. 1515, Tr. 902, El. 
 39; Eurip. Med. 89, 100, 135, etc. 
 
 2) With the accusative: HI. 1018 (pphag 
 flcTo; IV. 308 x6?i7top eao noproto. Cf A 71, 
 r 322, Z 10, 2 441, 11 155, 184, 199; X 579, 
 etc.— Absol.: 11. 95, 736; III. 48, 651; IV. 710. 
 Cf H 270, 8 775, etc. 
 
»• / 
 
 37 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 1 
 
 ^•^M 
 
 PREPOSITIONS USED AS INDEPENDENT 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 The adverbial use of the prepositions belongs 
 chiefly to the epic language. It is less frequent in 
 lyric and dramatic poetry, as also in Ionic prose. In 
 Attic prose only Tzpd^di and xai npo^ have survived. 
 Cf. Kriiger-Pokel, P. II., Sec. 68,2; Kiihner-Gerth, 
 Sec. 443. 
 
 According to the general opinion this was the 
 original use of prepositions, though Delbriick 
 (Grundr., 275) thinks that the «</-verbial use came 
 from the/r^-verbial, which would make tmesis older. 
 
 In ApoUonius there is, as might be expected, a 
 considerable increase in the adverbial use of 
 prepositions. He has 124 examples, while Homer 
 has 317 in all. In proportion to the bulk of his 
 work ApoUonius used the prepositions as adverbs 
 nearly twice as often as Homer. He has on the 
 average one in 47 lines, while Homer has one only 
 in 89. 1 lines (II. 83, Od. 98 4). As a rule when the 
 preposition is used adverbially, it is placed at the 
 head of a sentence or clause ; consequently, a particle 
 usually follows it to give it the tone of an independent 
 adverb. Out of the 124 examples in ApoUonius 95 
 occur at the beginning, and only 29 are found in the 
 middle of a sentence or clause ; 104 are followed by a 
 particle («J^75, r^p-12, t^-ii, xae'-3, ^'y'-^, r^-^^-i), and 
 
only 20 are without a particle. The prepositions 
 not used at the head of the sentence or clause, nor 
 accompanied by a particle, are chiefly the double 
 prepositions itapi^^ dtarrpo^ tniTzpo and TtpoTtpo ; also k-^t 
 and Ttepi in a few phrases. Attention may be drawn 
 to the frequent occurence of the adverbial prep- 
 ositions in the fifth foot. 
 
 Apollonius differs from Homer in a number of 
 details. Notably is this the case with fierd^ 7:p6 and 
 «rwy, which he employs more frequently as indepen- 
 dent adverbs ; vice versa, (hanpo and Tzapd are more 
 frequent in Homer. 'Avd, dr.or.po and ot:6 are 
 not used adverbially in the Argonautica as in the 
 Odyssey or in the Iliad. 'Em7:po^ which Apollonius 
 uses eleven times and only adverbially, is not a 
 Homeric word. Also -poitpd is un-Homeric. 
 
 TABLE SHOWING THE FREQUENCY OF THE ADVERBIAI, USE OF 
 
 PREPOSITIONS IN APOI,I,ONIUS, AS COMPARED 
 WITH THEIR FREQUENCY IN HOMER. 
 
 Prepos. 
 
 iv 
 
 fjuerd 
 
 hrtirpb 
 
 Tp)6 
 
 iirl 
 
 Tap^K 
 
 7rp6s 
 
 wapd 
 
 Tpoirpd 
 
 Siatrpd 
 
 T€piTp6 
 
 wtpi r d/nf>l T€ 
 
 dpd 
 
 diroTpd 
 
 inrd 
 
 I. 
 
 7 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 II. 
 
 8 
 2 
 I 
 
 2 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 I 
 I 
 I 
 o 
 o 
 I 
 I 
 o 
 o 
 o 
 
 III 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 I 
 
 3 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 o 
 o 
 o 
 o 
 o 
 o 
 
 IV. 
 
 6 
 6 
 6 
 8 
 2 
 
 4 
 2 
 2 
 o 
 I 
 o 
 I 
 I 
 o 
 I 
 o 
 o 
 o 
 
 TotinAp. 
 
 23 
 20 
 
 15 
 14 
 10 
 II 
 
 7 
 7 
 5 
 4 
 2 
 2 
 I 
 I 
 2 
 o 
 o 
 o 
 
 Total in Homer. 
 
 Total 
 
 80 1 . 43. Od. 37) 
 
 64(11.41, Od. 23) 
 
 59(11.27, Od. 32) 
 
 6(11. 4. Od. 2) 
 
 3(K224,4'879, «387) 
 o 
 
 10 (II. 7, Od. 3) 
 
 21 (II. 17, Od. 4) 
 
 8 (II. 2, Od. 6) 
 
 12 (II. 7, Od. 5) 
 
 17 (II. II. Od. 6) 
 o 
 
 18 (II. 16, Od. 2) 
 2 (A i8o=n699) 
 
 2(d/A^iTepf-4>io, 4^191) 
 2 (2562, «343) 
 2 (n669, 679) 
 9 (II. 7. Od. 2.) 
 
 25+244-35+40 = 12I II315 (II. 192, Od. i23.) 
 
 — 39 
 
 .|i!ii 
 
 — 'A^c^t — 
 I. 238 d^<pl Se >lat5i^ | nTiYj^vg anepj^^ouevov ativ- 
 
 I. 880 di.i<pl Se X6tf^adv\§pGi^eig ydvvrat. Cf. ^'' 292. 
 
 IV. 1299 duipl he Keiucyv | tpayjetg iSpsuerai, 
 
 Similarly nepi in II 569. 
 I. 1123 du(pi he (pvXXoig \ are^d^ievoi h^vtvoiai 
 
 ^VYinoXiYig 6^e?Mvro, 
 
 I. 1154 d^<pl yap ai^yjp | v/ive^og earopeaev hi- 
 
 vag. Cf. X 94. 
 
 II. 921 d^^l he xoKyi \ rerpd^a^iog (polvixL Xo^o) 
 
 ene'Xd^nero nrikrii^. Cf. 608 d^i^l he 
 
 niikYit, I (s^ephoJkeov xpordcpoiOL TLpdaaero 
 
 • fiapvafievoio, X 134 ai.i(pi he ^oi^^dg ekdanero^ 
 
 II. 1207 d^(pl he KoT^x^av \ e^vea vaierdovaiv. 
 
 Cf. n 234, X 408. 
 
 III. 166 d^^i he novrog. Cf M 460. 
 
 III. 424 ^ovXyiv h' d^^l noT^vv arp6<pa ^popov. 
 III. 810 du^i he ndaat \ ^viiyjhelg ^ioroto fieXyj- 
 
 hoveg IvhdTi^ovro. 
 III. 882 df.i<pi he S'Tjpe^ | xvvC^yj^fioj aaivovGiv 
 
 vnorpoixeovreg lovaav, 
 III. 884 d^(pi he Xaot | elxov, Cf. H 83; X 136. 
 III. 1247 dfi^i h' eralpOL \ Tteipyjaav revj(^eidv. 
 III. 1346 d^i^l 5' eralpoi \ ^dpavvov ^v^olcjiv. 
 
 Cf. K 151, 9; L 544. 
 
 III. 1351 dficpl he 7toX;i6$ I d^pog, Cf. fl 163. 
 
 IV. 129 d^(pi he ^axpai \ 'hoveg nora^olo. 
 
/ 
 
 — 40 — 
 
 IV. 311 dfi^i Se Soiai | ax,'i.^ovrai Ttpo^oai 
 IV. 601 afifi Se xovpai | 'HXidheg. Cf. A 328. 
 IV. 941 dfifi Sexv^a. Cf. A 481; 3 427, eUl. 
 IV. 1396 dfiipi fie vvfi^ai \ 'EanepiSeg nolnvvov, 
 
 — Aianpo — 
 IV. 313 TYi 5e Sianpo | "A\)yvprog Ko^x^l re So- 
 tJTfpoj^ (5p^>7^>7(ittj^. Cf. T 276, 4> 164, etc. 
 
 — ev — 
 
 In point of frequency of the prepositions 
 in the adverbial use, ev holds the third highest 
 place in Apollonius as well as in Homer. Also 
 in Ionic prose ev is often used adverbially, 
 jundbarg (p. 5) cites twenty-five examples 
 from Herodotus. For most of the examples 
 from Apollonius are found close parallels in 
 Homer. 
 
 I. 752 h he hvLi Si^poi nenovi^aro Sy^pioovreg. 
 
 Cf.E 740-741, 2 490, 573, 587; >? 129, etc. 
 I. 759 ev xai 'ATtoaXcjj^ <I>oa/3o$ oiarevoiv irirv- 
 
 xTo, Cf. 2 483. 
 
 L 939 ev 8e ol dxrai | dfi(plSv(ioL. Cf. r 173, 175, 
 etc. 
 
 I. 948 ev h'fjpcjg AlvYiLog v\o<; avaaaev. Cf. Soph 
 
 O. T, 27, 182. 
 I. 1262 ev he xeXaivov vno cnTidyxvoig ^eev alfia. 
 
 With this compare the following examples, 
 in which the dative is ethical: III. 1042 iv hi 
 
 «► 
 
 i '^.-4 
 
 — 41 — 
 
 oi dXxY! I l(T(Ter'; IV. 169 ev he ol ^rop ;tatpet; 
 IV. 1064 iv he ol ^Top . . . e^'aero; IV. 1541 
 iv he ol 6aae . . . ^d^nerai-, IV. 16 ev he ol oa- 
 ae nTJfixo nvpog. Cf. T 16, 366; ^ 131. 
 
 II. 1266 iv he xal avrov \ larov d(pap ;^a^a(Tar- 
 
 To napaxTiLhov. 
 
 III. 1090 iv h' avrvi 'lai^'^xdg, euyj n6'kig, iv he 
 xai d/l/lat noTiXai vaierdovoiv (are situated)- 
 For this use of avryj compare: I. 23, 109, 
 349; III. 269; also Z 451, ^ 441, etc. The 
 emendation to aiV?? (Brunck, Wellauer, 
 Lehrs and Seaton) is unnecessary, espec- 
 ially since the reading of LG is avryj 
 
 IV. 655, 656 iv he aoXoi xal rpv^ea ^eaxe:^a 
 
 xeivGiv, I iv he Xi^yiv 'Apywog incovvfiiy^v ne- 
 (pdrLOrau Cf. H 551; l 136. 
 
 - 'Em - 
 
 The preposition ini when adverbial is used 
 a) in a local sense, "near", "by", "above'' or 
 "over"; b) in a temporal sense, "next", "after", 
 "thereupon". This second usage is not Homeric. 
 
 a) Of place:— II. 370 inl he arofia Sepfi^- 
 hovrog . . . fivperai; II. 1072 ini he U^l ia- 
 aelovro; III. 1207 inl h' dpveLov rd^ie Xaifidv. 
 Cf. A 462=j/ 459 ini h' al^ona olvov 7,el(ie', also 
 A 639, 640; 2 612, etc. 
 
 b) Of succession in time:— III. 726 rolov h' 
 
— 42 — 
 
 ini fiv^ov hiTtev, which occurs with slight varia- 
 tion in III. 779, IV. 1095,1594. Cf. Herod. IV. 
 59, VIII. 93. In Homer A 25, 379, et<j., ini is 
 to be construed with the verb. 
 
 This double preposition does not occur in 
 Homer. In Apollonius it is used only in the 
 absolute sense, "forwards". Only in three places 
 is it followed by a particle. I. 30, 983, 1156; 
 II. 133 {M), 904, 1247 (yap); III. 1337; IV. 
 141, 296 (yap), 593, 1388. 
 
 — MfTa — 
 
 a) In the local sense "beyond", "next to": 
 II. 374 ^erd re afwyepidrarot avSpc^v \ Tpy?;^^)?^ 
 XdXi;/iJe$ xai drsipea yalav exovaiv. Cf. ^ 133; 
 fp 231; also Herod. I. 142, 145. 
 
 II. 396 ^8rd 5' av 7iepi6aia (pvXa Bex^ipoiv, 
 
 b) In the temporal sense "thereupon", "after''. 
 This use, like the temporal adverbial ini is not 
 Homeric; cf. T. Mommsen, p. 42. It occurs 
 frequently in Herodotus; cf Lundberg p. 7. 
 I. 708 ^erd h' eig sov opro veea^i. Cf Herod. 
 I. 11, 19, 22, 26, 30, etc. 
 
 III. 969 iierd 5' avrig vno ^lUYig dvefiOLO \ xlvv- 
 (jievai ofid^Yjaav dneipirov. 
 
 III. 1146 fierd 5' aire hier^ayov, 
 
 IV. 24 ^lerd h^ ijye naXiaavrog d3p6a xo/lTtcor 
 
 X 
 
 
 -43 - 
 
 ^dpfiaxa Ttdvr dfivSig xarf;^ei;aTo ^wpta- 
 
 fxolo. 
 IV. 80 ^erd 8e <i>p6vrig re xal ''Apyog, | vie 8vu 
 
 <I>pt^oi;, ;^a^d5($ ^opor. 
 IV. 877 ^erd 5' ovn naXiaavrog Ixer^ oTtlaao. 
 IV. 1219 ^erd 5' avre Sv68exa SQixev enea^ac \ 
 
 MriSeiYi Sfiodg. 
 IV. 1257 ^erd 5' avrog . | . "Ayxalog . . dyo- 
 
 pevaev, 
 IV. 1423 ^erd 5' epvea ryjXe^dovra] . . . r.e^ovro, 
 IV. 1588 ^erd 5' ovr ig ia eSpaxev. 
 IV. 1688 fierd 5' olye veov . | . Ipov . . ISpvcavro. 
 c) In the concomitant sense "together with": 
 III. 115 fierd xai Favvfiy^^ea lfvpe~\. Cf. B 446, 
 
 477,0 67 (La Roche). 
 
 — Hapd — 
 
 II. 841 Ttapa 5' danera [lYiTja | . • . ra^yjia Xat- 
 
 fiorofiYjaav. Cf A 611, B 279, etc. 
 
 III. 1285 Ttapd 5' o^pi^ov ey^og enri^ev \ 6p36r 
 m ovpidxiii- Cf r 135, K 153. 
 
 — Hape^ — 
 
 1) "Away": II. 272=111. \2^^r^:Ke nape^ "far 
 
 away". 
 
 2) "Besides": III. 195 ov 5' eaxe nape^ ong d?iXo 
 
 xeXevoi. Cf. 8 348. 
 III. 237 SaiSaXeyj 6' al^ovaa nape^ ixdrep^e 
 rirvxro. 
 
— 44 — 
 
 III. 1050 xai he roi ct/lXo Ttape^ hno^i^ao^* 6v- 
 eiap, Cf. ^ 168. 
 
 — Ilfpt — 
 
 Of all the prepositions Ttepl is most fre- 
 quently used as an adverb in ApoUonius as well 
 as in Homer. In this use it means either "on 
 all sides'', "around'' (Lat. undique) or "exceed- 
 ingly". 
 
 a) Of the place, "on all sides", Lat. undique: 
 
 I. 1036 ndvTYi Se Ttspt ^eya nenrarai ?p;co$. Cf. 
 
 E 194 a^^t ^6 nenXoi \ ninravraL. 
 
 II. 301 Tocppa 5' dpiar^eg Ttivoev nepi Sep^ia ye- 
 
 povTog I ndvrri <pOLf3yjGavreg. 
 II. 569 navTYi ^e itEpi (liyag l^pE^Ev ai^rip. Cf. 
 
 I. 880; IV. 1299. 
 II. 665 TiEpi (V aOTiErog ISpc^g \el(3eraL ex Xayovuv. 
 
 II. 1107 axoTOEig 6e nepi ^6<pog r^pyipeiaro. 
 
 III. 1247 nepl hi ^i^og. 
 
 IV. 1310 TtEpi 5' o^vTaTai ^epov avyai \ t^eXlov 
 
 IV. 1708 fiapfiapEyjv Si* dneTia^-^^ ^log TiEpl 
 
 ndvTo'^Ev aiy'kYiv, Cf p 439. 
 
 b) Of the degree, "exceedingly", as equiv- 
 alent to 7tfpt<T(TG}$. Cf Delbrueck, Grundr. p. 
 703. Ancient as well as modern scholars are 
 not agreed how to accent this TCEpi. Beck and 
 La Roche write Ttfpt, while Wolf and Ameis 
 
 > 
 
 — 45- 
 
 prefer Ttepi in Homer. For ApoUonius, Brunck, 
 Wellauer and Lehrs use Ttept; but Merkel has 
 the form without anastrophe. 
 I. 101 og TtEpi ndvrag 'Epe;^S^et5a$ exExaaro, 
 I. 138 og TtEpi Ttdvrag ixaivvro vavriXtriaiv. 
 I. 670 TtEpi hk ^EVEaiv dyopEVGai. Cf. 11 186. 
 I. 771 TtEpi yap iiEvmivEv ETtEO^ai \ ryjv ohov, 
 
 I. 1333 TtEpi yap ^' d^og yixev eviaTtElv. Cf. 
 
 II 279. 
 IL 20 TtEpi 5' a^ YioT^vhEvxEa ti^Ev ofiox^T^. Cf. 
 
 ^88. 
 
 II. 53 TtEpi 5' oly EOav iaxXyjuTEg. Cf. 2 549, 
 
 4> 105. 
 
 II. 241 TtEpi 5' avTE Svo) vlag ^opkao. 
 
 III. 1354 (ppi^Ev Se TtEpi onfiapolg oaxEEoaLV 
 Sovpaai t' d^^iyvoig xopv^Eoal te T^a^Tto^Ev- 
 riaiv I "^ ApYiog TEfiEvog. Cf h. Cer. 472. 
 
 IV. 181 TtEpi yap hiEv, Cf E 566=P 666, 1 433, 
 A 557; X 96. 
 
 IV. 1029=1381 CO TtEpi Syj lUEya ^Epraroi. 
 
 — Ilept r cifi^L TE — 
 
 This double preposition, which is the equiv- 
 alent for the Homeric d^iptnEpi, occurs three 
 times in ApoUonius. In HI. 633 it is used in 
 case-construction, as it is also in P 760, the only 
 example of TtEpi t' d^<pi te in Homer. In the 
 other two passages, ApoUonius uses it in the 
 absolute sense. 
 
-46- 
 
 — 47 — 
 
 n. 1211 rolog ^uv 6 fig TUpi r' du^pi re Ipurat. 
 
 Cf. h. Cer. 276. 
 IV. 158 Ttepi r' dfupi re vripirog 6S//>7 1 <pap^dxov 
 
 vnvov e^aXke. 
 
 — rieptTtpo — 
 The only example in Apollonius is II. 869 
 TteptTtpo ydp ei ixexaaro \ i^vvetv, an imitation 
 oF the only example in Homer [A 180] =11 699 
 nspLTtpo ydp lyx^^ ^vev. 
 
 -np6- 
 
 In Apollonius the adverbial npo is used 
 only in the temporal sense; in Homer it is tem- 
 poral (A 70; a 37) and local (H 188). The 
 examples from the Argonautica are: 
 
 I. 1246 Ttpo yap ai^Tot ivi ara^uolai vofiijeg sT^aav, 
 
 II. 1045 Ttpo yap dyxv^ reivato ro^a. 
 
 III. 385 Ttpo ydp arro; dim4/aro ^EtltxioLaiv, 
 III. 1173 [ne^Ttov] Ttpo fiev avrov dprjifiXov Te- 
 
 ylauwj'a. 
 
 III. 1197 Ttpo ydp r' aXiyvvev exaara, 
 
 IV. 84 Ttpo ydp r dvafavSd rervxtai ndvra 
 fidX\ 
 
 IV. 558 Ttpo re ^vpia nvj ^av^svrag. 
 
 — npoTtpo — 
 
 This preposition is not found in Homer. 
 Apollonius has it three times, once in case con- 
 struction and twice in the absolute sense. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^if 
 
 m "W ilBlifc 
 
 »1 
 
 III. 1012 nponpo h' d<pei6riaaaa ^vu^eog e^eXe ^d- 
 rprig \ fdpfiaxov, 
 
 IV. 1233 ^f-^ZP^^ Lxovro \ TipoTtpo ^idTj evho'^i 
 2i5pTir. 
 
 — Hpog — 
 
 Ylpog is the only preposition which occurs 
 adverbially in good Attic prose. Cf. Kuehner- 
 Gerth, Sec. 443, 2. For this reason it is not 
 surprising to find only four examples in Apol- 
 lonius, viz.: 
 
 II. 222 ov ydp /lovvov . . . Ttpo$ 5' eri. This 
 example is interesting and especially note- 
 worthy. It has no parallel in Homer, and 
 it is evidently a poetic variant for the ordi- 
 nary prose expression: ov ^ovov, d/l/ld xal 
 (Lat. non solum, sed etiam). 
 
 III. 232 Ttpog he xal avroyvov an^apov dhd^av- 
 rog aporpov \ ^Aaaer. Cf. E 307 K 108 
 (TtoTt), N 678, n 86, X 59; e 255, etc. 
 
 III. 1045 Ttp6$ Se xal aurw hovpl ddxog nena- 
 Xayfievov earo \ xal ^tfog, 
 
 IV. 527 Ttpog S'avrol ifiYixoLvocdvro xeT^ev^ov. 
 
 — Xvv — 
 
 Although Vogrinz, Monro and Haggett do 
 not admit the adverbial use of avv in Homer, it 
 seems from the context that in cj 378 avv is an 
 adverb; also in K 224 (cf Kuehner-Gerth, Sec. 
 
( 
 
 -48- 
 
 443) and in "P 879.— At any rate, this use ob- 
 tains in ApoUonius, who has it ^sometimes in 
 phrases where Homer would use afia (adv) . 
 I 74 avv xal rpkog ^ev 'Oil^ig. Cf. Eunp. Iph. 
 
 A. 268; H. F. 785. , 
 
 I. 202 avv he naXaif/owo? Aepvoi. nan a^levioio. 
 I. 998=IV. 253 <Tt»»' he xal uXXoi. Cf. o 387. 
 III. 518 avv he xal Olveihrn. 
 III. 1174 avv he xal Ai^^ihriv. 
 More noteworthy are: — 
 I. 156 avv he Uepixlvtievog iiYi^rnog ofTo veeg^i. 
 ni 707 avv he xdp>7 xoTiTtoig nepixa^^alev, 
 ' which Lehrs translates by "unaque caput 
 
 sinui injecit." 
 IV. 1164 avv he rig aiel \ Tttxpj? Tia^fiefi^^xev 
 
 ev^ooavvipaiv dvii^. ^ 
 
 Very curious is III. 700 avv re dpj?- 
 areioa neXea^i. I prefer with Wellauer to take 
 avvas a simple adverb here, though tmesis 
 with the verb {aiv . . . TuXea^i) is pos- 
 sible. The scholiast thought even of tmesis 
 with the noun {avv . hpr,areifa=n avvepyog), 
 for which compare the chapter on the preposi- 
 tions in adverbial phrases. 
 
 — 49 — 
 
 Note: — Here may also be mentioned the 
 five examples from ApoUonius in which the pre- 
 position is equivalent to a compound verb, i. e. 
 the idea of the verb is so subordinate to the 
 preposition that the verb is dropped altogether. 
 This use is more common in Homer than in 
 ApoUonius. 
 ' Ava=dvd<iTy!^i TV. 1322. Cf. Z 331, I 247, 
 
 2 178; a 13. 
 'Av=dveary! I. 494. Cf. 3 115. 
 ndpa=ndpsari IV. 1260, 1272, 1553. Cf. A 
 
 174, E 603, ete. Homer has also evi=ev- 
 
 eari, S 603, 846, i 126, Ti 267, a 355, ete. 
 'Eni=e7teari ^ 92, n 315; N 104; and /^era^ 
 
 fiereati <p 93. 
 
— 51 -- 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 r- 
 
 I 
 
 PREPOSITIONS USED IN THE SO- 
 CALLED TMESIS. 
 
 NATURE OF TMESIS. 
 
 Closely connected with the independent adverbial 
 use of prepositions is the use of the so-called tmesis. 
 The one overlaps the other so much that the two 
 are not always to be distinguished by any fixed line. 
 The difference is, that in the case of tmesis the 
 preposition is not so much an independent adverb ; 
 but it is rather felt to constitute with the verb a unit, 
 although it still has an independent position in the 
 sentence. **The clearest cases of tmesis," as Monro 
 (p. 164) says, "are those in which the compound 
 verb is necessary for the construction of the other 
 words in the sentence ; e. g. «5? 7r«r an Alv^iav iU/irjv, 
 or OTTO d" eff^ero iiktHov * promised hire. ' ' ' 
 
 In the Homeric language there can hardly be any 
 question of tmesis in the strict sense, i. e. a splitting 
 of a compound verb, so that other words come be- 
 tween the preposition and the verb. The apparent 
 cases of tmesis are, for the greater part, not the 
 result of division, but the maintenance of an earlier 
 usage in which the preposition as an independent 
 word received an independent position in the sentence, 
 when as yet the fusion of both in the compound had 
 not taken place. (See Kiihner-Gerth, p. 530). 
 
— 52 — 
 
 The Greek grammarians used the term r/ir7/T£?, because 
 they took as their norm the later established usage 
 and looked on the independent position of the prepo- 
 sition in the Homeric language as the result of the 
 actual splitting of the compound verb. 
 
 The difficulty of classifying the various usages of 
 the prepositions is generally recognized ; but it is 
 most embarrassing, when there are three possibilities 
 of construing the preposition :— ( i ) as an independent 
 adverb. (2) in tmesis with the verb, or (3) with a case. 
 No crucial test can be fixed for determining these puz- 
 zling cases. After all sifting and shifting and com- 
 bining of results, the difficulty remains a matter of 
 personal opinion. An attempt to lay down some 
 objective principle by which to determine the different 
 usages would fail of its purpose. The words 
 of Goethe could well be applied here : **Ks irrt der 
 Mensch, so lang er strebt/' Hence the treatment of 
 those doubtful cases is largely subjective. This ac- 
 counts for the differences in the statistics. Thus, 
 T. Moramsen gives as the total of t^v with the dative 
 in Homer the figure 181 ( II. 107 Od. 74); but Hag- 
 gett has 188 (II. 113, Od. 75). Vogrinz has for 
 Tre/ot 69 cases with the genitive, 84 with the dative and 
 62 with the accusative, against which numbers Hag- 
 gett has 79 examples with the genitive, 85 with the 
 dative, and 72 with the accusative. 
 
 T. Mommsen (p. 42 ) thinks that in a case like 
 
 O 400 Ai£^« ffi-i^ "^^ ^«' akftoi ripTZsrat dvijp^ it is jUSt aS 
 correct to connect fJ-srd with aXyetrt as with ripnerat. — 
 
 Delbruck, Grundr. p. 653 fif. cites 28 cases from 
 Homer in which with equal right and with no change 
 
 \- 
 
 — 53 — 
 
 in meaning either case construction or tmesis may be 
 admitted Compare also as a good instance of the 
 equivalence Aesch. Pro. 20. axovrd d axiuv donhnot^ 
 
 yaXxeo/iafTt | TzpumzatTnakeniTU) raif5' (iTzavHpmTztp T^nyw^ but 
 line 56 TtanadXeoe r/x)? Tzirpai^. 
 
 Hoffmann (Progr., l,iineberg, 1857-1858 ) at- 
 tempted to formulate rules by which to decide 
 whether tmesis or case-construction is to be preferred. 
 His rules may be stated briefly as follows : 
 
 I. The preposition, when separated from the case 
 by the caesura of the verse, is to be construed with 
 the verb. As examples are cited : 
 
 A 53 hvTfiiap /j.sv dvd ^rrparov w^ero xT^Xa f^eolo. 
 
 B 1^2 X^ooiii^tp^ ^r£ 5' djupt Tij(pu)ii yalav lfid(T(T7j. 
 
 O 607 d<p)jn(Tfio^ dk Tzsp} (TTOfMi ytyyern^ r«> dk ol offtre. . . 
 
 II. The preposition is to be construed with the 
 verb when an important word, with an objective 
 emphasis of its own, stands between the preposition 
 and its case ; e. g. O 266 dfi(p\ dk /arrac | (i>/iot<^ ditrffuvrai. 
 
 Note: — An attributive genitive has no objective 
 emphasis of its own ; hence in S 378 «va governs 
 Ye(popa<s ; in A 44 ^olt' belongs to xapij>u}>^ etc. 
 
 III. The preposition should be taken with the 
 verb, when the verb stands between the preposition 
 and the supposed case ; e. g. /^ 3 7:£p\ dk ^i<po^ d^h »^ir' 
 
 OJ/IW, 
 
 IV. The preposition should be taken with the 
 verb when the preposition stands after the verb, but 
 not immediately before the case ; e. g. ^ 198 f^aXhtv t* 
 
 ditd ddxpu Trapstwv ; »5^ 149 trxidaffov d' dnd xijdea {^ufioo. 
 
 These rules are too arbitrary to be of any great 
 value and to be strictly applied in each case. Some- 
 
 ] 
 
1 
 
 ll 
 
 1 
 
 — 54 — 
 
 times they are positively objectionable, as may be 
 seen when they are put to the test. The first rule is 
 evidently based on the principle that the preposition 
 when standing immediately before its case is a pro- 
 clitic and so constitutes with the following noun, as it 
 were, a single word. In consequence, if case- 
 construction be assumed, there cannot be a caesura 
 at this point. The application of this rule, however, 
 is often restricted by the fact that another caesura or 
 diaeresis can be found to satisfy the requirements of 
 the verse. Thus all the examples cited in support of 
 the rule may be scanned with the Bucolic Diaeresis. 
 In the first it must be done because fiva nrparov ( A lo, 
 53i 384 ; ^ 209, 436 ; K 66. 82, 141, etc.) has become 
 a fixed phrase like the Sanskrit prdti vdram ( accord- 
 ing to wish), dnu dyun (throughout the days). 
 Cf. Delbriick, Grundr. p. 653. 
 
 As regards Apollonius this rule is of no practical 
 importance. In three examples the masculine caesura 
 falls between the case and the preposition evi ( I 94, 
 IV. 986, 1667 ). But as the post- positive preposi- 
 tion has a strong accent of its own, this is in itself 
 less objectionable. Besides in all these lines there 
 is a Bucolic Diaeresis which satisfies the metre and so 
 renders unnecessary the change from eVt, which is the 
 reading of the MSS. , to cw which has been made by 
 Gerhard, Lect. Apoll, ch. 8, De Caesura p. 129. 
 
 The second rule is followed by Ameis ; Cf. his note 
 to i? 80, while T. Mommsen (p. 41 ), takes the op- 
 posite view. Kiihner-Gerth ( p. 533 ) admits the 
 rule with some exceptions ( A 831 , ^ 1 15, < 535, X 155. ) 
 For exceptions in Apollonius see IV., 1062, 1734. 
 
 •t 
 
 ^^^/ 
 ^^^H^ 
 
 — 55 — 
 
 In like manner the third and fourth rules are not 
 absolute, though they are perhaps less objectionable 
 than the first and the second. The general tendency 
 is to allow tmesis the preference whenever this can 
 be done ; because originally the case did not depend 
 directly on the preposition, but on the verb + the 
 preposition. Cf. Kiihner-Gerth, Sec. 428, 4-5. 
 
 PURPOSE OF TMESIS. 
 
 " The ^hos of tmesis," says Haggett, '*as well as 
 that of the adverbial use is seen from the fact that it 
 belongs predominantly to the higher spheres of 
 poetry. It lays stress on the preposition by giving it 
 an independent place in the sentence." In epic 
 poetry tmesis is used almost unconsciously and unin- 
 tentionally. Its effect is simply to give emphasis or 
 vividness. In tragic and lyric poetry, on the contrary, it 
 is a figure of speech and an ornament of style. In epic 
 it belongs to the idiom ; in lyric and tragic poetry to 
 the poet. Thus we find that while, on the whole, 
 tmesis is rarer in tragic and lyric poetry, individual 
 differences exist between the great poets. Aeschylus 
 has 15 cases of tmesis, chiefly in lyric passages and 
 for the sake of emphasis. Sophocles has 20 examples, 
 principally in dialogue and for the purpose of vivid- 
 ness. Euripides uses it 82 times. With him it 
 is to emphasize, to make more plastic and, above all, 
 to adorn. Pindar has 33 cases, used for all purposes. 
 Aristophanes limits its use to parody in the chorus. 
 Herodotus uses it quite often, because his history 
 has the character of an Epos. Attic prose writers 
 have, with the exception of a few curious cases, 
 
'] 
 
 -56- 
 
 avoided tmesis. Cf. Pierson, Rh. Mus. 1857, and 
 Kiihner-Gerth, Sec. 345 
 
 Apollonius has 205 examples of tmesis ; Homer 
 has 1359, showing that Apollonius has approximated 
 the norm of epic poetry. 
 
 It may be noticed that tmesis is sometimes con- 
 venient for metrical purposes, when the compound 
 verb could otherwise not be used on account of too 
 many short syllables in succession ; as in v4 98 djtd 
 
 jtaTp\ tpiXtfi ddfievat 
 
 POSITION. 
 
 The preposition in tmesis usually precedes 
 the verb. Only rarely it follows. This ana- 
 strophic tmesis occurs in tragedy only in a few 
 doubtful cases Cf. Schumacher, De Praepositionum 
 cum tribus casibus conjunctarum usu Euripideo. p. 
 68. When the preposition precedes the verb, import- 
 ant words may intervene and the preposition and the 
 verb may stand in different lines. When the prepo- 
 sition follows the verb, important words may inter- 
 vene, but the verb and the preposition are always in 
 the same line, and rarely separated by the caesura. 
 The following lists show the facts for Apollonius. 
 
 A. PREPOSITION BEFORE THE VERB. 
 ( 198 IN ALL.) 
 
 i) With words like U^ ydp^ Ti, fiiv^ d'ap intervening: 
 I. 110, 321, 348, 385, 400, 485, 673, 730, 735, 
 1018, 1026, 1 155, II 70; II. 28, 58, 184, 202, 274, 
 493» 904, 926, 1043; III. I. 112, 311, 631, 649, 
 670, 1 166; IV. 329, 393, 594, 1275, 1330, 1348, 
 1401. 1627, 1669, 1701. 1744, 1759. Total 41. 
 
 J'J 
 
 — 57 — 
 
 2) With more important words intervening : 
 
 a) Preposition and verb in the same line : 
 
 I. 218, 262, 280, 344, 349, 364, 399.434, 526, 541, 
 566, 596, 639, 697, 747, 755, 763, 850, 1059, 1 144, 
 1 197, 1198, 1268, I284^ 1356; II. 14, 94, 183, 191, 
 201, 355, 456, 534, 563, 581, 608, 693, 742, 894, 926, 
 933» 1071' 1128, 1192, 1219, 1279; III. 157, 
 205, 231, 261, 269, 280, 291, 295, 371, 378, 424, 
 486, 511, 591, 648, 650, 746, 750, 791, 821, 868, 888, 
 889, 929, 946, 958, 961, 1067, 1189, 1209, 1230, 
 1359; IV. 83, 208, 225, 298.367,392, 409,461, 478, 
 484* 493> 547, 599. 609, 640, 683. 867, 892, 1016, 
 1038, 1063, 1076, 1104, 1134, 1146, 1171, 1199, 1265, 
 1270, 1281, 1292, 1301, 1325, 1350, 1392, 1436, 
 
 1533, 1534, 1550, 1577, 1654, 1709, 1744, 1777. 
 Total 123. 
 
 b) Preposition and verb in different lines: 
 
 I. 381, 392, 396, 1028, 1079, iiio, 1205, 1231; 
 n. 91, 530. 701, 930; III 154. 516, 725, 873, 
 1203, 1235; IV. 603, 645, 747, 983, 1031, 1123, 
 1181, 1415, 1669, 1675, 1677. Total 29. 
 
 B. PREPOSITION AFTER THE VERB. 
 ( 12 IN ALL.) 
 
 1 ) No word intervening : 
 
 III. 831, 1135, 1192; IV. 307, 600. Total 5. 
 
 2) Particles intervening : 
 
 1. 979, 1 195; II. 682; IV. 750, 1312. Totals. 
 
 3) More important words intervening : 
 III. 46, 1017. Total 2. 
 
 \i 
 
\f 
 
 -58 ~ 
 
 Tmesis is less frequent in Apollonius than in 
 Homer. Apollonius has one example per 28.4 lines ; 
 Homer, on the other hand, has one per 20.4 lines on 
 the average (II. 21.9, Od 18.8). The more im- 
 portant differences in the numerical relations of the 
 individual prepositions are the following : In Homer 
 the preposition used most frequently in tmesis is 
 xard (210); in Apollonius it is i^^i (36). *Avd gains 
 and xard loses in Apollonius ; similarly Sid and e«V. 
 Apollonius has on if* twice in tmesis : Homer never. 
 Upfh occurs only once in tmesis in Apollonius ; but 
 Homer has 36 examples of this use. ///><> and oko 
 Apollonius does not employ in tmesis ; though Homer 
 has Trpd eight times and urJ eigthy-two times in 
 tmesis. 
 
 Other differences in usage will be noted in the 
 more detailed account of each preposition in tmesis. 
 According to the divergence, the following sub- 
 divisions are made, wherever required : 
 
 1 ) Apollonius and Homer both have tmesis. 
 
 2) Apollonius has tmesis; Homer has only the 
 compound verb. 
 
 3) Apollonius has tmesis; the compound verb is 
 post- Homeric. 
 
 4) Apollonius has tmesis ; the compound verb is 
 not quotable. 
 
 — 59- 
 
 TABLE SHOWING THE FREQUENCY OE EACH PREPOSITION 
 
 IN APOI,I,ONIUS, COMPARED WITH THEIR 
 
 FREQUENCY IN HOMER. 
 
 Prepos. 
 
 iK 
 
 ivd 
 iw6 
 
 Kard 
 iw 
 
 Sid 
 
 xepl 
 
 dfjL<f>L 
 
 ci)v 
 wapd 
 furd 
 
 dt 
 ifwip 
 7rp6s 
 
 SUk 
 
 irapdK 
 
 inriK 
 
 hr€K7rp6 
 
 wp6 
 xnrb 
 
 Total 
 
 I. 
 
 7 
 
 II. 
 7 
 
 III 
 II 
 
 IV. 
 II 
 
 Tot.inAp. 
 
 36 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 II 
 
 12 
 
 31 
 
 7 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 28 
 
 5 
 
 I 
 
 5 
 
 10 
 
 21 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 19 
 
 12 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 17 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 II 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 9 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 7 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 48 
 
 
 36 
 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 71 
 
 
 
 205 
 
 Total in Homer. 
 
 207 (II. 104, Od. 103) 
 
 208 (II. 107, Od. loi) 
 71 (II. 35. Od. 36) 
 115 (II. 74, Od. 41) 
 
 210 (II. 
 126 (II. 
 
 19(11. 
 68 (II. 
 
 67 (11. 
 37 (11. 
 
 55 (II. 
 20 (II 
 
 26 (II. 
 
 109, Od. 
 . 72, Od. 
 , 10, Od. 
 
 34, Od. 
 30, Od. 
 
 19, Od. 
 
 21, Od. 
 . 12, Od, 
 
 14, Od. 
 
 loi) 
 54) 
 9) 
 34) 
 
 37) 
 18) 
 
 34) 
 8) 
 12) 
 
 36 (II. 19, Od. 17) 
 
 I (tA 16) 
 
 3 (7 175, * 149. 'f 129) 
 o 
 
 8 (II. 6. Od. 2) 
 
 82 (II. 49> Od. 33) 
 
 1359 (II 715, Od. 644). 
 
 This table, as also those in the other chapters, 
 shows the prepositions not alphabetically, but accord- 
 ing to their decrease in frequency in Apollonius. In 
 the more detailed account, however, the alphabetical 
 order is observed. 
 
f 
 
 — 60 — 
 
 — dfi^L — 
 
 a) APOLLONIUS AND HOMER BOTH HAVE TMESIS. 
 
 ^ A^^L-[iaXkid: I. 262 (irityip 5' d^<p' avrov 
 ^B^oT^ri^Bvyi. Tmesis is here suggested by 
 d^i^i-neaovaa in line 270. Compare also o 
 347 di^fi ^€ TtaiSi <pi?iO) /Jd/le 7t>7;gef, and ^P 97 
 dfi^i^akovre dTJXriT.ovg., also Eurip. Bacch. 1364 
 Tt II dii^i^d?iXsig ;tfpcr(V; A clearer example 
 of tmesis is seen in IV. 747 d^Kpl ^e nenTiOv | 
 6<|)3aX^otai ^akovaa, Cf, 2 204; x 365, 451, etc. 
 
 ^AfLi^i-evvvfii: III. 1203 d^t^l 5f ^pog | 
 latraro; IV. 1436 d^tpi Si fiipfia neTyopiov earo 
 Xeovrog, Cf. T 293; x 542, ^ 529. 
 
 'Afxipi-ri^yjlii: II. 1071 d^<^i 5f ;^a>lxetag 
 x6piJ^a$ x6(paX'^aiv e^evro, Cf. K 261; v 431. 
 
 'Afi^i'X^u: IV. 645 d^<^f ydp a(r>7r | r.epa 
 XBV€ 3ed. Cf. >7 14, 3 278, 296. 
 
 b) APOLLONIUS HAS TMESIS; HOMER HAS ONLY 
 
 THE COMPOUND. 
 
 ^AfjL^L'8iveonai: IV. 1533 rpig 5' dfi(pi avv 
 evTsat Sivi^^evreg. Similarly is nepl in tmesis 
 in I. 1059. Cf X. 165; (where, however. La 
 Roche construes nepc with tioXlv), ^ 562, etc. 
 Aesch. Pers. 457. 
 
 — 61 — 
 
 3 / 
 
 va- 
 
 a) APOLLONIUS AND HOMER BOTH HAVE TMESIS. 
 
 'Av-aipeo: I. 1205 drd ro^a xai iovg \ 
 Sepfia S-' fXor; III. 157 am ^' dyxvXov el/iero 
 ro^ov. Cf A 32. 
 
 'Av-iaryjf.u: II. 493 dvd S' larar ^lyjacov, \ dv 
 he BopyjLOi vhg. Cf * 886, etc. 
 
 'Ara-/3atV(o: I. 1110 av he xai avrol \ (3alvov; 
 III. 1235 dv he xai avrog \ (iyjaaro. Cf P. 541; 
 y 481, 492. 
 
 ^ Av'ej(pnai: I. 673 dvd 5' eaj(^e^e hetpriv, 
 Cf p 291. 
 
 'Ava-Xro): III. 821 nvxvd K dvd xXyilhag 
 eCdv Xveaxe S'l^pduov. Cf. 1 178, 562, yl 636. 
 
 'Aj^-6pri;^ut: I. 349 dvd S' avrog dpi^iog cdpvvr 
 ""Iriacdv; IV. 1350 dvd S'' vfieag opcrat. Cf. ^ 
 812; ^3. 
 
 b) APOLLONIUS HAS TMESIS; HOMER HAS ONLY 
 
 THE COMPOUND. 
 
 f 9 
 
 'Av-aeipcdi I. 1268 xai dvd nT^atvv av^^v 
 deipcdv I IyiOlv iivxYifia; II. 14 npiv x^lpeoaLV 
 ifi'^CLV idg dm ;tetpa$ delpai; III. 873 dv he 
 XtT(^voLg I Xenra2,eovg . . . deipov; IV. 1550 
 yaiyjg 5' dvd (3(^^ov deipag \ ^elvi dpiaryieaat 
 TtpoLGxero. — For the compound compare III. 
 72, IV. 94, 1497; also H 130, X 399, <!> 508, 
 * 614, 882; [i 402, etc. 
 
f 
 
 — 62 — 
 
 'Av4pxofiat: IV. 1627 37^0$ 5' rMiog ^h 
 eSv, dvd S' rjXv^ei darjjp | av?.tog. 
 
 'Ava-xatu: II. 701 8vayeu>g Upo) dvd 5(7tAda 
 fiyjpia ^o^o) \ xalov. — For the compound com- 
 pare 7] 13, I 251, etc. 
 
 'Ava-ando: II. 926 oi 5' dm fziv xpacnvag 
 Xalipog andaav. Cf. N. 574 and A 480. 
 
 ' Ava-Ti'^Yifii "dedicate'^ II. 930 av hk xal 
 
 ^0p(p6vg \ ^^X€ ^VpYlV, 
 
 ' Ava-<paivo(iai: IV. 1709 rolac ^S rig 27top- 
 dhcdv /3a«7 dvd roipp iipadv^y^ \ v^aog. Cf. A 62, 
 174; X 29. In II. 1043 ApoUonius has ix in 
 tmesis with the same verb. 
 
 C) APOLLONIUS HAS TMESIS; THE COMPOUND IS 
 
 POST-HOMERIC. 
 
 'Av4^o^ai: I. 1170 dvd h' e^ero atyri \ 
 Ttanraivciv; IV. 1330 nanryivag dv dp e^er ini 
 X^vog. 
 
 'Av'€L7ielv ^^announce'': IV. 1199 oy o)g rd 
 Ttpura SixYig dvd nsipar' ssltibv. Cf. Find. P. 
 I. 61, X. 9. 
 
 ' Ava'xaXvnr(^: IV. 1348 av h" sxd^v^v \ 
 TiinTuov, Cf. Eurip. Iph. Aul. 1146. 
 
 'A^a-xiveoi: III. 929 rdcdv rig fieaayjyvg dvd 
 nrspd xivYiaaaa, Cf. Soph. Tr. 1259. 
 
 'Av-ox^i^o: IV. 1675 dv Si /iJapfia^ | ox^i- 
 ^uv Xdiyyag, For the actual compound in 
 ApoUonius compare I. 1167; III. 1297. 
 
 1 
 
 /- 
 
 i 
 
 -63- 
 
 ^Ava-ravvG): I. 344 6 S' avro^evy ev^a nep 
 Yiaroy I he^irepYiv dvd x^^f^ ravvaaaro, 
 
 d) APOLI.ONIUS HAS TMESIS; THE COMPOUND IS NOT 
 
 QUOTABLE. 
 
 ^ Ava-vcifid^): III. 1230 dv Se noXvppivov 
 v6fia adxog, dv Si xal lyxog. That tmesis is 
 intended, is seen from such examples as are 
 given at the end of this chapter, viz.: I. 1284; 
 II. 493; III. 516; III. 1230. 
 
 a) APOLLONIUS AND HOMER BOTH HAVE TMESIS. 
 
 ^A^aipeo: IV. 1038 aiVdp iuoi dno Syj 
 
 ^apvg etXfTo Sai^idv \ dyXatag; IV. 1312 eXov 
 
 S' dno %epaJ xapriarog . . . neiO^v. Cf. V 294; 
 
 K 458 rov h^dno fiev xnSeyjv xvveyjv X6^a?i^^iv 
 
 eXovro. 
 
 ^ Ano'^dXki^: I. 979 ^dXev S' dno hei^ara 
 
 ^v^ov. Cf. S- 149 axehaaov S' dno xYihea ^v^ov; 
 
 also B 183, * 51; Aesch. Ag. 165. 
 
 'Ano-iv(d: I. 1195 eSv S' dno Sep[ia Xiovrog. 
 Cf. B261. 
 
 ^ Anjo-xehdvvv^i: III. 1359 d^ dno ;f6f//fpta$ 
 
 ve^e^jag Bxehaaoav d^rai. Homer has the 
 
 form dno-(TxsSdvvvfii in tmesis in ^ 149, [i 385. 
 
 ^Ano-xonru: IV. 208 npvfivala reco$ dno 
 
 neic^ar exo^ev, IV. 1270 rovvex iyco ndaav 
 
 (lev dn iXniSa ^yjfii xexofp^i. Cf. A 146; 
 
 X 127. 
 
'/■ 
 
 -64- 
 
 'ATto-T.BiTtQi I. 399 rolg fieaGyjv oloiaiv and 
 xkYilha linovro (for them alone they reserved 
 the middle bench); III. 1067 aTi' o^^aXfiovg 
 ^.LTtBv aih6g; III. 1135 Ximva' ano TtarpiSa 
 yalav; IV. 750 Xelnov b'ano 86fiara Kipxyjg, 
 Cf. 1437 (La Roche); Soph. Ph. 1158, 1177. 
 
 'Ano-XvG): II. 456 no^iEov 5' and nYi^ar' 
 elvaev (the genitive is adnominal; cf. III. 
 1343). Cf. 2 345, tp41; y 392, ^ 420. 
 
 'A7to-7i6/£7tG>: IV. 683 i[ 5' ore hri vvxl^v 
 ano Ssifiara ne^^ev oveipuv. Cf. (i 133 and 
 
 'Ano-re^vca: III. 378 and yX^acag re 
 rafi6p; IV. 983 and narpog \ firjSea vriTieiug 
 Irafie Kp6vog, Cf. F 292; Soph. Ph. 1207. 
 
 b) APOLLONIUS HAS TMESIS; HOMER HAS ONLY 
 
 THE COMPOUND. 
 
 'ATto-TiVc): IV. 1325 and , , . tlvst' duoi- 
 ^nv. Cf. r 286. etc. 
 
 C) APOI.I.ONIUS HAS TMESIS; THE COMPOUND IS 
 
 POST-HOMERIC. 
 
 ^ ' Ano-xoiiiCi^: IV. 1104 ici ano narpl xofiiaoai 
 
 * ATto-Xu^doiIY. 1415 ano kylav\.,:^^Go(i€v, 
 'AnO'VYiki^: I. 364 ano h' elfiar' . . vyirjaavro, 
 Cf. Eurip. Ion 875. 
 
 ' Ano^rpdnrcj: III. 1017 arpdnrsv "Epug 
 fi^elav and ^Xoya. 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 bi> 
 
 -65- 
 
 d) APOLLONirS HAS TMESIS; THE COMPOUND IS NOT 
 
 QUOTABI^E. 
 
 ' ATtD-iie^iYiiiL: I. 280 dno i^vxriv ^e^iftsv, 
 
 — Slol — 
 
 a) APOLLONIUS AND HOMER BOTH HAVE TMESIS. 
 
 Aia-xed^o: IV. 392 Sid r mneSa ndvra 
 xedaaar, IV. 1265 6id Syj ndXac fjSe xeda^yj vyjvg, 
 Cf. 322. 
 
 ALa-xoGfiio): III. 46 xocfiei xP^^^h ^^« 
 xspxlSi. Cf. B 655; t 157. 
 
 Aia-riuvo: II. 355 'A;t^P"^ avrrjv Sid 
 veio^i rifivcdv \ axpriv. Cf. P 522, 2 618. 
 
 b) APOI.LONIUS HAS TMESIS; HOMER HAS ONI^Y THE 
 
 COMPOUND. 
 
 Aia-eiho^ai: II. 581 ev^a xai ev^a 8id 
 nT^nvg elSero Uovrog. For the compound 
 compare I. 546; IV. 1358; also 0535, N 277. 
 
 Aia-xeSdvvvfiL: II. 1128 de^lXat vyjog . , , Sid 
 Sovpara ndvr' ixiSaaaav; II. 1192 xecpy^v ye 
 xaxov hid xvfi ixeSaaaev. 
 
 Aia-oeva: III. 670 Std S'eaavro ^afi^^^aaaa. 
 
 C) APOI.I,ONIUS HAS TMESIS; THE COMPOUND IS 
 
 POST-HOMERIC. 
 
 Aia-nepdu; 11. 608 Sid vyjl nepT^ari; IV. 
 461 ^v ovSe Si al^yjoi nepoaaiv. 
 
— 66 — 
 
 d) APOLLONIUS HAS TMESIS; TIIK COMPOUND IS NOT 
 
 QUOTABLE. 
 
 Aia-ravvG) : IV. 599 8id nrepd xov<pa ravvaaag. 
 
 This double preposition never occurs in 
 tmesis in Homer. ApoUonius has one doubt- 
 ful example, which, however, as it seems, is to 
 be attributed to editors; viz.: IV. 409 ote ^ri (is 
 ket duai vesa^ai. The reading of LG is 
 Sie^u^i, which is the same pateographically 
 as 5ie^ eiCkn, 
 
 — ex — 
 
 a) APOLLONIUS AND HOMER BOTH HAVE TMESIS. 
 
 'E^-atpfo: I. 396 ix 5* dpa ^eaariv \ i^peov; 
 II. 184 ix h' ?XfcT' 6<|)3aX|Uc5i^ yXvxepov ^dog, 
 Cf. A 369, A 116, A 381; ^ 140, etc. 
 
 'Ex-^aivu: I. 1018 ix 5' olp l/3wai^. Cf. 
 A 437, 438, 439, T 113; ^ 456, etc. 
 
 'Ex-/3d>lX(j: II. 926 ix ^i l3a?.6vreg \ nda- 
 fiar\ Cf. A 436, A 109. 
 
 'Ex-ysTididi I. 485 ix 5' iyiXaaaev d5>7V 
 'A^py^iog "iSag. Cf. Z 471. 
 
 'E^-epfo^at: III. 1166 ix r' ipeovro. Cf. 
 A 204, 233; B 257; x 63, 109. 
 
 "Ef a^i "exibo'': III. 112 ix S' laav a^^u. 
 Cf. 4^ 370, G) 501. 
 
 . 
 
 i *f 
 
 
 ^" 
 
 \ , 
 
 i 
 
 -67- 
 
 'E^-epxoi^at: II. 202 ix S" iX^oiv fieydpoio. 
 Cf. K 140; y 406, S 121, 403, 740, o 395, n 165, 
 343, etc. 
 
 Likewise are we to construe in the follow- 
 ing examples ix with xtco, though that verb 
 does nowhere occur in the actual composition, 
 and for this reason, it seems, ix-xio has been 
 kept out of the dictionaries. The rule of 
 Haggett "to classify as adverbial only those 
 instances in which the preposition does not 
 in Homer enter into composition with the verb 
 and so cannot be said to be separated from 
 it by tmesis," must not be followed too 
 scrupulously. Haggett himself did not do so, 
 since with Vogrinz and Monro he denies the 
 existence of the independent adverbial use of 
 ix in Homer. Hence he must have taken ix 
 with xiev in o 492. This applies also to 
 i^-dyvvfii, i^'aiaao, i^-aXeo^at, ix-xakvivti^, ix- 
 peo, and c^-w^eco, which are never found in 
 Homer as actual compounds, though tmesis 
 has to be assumed in the case of each one. 
 Cf r 367, E 161, N 655, * 119; ;. 559, X 64, etc. 
 
 'Ex-xtG): III. 269 ix h' avTyj Ei8vla Sdfiap 
 XLEV AlT^rao. Cf w 492 ix 5' vlog AoXtov xiev, 
 where tmesis is confirmed by the preceding 
 i^-eX^^v. The other two examples in ApoUo- 
 nius are III. 650 ix he ndXtv xiev evSo^ev and 
 

 .pi 
 
 EEV 
 
 — 68 — 
 
 III. 868 ix he ^vpa^e xiovaa: Cf. 2 29 ix ^e 
 ^vpa^E ISpa^ov. 
 
 'Ex-Xav^dvo): III. 280 ix 5' oye xapTtaXifi- 
 Old XaScoi' noaiv ovhov auec4^Ev, Cf. ri 220. 
 
 ^Ex'TtiTtru: III. 961 ix 5' dpa ol xpahiyj 
 arri^Eoiv tiegev, Cf. yi 283; also K 94.— IV. 
 1016 dig i^ol EX nvxLval ETtEOov ^pEVEq, 
 
 'Ex-peo: IV. 1677 ix hk ol i^oip \ . 
 Cf. N 655, 4> 119; y 455, i 290. 
 
 'Ex-^aividi II. 1043 €x 5' i^adv^ri \ aXXog 
 ini nporepo) TiEnoryjiievog, Cf. TI 299. 
 
 'Ex-;^f(j: II. 904 ix 5' E^Eav niavvoi avEfioi 
 Tiiva. Cf. A 525, 4> 180. 
 
 b) APOI.I.ONIUS HAS TMESIS; HOMER HAS ONLY THE 
 
 COMPOUND. 
 
 'E^-LxvEo^ai: III. 311 ix S' txo/iiea^a [ dxT>7J' 
 riTtEipov TvpaYiviSog. 
 
 'E^-ovoiiaivcd : IV. 1744 ex r ovofiYjvEv 
 AiaoviSyi. Homer has i^-ovofid^a in tmesis. 
 Cf. A 361, r 398, etc. 
 
 'Ex-TiEpduxi : IV. 329 ix 5' inEpiqaav \ hoidg 
 ^ApTEfiiSog Bpvyyjihag dy^^o^i vyjaovg. Cf. ri 35, 
 ^ 561, 
 
 'Ex-nrvu: IV. 478 rplg S' i^ ayog Inrva' 
 686vruv. Cf. E 322. 
 
 ..^ 
 
 flyi 
 
 
 #1 
 
 — 69 — 
 
 C) APOLI.ONIUS HAS TMESIS; THE COMPOUND IS 
 
 POST-HOMERIC. 
 
 'E^-ava-TtvECd: III, 231 ix Se nvpog Setvov 
 aiXag dunvEtEaxov; cf. III. 1291; IV. 472. For 
 the tmesis within the double preposition com- 
 pare Kuehner-Blass, Vol. II. p. 321. 
 
 'Ex-^odw: III. 631 ix 5' il36yjaav \ j(^(d6[iEV0L, 
 Cf. Xen. Cyr. 6, 10. 
 
 ^Ex-xELpij: IV. 1031 xal ix ^Epog ovTioov 
 dvSpcdv I xELpETE yYiyEVEidv, Homer has dno-xEipid 
 in tmesis; cf. K 456, N 546; also Eurip. Hec. 910. 
 
 'Ex-Xd^Ttw: III. 371 ix heol o^L^iar eXa^yi^ev. 
 
 'Ex-Xeltio): IV. 1401 ix bi Xinovtcov | . . . . 
 oLoruv; IV. 1759 ix Si Xinovrag \ ^ndprriv. Cf. 
 Eurip. Andr. 1040. 
 
 ^Ex'Tipo-XECdi IV. 603 ix hi (paEtvdg \ r,?.Exrpov 
 2,i(3dhag (i^E^dpcdv npo^Eovaiv Epa^E, 
 
 ^Ex-pvo^ai: IV. 83 ex inEy (plXoi, pvaaa^E, 
 Cf. Eurip. Bacch. 258. 
 
 'Ex'^pd^Gi : IV. 1123 ix S' dpa naaav \ 
 TtE^pa^Ev dyyEXiYiv. Cf. Aesch. Pr. 950. 
 
 d) APOI.I.ONIUS HAS TMESIS; THE COMPOUND IS NOT 
 
 QUOTABLE. 
 
 'Ex-Ttpo-td/lyla) : IV. 1669 ix S' aihYi'ka \ 
 SEixYiTija npotaTi^Ev, 
 
— 70 
 
 71 
 
 iv 
 
 zni 
 
 a) APOLLONIUS AND HOMER BOTH HAVE TMESIS. 
 
 "Efi-l3aLvu: I. 381 iv 5' dpa Ti^vg (Sy^aa^'. 
 Cf. q^ 481. 
 
 'E^.^aXXo: 1. 392 iv U ol larov \ .. i^d?uovro. 
 Cf * 352; /3 330, g 268. 
 
 'Ev-eXavvu: I. 526 iv yap ol 86pv Mov 
 i:^y!^aro. Cf T 259. 
 
 ''Ev^eLfii: I. 730 iv fiiv eaav Ki;xX6)7tf$. 
 Similar examples are I. 735, 747, 763. Cf. 2 
 419; v 438; also h. Ap. 395. 
 
 'Ev-iYiui: II. 274 iv yap eyjxev | Zevg fievog 
 axduarov a^ptv; III. 958 (ii^Xom 5' iv aanerov 
 nxev bi^vv. Cf. H 182, n 291, ^ 177, etc. 
 
 'E/^-7ti7tT(i>: I. 566 iv U liyvg niaev odpog. 
 The other examples in Apollonius are I. 1028, 
 1284; IV. 393. Cf A 134, 485, A 297, 
 n 276, * 9. 
 
 b) APOLLONIUS HAS TMESIS; HOMER HAS ONLY THE 
 
 COMPOUND. 
 
 'Ev-8p8i!)u: 1. 1198 iv Si nXarvv ufiov speiGEv. 
 Ci. I 383. 
 
 'E^M-m7tX>7^<: I. 697 iv 5' dyopjj nX^ro ^p6oi\ 
 Cf. Herod. 11. 87. 
 
 C) APOLLONIUS HAS TMESIS; THE COMPOUND IS 
 
 POST-HOMERIC. 
 
 'Ey-xaXvnna: IV. 1292 iv Si xdpYi nenXoiai 
 xaXv^^d fxevoi, Cf Arist. Ran. 911; PL 714. 
 
 > 
 
 ^- 
 
 a) APOLLONIUS AND HOMER BOTH HAVE TMESIS. 
 
 ^En-atveG): I. 348 inl 5' YiveoVy a>$ ixeTiSVsv | 
 ^EpaxXeyjg; III. 946 inl Si a^^Sov r.vsov afi^a, 
 Cf r 461; II 294=352. 
 
 'E7tt-/3d/i;i(j: III. 1189 d xai nep inl c^vyd 
 ^oval (SdXoiro; III. 1192 vv^ S' Innoiaiv e^a'k'Xev 
 em ^vyd\ IV. 1146 la^e ^' ixdarYiv\aiS(Sig Isfievyjv 
 nep 0|U6)$ inl ;t^^P* /^aXeaS^ar, IV. 1744 ruv ap 
 inl ^vijariv xpaSiyj ^d7.ev (Merkel). Cf fl 272; 
 S 440, ^ 520, T 58, i; 4. 
 
 'En-e'Xavvid'. I 755 inl Mi^pTtXo$ YiT^aGev 
 Innovg. Cf H 223. 
 
 'En-epxoi^ai: IV. 493 inl Se a<pLaiv yj^^v^e 
 xovpyjl^pa^ofisvoig. Cf A 221; (S429,>7 283,^152. 
 
 'En-idXT^cdi II. 183 tq xat oi y^pag ^iv inl 
 Srjvaidv laXXev [Zei;$]. Cf. t 288, o 474. 
 
 'En-opvv^Li I. 850 Ki;!ntpt$ yap inl ylvxvv 
 Ifjiepov cdpaev; III. 516 inl Si rpirog *lSag \ «pro 
 fxeya ^povkdv, inl S' vUs TvvSapeoLO. Cf. ^V 759, 
 689; y 176, ^ 313. 
 
 'E7t^-7teXo^at: IV. 1654 onnote firi ol in' 
 dxdfiarog ni'koi ai6v. Cf. o 408. 
 
 'Enc-ri^yilii: II: 534 xal i^' lepd ^evreg-, II. 
 693 inl fiyjpia ^rjaofiev alyuv. Other examples 
 are IV. 609, 1301, 1534. Cf B 29, A 41, 
 2 317, * 18. 
 
— 72 — 
 
 'Eni-xSu: II. 191 ini (ivhaXeriv bhfiYiv x^ov, 
 similarly III. 205, 1209. Cf. 158, 589; 
 y 289, ^ 14. 
 
 b) APOLLONIUS HAS TMESIS; HOMER HAS ONI.Y 
 
 THE COMPOUND. 
 
 'E7t-aapw: III. 591 6^vem<; inl ;ffipa i^v 
 xredreaaiv deipetp, 
 
 'Eni'xei^ai: IV. 1392 ini ^yjpyj yap hsiro \ 
 il^l^a. For the compound compare III. 430; also 
 
 Z458. 
 
 # 
 
 'Em-6aaofiai: II. 28 ini 8' oaaErai olo^ev 
 olog dj/^pa. Cf. P 381. 
 
 'Eni-nei^ofzai: III. 511 ^vfiog iij ini ndyxv 
 nenoi^ev \ r.vopsri, 
 
 'E7t£-ppco2/i;^f: 1.385 ini h' ipp6aavro noheooiv, 
 '£7t(-Tpf7ta): I. 400 ini 5' erpeTWv aivriaavreg \ 
 Ttfpvv ivareipyjg oiT^ia vy^og Epva^at. 
 
 C) APOI,LONIUS HAS TMESIS; THE COMPOUND IS 
 
 POST-HOMERIC. 
 
 'E<^-a<pfG): II. 1319 noXiecat 3' ini x^oog 
 elTiE napeiig. Cf. x 42 ndvrag vno x^pov 
 Mog elXev, 
 
 'En-aiopso}: 1.639 rolov a<pLv ini Uog ^Joparo. 
 
 'Eni-^pdxi^i IV. 640 hivov yap ini /liyag 
 ^t^poLX^^ ai^>7p, 
 
 'Eni^xXv^cj: I. 541 ini Se p6^ia xU^ovro; 
 II. 682 xXv^sv 5' Int xv^iaTa ;tfp(T6j; cf. I. 257. 
 
 L 
 
 \ 
 
 t 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 \ r i| 
 
 y 
 
 — 73 — 
 
 'Em-Xa/z/?di^6) : III. 750 daxd fxaX ov 
 yiYihetav ini yT^vxepog kd(3ev vnvog; IV. 1063 
 o?>7 (iiv ini a^vyepyj Tid^ev aha, 
 
 'Em-TtpiG): IV. 1669 TievyaXsov 6' ini ol 
 nplev xoXov, 
 
 'Ent-^ihpvvGi: III. 831 dXoLq)ri\vexrapBri 
 ^aihpvver' ini X9^) cf. IV. 661. 
 
 — elg — 
 
 a) APOLLONIUS AND HOMER BOTH HAVE TMESIS. 
 
 'ELa-voEi^: I. 321 ig h' ivoYiaav. Cf. M 335. 
 
 b) APOtLONIUS HAS TMESIS; THE COMPOUND IS 
 
 POST-HOMERIC. 
 
 'EiG^^dXku,: IV. 594 ig h' l/3aXov fivxarov 
 poor 'EpiSavolo, with which compare I. 928. 
 IV. 1577 Big dXo^ o%a /idXyjre; cf. IV. 637, 
 824, etc. In case-construction the phrase would 
 mean "to cast into the sea", '^to throw over- 
 board ''rather than "to put out to sea '; cf. A 314. 
 
 — xard — 
 
 a) APOLLONIUS AND HOMER BOTH HAVE TMESIS. 
 
 Ka^-atpeo): III. 725 xdS Se ^iiv dx?ivg\€lXev, 
 Cf. L 372 xdS Se fiiv vnvog YipEi; also X 426, o 
 496; n 268. 
 
 Kara-fiaivu: III. 888 xar' avro^i /S^aar 
 dnT^vYjt;, Cf. N 737, 384. 
 
 KaTa-^d;iXa): III. 154 xdS Si ^aEivQ 
 
— 74 — 
 
 /3dXf x(5X7t6). Cf. B 414, 692, T 356, E 305, * 
 125; I 482, 539, x 172, etc. 
 
 Kar-e^idi II. 742 aiyri 5' ovnore nqv ye xard 
 ^Xoavpyjr sxei ax^r^v, Cf. B 560, 699; t 6, 7. 497. 
 
 KaTa-xayli;7tT(o: I. 434 xah h' a^vhig rd ye 
 ndvra xaXv^i^avreg nvxa Syj^t}; II. 894 xar^ 
 ai'ToSi 5' dfi^e xaXv^ei\axXeudg xaxog olrog, Cf. 
 A 460, B 423, Z 464, P 594, n 325; y 457, etc. 
 
 Kara-zlaTtcj: I. 1144 ^yjpeg 5' f(?wi;oi;$ Tf 
 xard ^v^o^ovg re Xmovreg \ oip'^aiv aaivovreg 
 ini^Xv^ov; IV. 298 xar avro^t nalha Xinovreg, 
 Cf. P 535, * 201, n 470; x 209, a 269, ^ 90, etc. 
 
 Kara-pfcj: IV. 1701 xard S' eppeer d(T;^a- 
 Xocjj^Ti I 5axpt'a. Cf. A 810, 11 109. 
 
 Kara- ;^ai): IV. 367 xard S' or/looj^ at(y;go$ 
 Ixeva I :^>7?wi;Tepa($. Cf. D 123; yj 286, X 433, etc. 
 
 b) APOIXONIUS HAS TMESIS; HOMER HAS ONLY 
 
 THE COMPOUND. 
 
 Kar-epvxcxi: I. 1079 rovg Se xar' av^L \ 
 vavriXXea^t epvxov; II. 530 dpicr^eg 5e xar' 
 av^L\^i[j.voi epvxdfievoi. Cf. II. 287, also Z 192; 
 a 315, etc. 
 
 Kar-epvo: II. 933 xdS 5' dpa Xdt^og ipvaad- 
 [levot ravvovro \ eg nohag dfi(porepovg, Cf. € 261, 
 ^ 151, etc. 
 
 Kar-evvd^u: I. 1155 xara S^ evvaaenovrov. 
 
 Kara-xXdo): IV. 1076 yj^e Se xovpYi\aivo7ia^yjg 
 xard (lOL voov ex?iaaev avriouaa. 
 
 
 i' 
 
 — 75 — 
 
 C) APOLLONIUS HAS TMESIS; THE COMPOUND IS 
 
 POST-HOMKRIC. 
 
 Kara-xU^G): IV. 1281 [ofi^pog'] oare (3o(3v 
 xard fivpia exTivaev epya. Cf. Archil. 8, 4. 
 
 Kara-fiLfivu: III. 648 xar avro^i ^i^vev, 
 Cf. * 163 nap ai^i fievov. 
 
 Kara-vdo^ai: 1. 1356 Syj ydp pa xar' airo^i 
 vdcaaro Ttalhag, Cf. II. 522. 
 
 d) APOLLONIUS HAS TMESIS; THE COMPOUND IS NOT 
 
 QUOTABLE. 
 
 Kara-ne'ke^i^id: II. 91 xdh he liapelav\xelp 
 inl ol neXefii^ev, Cf. the scholiast, and Liddell 
 and Scott s. v. 
 
 — (lerd — 
 
 a) APOLLONIUS AND HOMER BOTH HAVE TMESIS. 
 
 Mer-elTtov: II. 1279ai'T/m S' 'Ayxalog rolov 
 fierd (.iv^ov eemev; cf. III. 522 avrixa h" ^Apyog \ 
 rolov enog fiermnev eelho^evoLOtv de'^Tiov. 
 
 Mera-rpeTtw: III. 261 ^erd 5' i^ufag erpanev 
 aiaa. III. 649 fierd S' irpdner avng bniaoid \ 
 Grpe<pMa\ Cf. A 199. 
 
 b) APOLLONIUS HAS TMESIS; HOMER HAS ONLY 
 
 THE COMPOUND. 
 
 Mer-epxofiai: I. 110 ^erd 5' jyXuSei^ i?i8o- 
 fievoiGiv, For the compound compare I. 710; 
 III. 348, 697; also 4> 422; a 229, etc. 
 
/ 
 
 n 
 
 
 « 
 
 — 76 — 
 
 — TCapd — 
 
 a) APOLLONIUS AND HOMER BOTH HAVE TMESIS. 
 
 Tlapa'l3d?iX(o: IV. 484 KoX^i8og ay;^oS^6 i^ridg 
 tYiv Ttapa vYia (idXovro \ yjpo>€g; IV. 892 orig 
 Ttapd nela^a ^dTiotro, Cf. E 369, 504, N 35. 
 
 nap-taT>7^i: III. 1 E( b' dye vvv, ^Eparci, 
 Ttapd ^' laraao. Cf. E 809., 
 
 b) APOLLONIUS HAS TMESIS; THE COMPOUND IS 
 
 POST-HOMERIC. 
 
 Xlapa-^erpeG): IV. 1777 d/lXd sxyiXoi \ yalav 
 KexponLYjv napd r AvkiSa fierpi^oavreg. Cf. I. 
 595, 1116; II. 939, etc. 
 
 C) APOI^LONIUS HAS TMESIS; THE COMPOUND IS NOT 
 
 QUOTABLE. 
 
 Ilap-opi'i^ac III. 486 rsYjv napd ^Yirepa 
 ^v^oig opvv^t, ?iLGa6(i6vog. Cf Liddell and 
 Scott s. V. 
 
 — Ttapex — 
 
 IlapEx-afiei^Q: II. 94 6 5' dyx* aiVoto napsx 
 yovv yovvog dfi6il3o)V] cf I. 581 nyjXidbag Se 
 Ttape^yjIjiEi^ov ipinvag. The compound does not 
 occur in Homer; but II. 94 is a close imitation 
 
 of A 547. 
 
 — TtepL — 
 
 a) APOLLONIUS AND HOMER BOTH HAVE TMESIS. 
 
 Ilepi- €ifii: II. 58 oaaov iyci f>ivovg re ^ouv 
 nepi r eifii rafieo^at, Cf. 27 roaaov iyo) 
 Ttepi t' €1(1* dv^p^Ttciv. 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 *i 
 
 r 
 
 -77 - 
 
 TLlepi'XaXvnrG) : I. 218 Xvyaioig ibd^aaae 
 nepl vifpeeGOi xa/li;'v//a$; III. 746 xai rtva naihidv \ 
 fiy^r epa re^vecircjv dbivdv nepi xCdy! ixdXvnrev. 
 Cf K 201, H 359, n 735, fl 20; a 201. 
 
 UepL'X,^o)' III- 291 0)g be yvvYj [laXepo) nepl 
 xdp<pea ;^ei;aTo 5aXaj. Cf. B 19; S- 282, v 189. 
 
 b) APOLLONIUS HAS TMESIS; THE COMPOUND IS 
 
 POST-HOMERIC 
 
 IIepL-fiod^): III. 791 ryjXov Se noT^ig nepi 
 ndaa ^o/iaei \ noTfiov e^iov. Cf. T 362 ye?iaaae Se 
 ndaa nepi x^^^- 
 
 nept-baicd: IV. 867/1 (lev yap (iporeag aiei 
 nepi adpxag eSatev, Cf. dix^L-Saio} in M 35. 
 
 UepL-SevGi: IV. 1134 (leXin ^yipov Tiepi ;^et^o$ 
 eSevaev. 
 
 nept-Sivevu: I. 1059 rpig nepi x^T^^eioig avv 
 revx^ai Sivrj^evreg. 
 
 Hepi'Tiafi^dvG): 1. 1197 nepi arvnog eXka^e, 
 
 — npog — 
 
 YlpoC'^dXTiid'. I. 1231 npog ydp ol hixp^iYivig 
 dn* ai^epog avyd^ovaa\ ^dTJke aeXyivaiyi, Cf. H 
 421; T 433. 
 
 GVV 
 
 a) APOLLONIUS AND HOMER BOTH HAVE TMESIS. 
 
 l,vV'eXavvG): I. 1026 avv S' e?uaaav (leXiag 
 re xai danibag aXXyj^OLaiv. Cf. cr 98. 
 
— 78 — 
 
 ^vy-X^ij: II. 563 ovv 5i g^lv x^ro ^v^og, 
 Cf. n 358 avv 5e yk^ovri vooq ;f i;to. 
 
 b) APOLLONIUS HAS TMESIS; HOMER HAS ONLY THE 
 
 COMPOUND. 
 
 ^vv-avrau^: IV. 1181 avv h' ave^eg dypoioratl 
 i^ivreov. Cf. IV. 1484. 
 
 ^vv-e^yiS, II. 201 pivoi he avv oarSa fiovvov 
 hpyov. 
 
 C) APOI.LONIUS HAS TMESIS; THE COMPOUND IS 
 
 POST-HOMERIC. 
 
 ^vfi'TtopavvG): IV. 547 avv yap oi dva^ 
 nopavve xeXev^ov. 
 
 d) APOLLONIUS HAS TMESIS; THE cOMfOUND IS NOT 
 
 QUOTABLE. 
 
 ^vv-afia^vvu: III. 295 to 5' [nvp] d^ea^rov 
 i^ okiyoio ^a/loi; aveypo^evov avv xdp^fa ndvr^ 
 a^a^vv Si, 
 
 I^vv-evveno): IV. 1275 avv 5' evvenov 
 daxoL^ocavTL. 
 
 — imep — 
 
 'T7tfp-/3dXXw: IV. 307 (3a7jliv vnsp ai»;c8m 
 yat)7$; IV. 600 ov hi Ti$ vhup . , | o/cjyo^ hvvarai 
 ^akeetv vnep. Cf. X 597. 
 
 vnix 
 
 T7tex-[3d?iXG): I. 596 (lek^ov hnex Ttora/iolo 
 ^akslv 'Afivpoio pie^pa, which the scholiast 
 
 f 
 
 
 
 — 79- 
 
 explains by napa^el^lai. The compound 
 vTtex^akTud is not found in Homer, but compare 
 369 ovx dv v7te^€<pvye ^rvyog vharog aind 
 |)ef3pa. 
 
 — vTtexnpo — 
 
 IV. 225 vTtEXTtpo he Ttovrov era^vev vyjvg; 
 cf. vnexTtpo^eovaai in IV. 935. The word 
 vTtexTtpordavu is a "dna^ ^.eyofievov,'^ 
 
 SUMMARY. 
 
 I. NUMBER OF EXAMPLES OF TMESIS IN APOLLONIUS. 
 
 a) Apollonius agrees with Homer no 
 
 b) Apollonius has tmesis where Homer has only the 
 
 compound 39 
 
 c) Apollonius has tmesis in compounds that are post- 
 
 Homeric 46 
 
 c) Apollonius has tmesis in new compounds 10 
 
 Total, 205 
 
 II. NUMBER OF VERBS USED IN TMESIS BY 
 
 APOLLONIUS. 
 
 a) Apollonius and Homer both have tmesis 68 
 
 b) Apollonius has tmesis; Homer has only the compound.. 33 
 
 c) Apollonius has tmesis; the compound is post-Homeric. 40 
 
 d) Apollonius has tmesis; the compound is not quotable... 9 
 
 Total, 150 
 
 Examples in which the preposition is repeated in a 
 second clause: I. 1284 iv d^ <T<f>ip Kparepbv m/cos iriaeif, iv bk 
 Ko\(pdi I daireros; 11. 493 dv&, 5' iffrar' 'I-^auv, \ Siv 8^ Bopijtot vUv, 
 III. 1230 Slp S^ voXiLfppiPov pdfia a-dKos, Slp 8^ Kal ?7xoy; III. 516 irl 
 8i rplros 'ISos | (Spro, fiiya <ppop^<ap, iwl 5' vUe Tvpdap^oio. For 
 similar examples in Homer compare A 447, 2 419, <ir 887-888. 
 Cf. also Kiihner-Gerth, Sec. 445, 2 a. i. 
 
— 8i — 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 I 
 
 \ 
 
 WHY PREPOSITIONS IN CONSTRUC- 
 TION WITH CASES ARE RARER IN 
 POETRY THAN IN PROSE. 
 
 The frequency of the prepositions in case-construc- 
 tion varies considerably in all the departmeijts of the 
 literature. In poetry, as a rule, the prepositions are 
 rarer than in prose. In valuing this fact, however, 
 from a stylistic point of view, we must bear in mind 
 that in poetry the prepositions are more plastic and 
 weigh, if not number, more than in prose. Cf. 
 Gildersleeve, A.J. P., XXIII., i6. Vogrinz, Berl. 
 Phil. Woch. for 1885, sp. 225-230, says: " Betrachtet 
 man theoretisch das Werden des Prapositions- 
 ausdruckes, so kann man gemass den gelauterten 
 Vorstellungen die wir heutzatage von sprachlicher 
 Entwicklung haben, annehmen, dass, unbeschadet 
 der vollen formalen und Bedeutungskraft des Kasus, 
 dasselbe Verhaltniss, welches durch den Kasus allein 
 ausgedriickt wurde, in der Praposition resp. in dem 
 adverbialen Zusatze entschiedener zum Ausdruck 
 gebracht wurde. Bei dieser FuUe und diesem 
 sozusagen pleonastischen Ausdruck konnte es aber 
 nicht bleiben. Der weitere Gang war der, dass die 
 Praposition deutlicher ins Bewustsein der Sprechen- 
 den trat als die Kndung der Kasus.*' 
 
 There are several reasons for this difference in 
 frequency. First of all, the case-adverbs, which are 
 so numerous in epic poetry, often take the place of 
 
— 82 — 
 
 the prepositions. Moreover place- relations that would 
 in prose be expressed by preposition and case, can be 
 denoted: a) by a simple case : the locative genitive, 
 the ablatival genitive, the locative dative and the 
 accusative of the goal ; b) by the suffixes -»'/£>, -»V£, and 
 'Se. Therefore, before taking up ApoUonius' use of 
 the prepositions with cases, it is well to compare his 
 use of these last two constructions with the Homeric 
 use. 
 
 A. SIMPLE CASES TO EXPRESS LOCAL 
 
 RELATIONS. 
 
 l) LOCAIv GENITIVE. 
 
 Setting aside adverbial forms such as adrouy ayx^n^ 
 rr^Xuh, u(;>oo, which though originating in this construc- 
 tion do not have the same stylistic effect, we find 
 according to Linsenbarth, De Apollonii Rhodii 
 Casuum Syntaxi Comparato Usu Homerico, few 
 examples in ApoUonius as compared with Homer. 
 Of the subdivisions made by Monro ( Sec. 1 49 ) , 
 neither the first nor the second are represented in 
 ApoUonius. Examples after verbs of motion are . 
 I. 687 [/^of$] yuoro^ov veiolo (iieipvaaovatv 
 
 aporpov. Cf. K 353 bXxe^evai veiolo l3a^ELYjg 
 
 nyjxrov dporpov; also B 785, 801, V 14, A 
 
 244, E 222, 597, etc. 
 III. 1055 al XEV opipofievovg no^eag veiolo 
 
 ^oxevGYig. Cf. P 748 nehioio hiaTtpvaiov rerv- 
 
 ;t>7X6>$; also P 372. 
 Without Homeric parallels are: 
 I. 546 drpanog &g ;|jXofpoIo hieihofievYi nehioio. 
 
 Cf. Call. Del. 141 SietSofjiivyj sv i55aTt v^cog. 
 
 \ 
 
 -83- 
 
 III. 953 aryj^eov idyyj xeap ''her heart broke 
 
 within her breast." 
 The quasi-partitive genitive, like nov yvig (Lat. 
 
 ubi terraruni) occurs in the following 
 
 passages: 
 
 II. 1139 bnn6%i yatyjg; similarly IV. 532 onyi 
 
 Z^opog, Cf. Eurip. Her. 19, 46. 
 
 III. 770 ev^a xaxuv. Cf. Soph. Aj. 659; Eurip. 
 Tro. 680. 
 
 IV. 1476 'Hpa;c;i37a|... dneipeaiYig ryjTiov z^ovog 
 eharo Avyxevg\r(:}g iUeiv. Cf. Arist. Nub. 
 138 TYiT^ov ydp oixCd rdv dypwr. 
 
 Under the partitive genitive may also be 
 put III. 876 'AfiviGolo loEoaa^evYi nora^olo, and 
 III. 1203 Tioeaaaro .... norafiolo | . . . . repev 
 Sifiag. Cf. E 6, Z 508, 265; /? 261, etc. 
 
 2) ABI^ATIVAI, GENITIVE. 
 
 The ablatival genitive is used in prose 
 chiefly with verbs of separation and of depri- 
 vation. In addition to these verbs, it occurs 
 in poetry frequently with verbs of motion. 
 This latter use had to be reinforced by prepo- 
 sitions in prose.— Goodell, The Genitive in 
 Sophocles, A. Ph. As., XV., has collected from 
 Sophocles 456 examples of the ablatival genitive 
 without prepositions (17. 1 % lyric), 616 with 
 
— 84 — 
 
 prepositions (14 % lyric) and 96 with adverbs 
 (18.5 % lyric). ApoUonius, through the 
 influence of the tragic poets, has extended the 
 use of the ablatival genitive. Under the 
 following three divisions I have mainly re- 
 arranged the results of Linsenbarth so as to 
 bring the agreement and the difference between 
 ApoUonius and Homer into greater prominence. 
 Besides presenting the na^kaia xaivCyg, I have 
 added some new examples. 
 
 a) WITH VERBS USED ALSO BY HOMER WITH THE 
 ABI^ATIVAI, GENITIVE. 
 
 a) With simple verbs: — dsvsa^i 1. 782; 
 
 II. 976; IV. 491. Cf. B 128, T 294, N 310, 
 etc.—elvai II. 523, 992; III. 358; IV. 990, 1387. 
 Cf. Z 211; a 215, h 206, etc. In I. 230 ApoUo- 
 nius uses dno; Homer has ix in A 63, B 197 
 a 33, 40.— £ixa^£t»' I. 105. Cf. elxeiv in A 509 
 E 348; n 42, a 10.— sxso^i I. 334; II. 1204 
 
 III. 1267; IV. 1054. Cf. B 98, T 84, N 360 
 etc.—Mr'iv III. 1300; IV. 667. Cf. A 210, 319 
 Hes. Th. 4S.—lEi7tsa^ai I. 315. Cf. * 523 
 529.— Xmv I. 903; III. 62. Cf. e 397, v 321 
 n 364.— Ttamr IV. 712, 773, 777. Cf. B 595 
 4> 228, p S.—TtaveaS^i III. 418. Cf. A 467, B 
 430, H SlQ.—xau^ea^i HI. 1050. Cf A 504, 
 M I72,262,etc.— w^flff^t II. 1056. Cf. M 420. 
 
 Hi 
 
 -85- 
 
 (i) With compound verbs: — dvahvea^ai I. 
 1228. Cf. A 359; e 337 .—dvanrelv II. 609, 739. 
 Cf A 382, 235, T 221 .—aTtoepyeiv I. 865. Cf. 
 n 23S.—dnoX^yHv 1. 1325. Cf. H 263, A 255, 
 
 * 577, etc.— dnoyiveiv II. 456; III. 1343. Cf. 
 X 50; <^ 46. — dnofiopyvvvai II. 86. Cf. E 416. 
 —dnonXa^siv I. 1220; II. 776, 959. Cf ^i 285, 
 382.— dnoTt'i^eff^at I. 129. Cf (p 119.— 
 dTtoriiyiyeiv IV. 1118. Cf K 364, X 456.— 
 d<?)op|ua(T^t 1. 190; II. 317; IV. 1020. Cf. B 794. 
 — 3iaTpt^f(T3at 11.885. ClfS 40i.—8xyiyvea^ai 
 1. 56, 157, 208, 223. 952, 975; III. 364; IV. 260. 
 Cf. E 637, T 199, 418, etc.-ixTcrvsLv IV. 478. 
 Cf £ 322.—sxaaovv II. 1186. Cf S 501.— 
 ixaevea^at IV. 40. Cf H 1; , 373, ^ 366.— 
 ixfpaivEabat I. 1310. Cf u 441. — i^dyeiv IV. 
 749. Cf E 35, 352, A 4S7 .—i^aipela^ai II. 184; 
 
 III. 279, 843, 1012. Cf 323, T 137, n 754. 
 e^dyiXea^i II. 268; IV. 464. Cf E 142, P 342, 
 
 * 39d.—i^anolSaiveiv III. 199, 326. Cf fi 306. 
 —e^inretv III. 207. Cf H 51; x 466.-£CgX- 
 avveiv I. 987; IV. 1136, 1758. Cf E 324, K 
 499, etc.— £^ep;Ki(T3ai II. 202. Cf K 140, X 237; 
 V 371, etc.— I^iemi I. 446. Cf a 374, /3 139.— 
 xara'^a'iveiv III. 888. Cf E 109, fl 329.- 
 xareoxea^a-i IV. 329, 1682. Cf T 125.— xaTa;^£l»' 
 
 IV. 25, 34. Cf * 282.— ^fSdmi III. 274, 476. 
 Cf A 234, 240, etc —(israXkyiyeiv I. 1271. Cf. 
 1 157,261,299.— unoXrea^ai III. 996. Cf.A401. 
 
— 86 — 
 
 b) WITH VKRBS NOT USED IN HOMER WITH THE SIMPLE 
 
 ABI.ATIVAI. GENITIVE. 
 
 a) With simple verbs:— drt^ai^ I. 615.— 
 ilaivaiv III. 597. Cf. Soph. 0. T. 97; Eurip. 
 Med. n.-l^r.rmiv I. 296; 11. 331; III. 561. 
 Cf. Eurip. Phoen. 1260.-Xw(fdj^ II. 650; III. 
 783. Cf. Aesch. Pr. 376, 654; Soph. Aj. 61.- 
 'pmG^ai 11. 218; III. 905; IV. 1071, 1701. Cf. 
 Eurip. Ale. Il.—aaovv III. 1126. Cf. Soph. 
 Ant. 1162, Phil. 919; Eurip. Or. 779.-<^ipar 
 I. 1183. 
 
 /iJ) With compound verbs:— di^6;f6fr I. 673. 
 Cf Soph. O. T. ll^.-avaxYimeiv III. 227; IV. 
 h^%.—ava^p6(jxBiv III. ^h^.— avihai I. 1304; 
 IV. 1696. Cf. Soph. O.T. 264; Eur. Med. 456. 
 —^vaxoL'^Ba'^ai IV. 1239.— aTtopj/uaSa/ I. 800.— 
 dfpixdveiv I. l77.^iaxpiVBiv III. 1 12S.— ex fioXelv 
 I. S45.-8^avihai IV. 293. Cf. Eurip. Bacch. 
 762, H. F. 625. 
 
 Homer, on the other hand, has the simple 
 ablatival genitive after d^vaaeiv (^ 305) and 
 xara?,cd<pdv {l 460). Apollonius uses a pre- 
 position with these verbs (III. 616, 1347). 
 Expressions like ^'kdnrovoi xe?.Ev^ov (a 195) 
 or Urioe xsTlev^ov (5 380) are not found in 
 Apollonius. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■'^jlP 
 
 -87 - 
 
 C) WITH VERBS NOT FOUND IN HOMER. 
 
 avTicndv II. 600. — dnafiei^eG^at III. 784. 
 — dnoxarar'SeG^aL III. 816. — dnoxiSvaa^ai IV. 
 133. — dno^.eix^iv IV. 478. — dnovoocpL^eiv IV. 
 36._6taAiW3at IV. 35.— f;c/^XmrIV. 1415.— 
 ixnpofj,o?^8lv IV. 1537, 1585. — sxpvea^aL IV. 83. 
 Cf. Eurip. Bacch. 258. — iEavareXXsLV IV. 1421. 
 —e^avihai II. 461; III. 69, 756; IV. 318, 560, 
 757. — s^opvva^aL I. 306. — xaraxreatic^eJ^aL 
 III. 136. — xaranpoxelv III. 1117. — i^israx^d^ea- 
 3ai III. 436 — voacpi^sLv (active not Homeric) 
 III. 795.— vnoreXTisa^ai II. 83. 
 
 SUMMARY OF THE ABLATIVAL GENITIVE. 
 
 a) WITH VERBS ALSO USED BY HOMER WITH THE ABL. GEN. 
 
 a) Simple verbs — lo; No. of ex, 24. 
 j3) Compound verbs— 30; No. of ex. 52. 
 
 b) WITH VERBS NOT USED BY HOMER WITH THE ABL- GEN. 
 
 a) Simple verbs — 7; No. of ex. 13. 
 
 /3) Compound verbs — 10; No. of ex. 12. 
 
 C) WITH VERBS NOT FOUND IN HOMER. 
 
 Only compounds, except vo<r<pl^€iv; in all 18; No. of ex. 24. 
 Total of verbs 75; of ex. 125. 
 
 3) LOCATIVE DATIVE. 
 
 The dative of place without a preposition 
 IS frequent in the epic; in lyric and tragic 
 poetry the prepositional use begins to pre- 
 dominate; in prose, with the exception of a 
 few locatives of proper names, as 'A^yivyjat 
 
— 88 — 
 
 the prepositions ev, ini^Ttapdj Ttpog are used. 
 Cf. Monro, Sec. 145; Main, Locative Expressions 
 in the Attic Orators. 
 
 According to Linsenbarth, the locative 
 dative is not so common in Apollonius as in 
 Homer. However the Homeric usages are 
 well represented. 
 
 a) WITH PROPER NAMES OF COUNTRIES, ISLANDS AND CITIES. 
 
 'AXoTtT? I. 51.— Hi'Xoj I. 157.— ni;^i I. 
 413.— 'Apya I. 1317.— Kfw II. 528. 
 
 b) OF THE GREAT DIVISIONS OF THE WORI,D AND OTHER 
 
 I.OCAUTIES. 
 
 al^spt II. 363, III. lOOl.-^i'pan) IV. 261 
 (A U3).—7i6vro) 11. 1127— oiycTf I. 26, 1150. 
 —vT^ao^ IV. 1208.— %ca IV. 539.— f%oi III. 
 44, 250.-56^01$ I. 304, 447; 11. 655.— juiaaia 
 I. 531.— ^i;;tt5 III. 659.— €(y;^aTt77 I. 213. 
 
 The following local datives, found in the 
 Argonautica, do not occur in Homer without a 
 preposition: 
 
 iept IV. d43.—alYi IV. 5S4.— pyiyfilvL II. 
 5S4.—dxralg I. 588, IV. 245, 854.— iJ^aat II. 
 1218; IV. 1242,— TtfoxoYiOi IV. 27 h—fii^oSLYiatv 
 aX6s IV. 919.— tXrt II. S21.—6lafi6VYiaiv III. 
 1201,—Sovdx€aoiv III. 6.— /Ja^ftT? v2.y} II. 699. 
 — /3a3aat$ dpovpaig I. 686.— 4»uTa;itip III. 1399. 
 
 4) 
 
 >-' 
 
 •^'V 
 
 r 
 
 -89- 
 
 —xTiYjlGiv III. 1268.— 3aXd//cj IV. 28.— rfr'^ 
 IV. 791.— xp>7T>7ptT( I. 1185. 
 
 C) OF THE PARTS OF THE BODY OR OF THE SOUI,. 
 
 v6o) III. 902; IV. 735.— :^i;^^t5 I. 817; II. 
 1222; III. 451, 786; IV. 1746.— <^pF(T/rI. 508.— 
 XepolvlU. 1236.— (Vvi IV. 179.— onioiGL III. 45. 
 
 The datives after dvdGGeiv (I. 49, 507; IV. 
 305, 7&S),xoipavElv (I. 34; 11. 1000; III. 406) 
 and fiETanpsTteiv (I. 100; II. 786; HI. 246, 335) 
 may also be regarded as local. This would 
 make in all 63 examples of the locative dative 
 in Apollonius. 
 
 4) THE ACCUSATIVE OF THE GOAL. 
 
 The accusative to denote the '^termiiuis 
 ad quern" is common with IxvEo^iai, Ixu and 
 Ixdvid but comparatively rare with verbs like 
 dyw, a^t, sp^ofiOLL, Yiyeouai and veo^ai. Cf. 
 Monro, Sec. 140, 4. The examples in Apollo- 
 nius are the following (105 in all): 
 
 a) With simple verbs of motion: — dyeiv I. 
 1316. Cf H 363, eic.—liaiveiv IV. 1212. Cf. 
 y 162, Qic.—hvveiv I. 195, 263, 627, 635, 832, 
 1025; II. 298, 923; III. 1255; IV. 206, 722, 
 861, 1178, 1616. Cf r 339, etc.— 5iW3a£ 
 III: 1190; IV. 863, 1543. Cf * 739, etc.— 
 UvaL IV. 739. Cf a 176, ei(^,-lxdveiv I. 318, 
 785; II. 1280; III. 387. Cf Z 370, etc.^ 
 
i 
 
 — 90 — 
 
 IxEtv {Ixh^ai) I. 608, 709, 874, 1031, 1244, 
 1333, 1402; 11. 350, 551, 730, 1068, 1143, 
 1263; in. 213, 1108, 1121; IV. 33, 243, 378, 
 505, 659, 767, 773, 819, 966, 992, 1232, 1234, 
 1394, 1417, 1514, 1568, 1676. Cf. Z 225, etc. 
 —viaa£ai>aL IV. 257. This last example is 
 without a parallel in Homer. 
 
 b) With compound verbs of motiou: — 
 atpLxavHv IV. 847. Cf. £ 159, etc. — aquxveln^ai 
 I. 1177; 11. 768. Cf. A 618, etc. — eiaarpixdveiv 
 IV. 540, 612, 731, 775, 1759. Cf. E 230, etc.— 
 elaa^ixvela^ai IV. 302, 643, 1213. Cf. X 17, 
 etc. — eiGf^x^a^^^i III. 39. Cf. X '12 .—siixvEla^ai 
 111.312; IV. 1472. Cf.(-)439,etc.-f7tm;iai;fa;^af 
 
 III. 1065. VX,^U,-moixEa^ai I. 644; 11.455; 
 
 IV. 370, 1317. Cf A 50, etc.— |t/erax(d^£(i' I. 
 1221; III. 489, 801; IV. 305, 531, 779. Cf. a 
 22.-^fTfp;i:fa^at III. 348, 438, 547; IV. 837. 
 Cf. Z 280, etc -n^o(y(idXkea^ai IV. 1044. Cf E 
 879.-[^7to<5i;f/i/II.433; IV. 1376. Cf. 5 435, etc. 
 
 With the following five compounds Apoll- 
 onius has the accusative of tlie goal without 
 a preposition, where Homer uses one:— drep;^- 
 «T3a( II. 1145. Cf. X 97.-8iaiMveiv II. 535; 
 IV. 1588. CM 59.— 8ia6Xav 11.674, 1267, 
 1285; IV. 633. Cf. v m.—sis^avveiv I. 987 — 
 i^i^dvsiv I. 667. — Also with three verbs not 
 found in Homer: — vmevat III. 1076. Cf. Arist. 
 
 — 91 -- 
 
 Vesp. 4:&5.-^v7tBp6vy8a^ai II. QSQ.—siaanoiJaLPeiv 
 I. 846; IV. 625, 648, 1779. 
 
 B. SUFFIXES .//£v, (-,^0 AND -^h TO EXPRESS 
 
 LOCAL RELATIONS. 
 
 Excepting ^eaao^i (I. 1278, II. 172), 
 Homeric forms like 'Utd^f, ovpavo^i, w^i, 
 ^yipyj^i, etc., are not found in Apollonius. 
 Likewise, the old case-suffix fpiv, which is com- 
 paratively frequent in Homer, occurs only four 
 times in Apollonius (always with a preposition); 
 viz. I. 566=IV. 1661; II. 494; IV. 80, with 
 which compare y 353, e 59, ^ 414, p 74, 283, 
 552, etc. Of the suffixes -^Fr and -<Sf, only 
 the forms from nominal stems are given. 
 
 l) FORMS IN -'^ev (5 I IN AI,l). 
 a) PROPER NAMES OF CITIES AND COUNTRIES. 
 
 ' Apai^vpeyj^ev I. 115; 'Apyo^ev I. 118; 
 'Apnvyj^Bvl, 152; 'ApxaSiyi^sv I. 161; 'EcpvpyjS^ev 
 IV. 1210; KexpoTiiYj^ev I. 94, 214; KvMGo^ev 
 IV. 434; 2\vxLY!^8v II. 676; Uispiyj^ev I. 31 (Hes. 
 Op. 1, h. Merc. 85); :S.7idpryj^8v I. 148. Cf. B 
 671, Z 291: E 105; /3 327, S 10, etc. 
 
 Afo^Fr occurs twice in Apollonius: II. 463; 
 IV. 270. Cf. 489, etc. 
 
 b) APPEI.I,ATrvBS. 
 
 1. Of place:— dyeXyi^ev 1. 356, 406; d')(Of>^^ev 
 I. 877 (B 264. fi 439); &ypv^evll. M0;dyp6^sv 
 I. 1172 {v 268, 428); Svfio^ev I. 7 (t 197); 
 
I 
 
 — 92 — 
 
 evvYJ^Bvll. 197 (i; 124); ^evyXri^ev JII. 1318; 
 rt^ivYi^Bv IV. 1577; ovpavo^Ev I. 547, 1280; 
 
 II. 287, 518; III. 1195, 1376; IV. 639, 1285, 
 1695, (A 195, 208, 558, et€.); ndrpyj^ei^ II. 
 543 (Pind. N. VII. 103); neSd^ev I. 1199; 
 
 III. 1315 (j'295); Ttoif^ivyj^evll. ^93; npv^vo^ev 
 
 IV. 909, 1684 (Aesch. Sept. 71, 1056); l>i^ri^8v 
 ♦ III. 1400; ;^6p(To^er IV. 1262; fieaaoS^ev I. 1168, 
 
 and o^o^Ev I. 91, which the scholiast para- 
 phrases by and rov avrov ronov, 
 
 2. Of time:— r^tS^f r I. 594, 1053; II. 729; 
 IV. 497, 855, 1222. Cf. a 372, y 153, 366, 
 a 214, yj 189, etc. 
 
 3. Of the agent:— ^eo^Ev II. 261; III. 1004; 
 IV. 413. Cf. 7C 477; also Eiirip. Med. 1270; 
 Herod. VI. 14. 
 
 In three examples the form is strength- 
 ened by a preposition: ttTt' Aiytvyj^ev IV. 1775 
 (ft 492); 8x Aio^sv II. 995; ex npv^vrj^ev 
 II. 588 (0 716; also Aesch. Sept. 191). 
 
 2) FORMS IN -^e (45 IN ALL), 
 a) WITH PROPER NAMES. 
 
 1. Of place: — AIolvSe III. 306; Alfiovirv^B 
 IV. 1032; 'ApmSt'>7^'5f 11. 1054; Hi^^o^f I. 209; 
 II. 186 (;i581). 
 
 2. Of the person:— 'AXxirooj^Sf IV. 1198 
 (fl 338). 
 
 — 93 — 
 
 b) WITH APPEIXATIVFS. 
 
 1. Of place:— dyop>7^;Sf I. 328 (A 54, B 
 207); aXaSe IV. 135, 546, 1608 (A 308; (3 389, 
 et<?.); UnEipdvhe II. 736, 978; IV. 1363 {x 423, 
 a 84); husrepov^s 'to our house' I. 704 (3 39, 
 o 513; u 267); ^d?.a^6v68 III. 9, 249, 450, 671 
 (<?> 8, Z 109, 161); xpyivnv^e I. 1258 {v 159); 
 :K6Vxai'Ly]i'8e II. 192; f^ivxovk IV. 1543; VY;6p^e 
 III. 939; IV. 50; vyjaovSe II. 1115; olxovk III. 
 1138 (a 17, 317, 360, 424, etc.); OvXv^t7t6i'?ie 
 II. 605; III. 1357; IV. 779 (A 221, 394, 425, 
 et€.); ne^iovk III. 1344 (A 492, T 148, * 8); 
 ndrpyivf^e IV. 190; nekayoaSe IV. 1231, 1268; 
 noXivbe III. 1153 (E 224; a 189); nd^^s^ovb' 
 II. 921 (B 443, 589, 872, etc.); novrov^E II. 
 329, 415, 542, 686, 1104; IV. 198, 1748 {l 495, 
 X 48); Ttora^dv^E 11. 1274 (4> 13, 120, etc.); 
 XEpaovb' III. 199 (h. Ap. 28). 
 
 2. Of the person: — avroxaGtyvy^ryiv^E HI. 
 
 647. 
 
 In IV. 1766, the word is reinforced by a 
 preposition; viz. (lErd v^db\ Cf. x 851. 
 
— 95 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 1 
 
 PREPOSITIONS IN CASE-CONSTRUC- 
 TION. 
 
 * ' Passing from the cases to the prepositions we 
 enter, ' ' as Dr. Gildersleeve remarks, * * upon a field 
 which has been worked in spots until the ground is 
 pulverized with the statistical harrow, while in parts 
 it lies absolutely fallow." Cf. A. J. P. XXIII., p. 25. 
 
 The Argonautica of ApoUonius is still virgin-soil^^ 
 as regards the treatment of the prepositions. 
 
 * At least this was the case when the present work was 
 undertaken. While it was in progress there appeared a thesis 
 by A. S. Haggett, ''A Comparison of ApoUonius Rhodius 
 with Homer in Prepositional Usage ^^ published by the 
 John Murphy Co., Baltimore, 1902; but, owing to the fact that 
 Raggett's thesis was mentioned neither in Bursian's Jahres- 
 bericht, nor in the Bibliographical Record of the American 
 Philological Association, nor among the notices of Recent 
 Publications in the American Journal of Philology, — the 
 ordinary sources of bibliographical information about such a 
 work — It escaped my notice until after my work was com- 
 pleted and presented to the Faculty of the University. — 
 Owing to my fuller treatment of the other uses of the 
 prepositions the present chapter is the only one which might 
 liave been affected by Raggett's thesis, had it come to my 
 notice sooner. Before going to press I made a special revision 
 of this chapter and compared my results with those of 
 Haggett; but with the exception of a few examples, I did not 
 see any reason for changing my treatment of the subject. 
 Hence, where I differ from Haggett, the differences are all 
 intentional. Haggett does not distinguish between prepo- 
 sitional phrases as iirl di^p and ewl xp^^ovi ^""i 7roXX6i' and iirl 
 v6vT0Vi is aiel and is evdiov; avd ttjXov and dirb yairis; etc. His 
 tables show the total of all the prepositions in ApoUonius to 
 be 2047; whereas I have 21 10, which in itself makes already a 
 serious difference of 63 examples. 
 
-96- 
 
 Before taking up each preposition separately, three 
 general questions of great stylistic and syntactic im- 
 portance should be discussed. 
 
 FREQUENCY IN GENERAL. 
 
 The aggregate frequency of prepositions varies 
 according to time, subject and writer,— being less in 
 poetry than in prose, less in the drama than in epic 
 or lyric poetry, less in the orators than in the philoso- 
 phers. Cf. T. Mommsen, Beitr. z. d. Lehre, v. d. 
 Griech. Prap., p. 14 seq. 
 
 Haggett, in his summary of the prepositions in 
 Homer, gives as a total of the prepositions in case- 
 construction the figure 8198 (II. 4746, Od. 3452 ). 
 Accordingly Homer has an average of one preposi- 
 tion in every 3.4 lines, that for the Iliad (3.3) being 
 slightly higher than that for the Odyssey (3.5). 
 T. Mommsen has an average of one preposition for 
 3.14 lines in the Iliad and one for 3.95 lines in the 
 Odyssey. As there is no objective rule to decide the 
 doubtful cases of tmesis or of the adverbial use, it is 
 impossible to say that either set of these figures is 
 absolutely correct and the other wrong. The differ- 
 ence, however, is immaterial, as in such questions 
 only the large masses count. — Apollonius has 1743 
 examples of prepositions in case-construction, mak 
 ing an average of one preposition in 3.3 lines, and so 
 he remains faithful in this respect to the laws of his 
 department. 
 
 In connection with the aggregate frequency, it is 
 important to notice that the distribution of the pre- 
 positions is far from being uniform, as the following 
 passages from ApoUonius will show. 
 
 - 97 
 
 4«# 
 
 a) PREPOSITION S RARE 
 
 I. 139— 150 
 709— 720 
 
 1215—1230 
 
 II. 539— 548 
 
 1195—1206 
 
 III. 74_ 89 
 
 144— 153 
 651— 666 
 765— 776 
 
 IV. 662— 669 
 823— 839 
 
 1235—1250 
 
 Total:— Lines— 157 
 
 b) PREPOSITIONS NUMEROUS. 
 
 I. 536— 539 
 617— 626 
 740— 746 
 
 II. 102— 113 
 1166—1175 
 
 III. 210- 218 
 675— 685 
 739- 745 
 
 1277—1284 
 
 IV. 625— 634 
 964— 977 
 
 1765—1775 
 
 5 prep. 
 8 
 
 t( 
 
 6 
 
 8 
 8 
 6 
 7 
 7 
 5 
 9 
 9 
 8 
 
 (( 
 
 (( 
 
 << 
 
 u 
 
 (( 
 
 l( 
 
 «< 
 
 4< 
 
 <( 
 
 Lines— 113; prep.— 86. 
 
 FREQUENCY WITH EACH CASE. 
 
 As T. Mommsen has shown, the numerical relation 
 of prepositions with cases is a criterion of style, 
 period and department. In the older and poetic 
 language the dative preponderates; in the later 
 language ( especially in prose ) the accusative is most 
 frequent; while the genitive ranks first in the 
 rhetorico-philosophic elements in prose and poetry. 
 The relation in the dramatists, as given by Mommsen, 
 is the following : 
 
 X 1 « 
 
 GENITIVE 
 
 DATIVE 
 
 ACCUSATIVE 
 
 Aeschylus 
 
 Sophocles 
 
 Euripides 
 
 Aristophanes 
 
 5 
 3 
 4 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 5 
 3 
 
 Prose from the earliest period showed a tendency 
 for an increase in the accusative. The result of this 
 tendency may be seen in Polybius for whom Krebs 
 pp. 6-9 gives an average of 2.2 gen.; i dat; 4.5 ace. 
 
— 98 — 
 
 For Homer Haggett gives the following statistics : 
 
 fTot. No. of occ. with the gen.: 1160-24 46 per cent. 
 Iliad I •• *• •* " ** *' dat.: 1979=41 70 ** " 
 ♦* *• '* " " " ace: 1607=33.84 ** ** 
 
 fTot. No. of occ. with the gen.: 663=19.21 per cent. 
 
 Odvssev< *' *' ** dat.: 1470=42.58 " " 
 
 ^ "'I " •* " " " " ace: 1319=38.21 '* ** 
 
 It is easily seen from this that in the Odyssey the 
 genitive decreases in proportion as the accusative 
 increases, foreshadowing the later prose usage.— 
 Apollonius followed the more poetic usage of the 
 Iliad, with a slight reactionary decrease of the 
 accusative. 
 
 A ^„« fTot. No. of occ. with the gen.: 456=26.16 per cent. 
 Argo- . ,, .. .. .. u .. jj^j. . 740=42.45 " '• 
 
 nautica '^ ., .. ,, ., .. u ^^^ . 547=31.39 » " 
 
 As Haggett says, ' * we naturally expect the pre- 
 ponderance of the dative in epic poetry because of 
 the great number of concrete locative situations af- 
 forded by the subject matter. Hence i> and iTzi are 
 the favorite prepositions.'* 
 
 * 
 
 TABI^ES SHOWING THE FREQUBNCV OF THE PREPOSITIONS 
 
 WITH CASES. 
 
 a ) PREPOSITIONS WITH ONB CASB: 
 
 
 
 
 
 Genitive. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Avri 
 
 dir6 
 
 iK 
 
 Tp6 
 
 irp6va.p vpoirp6 
 
 inroTp6 \ inriK 
 
 Apol. 
 Horn. 
 
 3 
 
 10 
 
 69 
 
 372 
 
 163 
 690 
 
 2 
 
 34 
 
 2 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 13 
 15 
 
 PREPOSITIONS WITH ONE CASE: (Continued) 
 
 
 Dative 
 
 1 Accusative 
 
 
 iv 
 
 <T^V 
 
 j ei, 
 
 irtpl T i.lKt>l T€ 
 
 Apol. 
 Horn. 
 
 298 
 1893 
 
 65 
 188 
 
 165 
 823 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 — 99 — 
 
 b) PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES: GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE: 
 
 
 Sid 
 
 8Uk 
 
 Kard 
 
 1 irapiK 
 
 inrip 
 
 Apol. 
 Horn. 
 
 gen. 
 
 36 
 , 97 
 
 ace. 
 
 29 
 
 77 
 
 gen. 
 II 
 12 
 
 ace. 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 gen. 
 
 24 
 68 
 
 ace. 
 64 
 586 
 
 gen 
 
 5 
 2 
 
 ace. 
 6 
 
 8 
 
 gen. 
 29 
 
 49 
 
 ace. 
 31 
 
 C) PREPOSITIONS WITH THREE CASES: 
 
 
 dti4>L 
 
 dvd 
 
 ivl 
 
 Apol. 
 Horn. 
 
 gen 
 II 
 2 
 
 dat 
 
 32 
 88 
 
 ace. 
 26 
 
 135 
 
 gen. dat. 
 
 9 
 
 ace. 
 
 55 
 143 
 
 gen. 
 
 47 
 164 
 
 dat. 
 
 180 
 
 S44 
 
 ace. 
 65 
 
 413 
 
 PREPOSITIONS WITH THREE CASES: (Continued) 
 
 Apol. 
 Horn. 
 
 /Ltcrd 
 
 Tapd 
 
 wepl 
 
 gen. 
 
 dat. 
 
 ace. 
 
 gen. 
 
 dat. 
 
 ace. 
 
 gen. 
 
 dat. 
 
 ace 
 
 
 
 36 
 
 47 
 
 4 
 
 18 
 
 18 
 
 '9 
 
 31 
 
 10 
 
 5 
 
 215 
 
 164 
 
 67 
 
 219 
 
 133 
 
 79 
 
 85 
 
 72 
 
 PREPOSITIONS WITH THREE CASES: (CONTINUED) 
 
 
 irp6s 
 
 inrd 
 
 Apol. 
 Horn. 
 
 gen. 
 
 3 
 27 
 
 dat. 
 
 21 
 
 ace. 
 
 10 
 
 279 
 
 gen. 
 
 13 
 126 
 
 dat. 
 
 81 
 
 187 
 
 ace. 
 
 25 
 62 
 
 Apart from quantitative differences, which will be 
 discussed later, it is to be noticed that the Homeric 
 use of awi with the dative is not found in Apollonius. 
 Also /lera with the genitive and np6>,^ with the dative 
 are avoided by Apollonius because of the frequent 
 employment of these constructions in prose. Cf. 
 I.utz, p. 62, 99 ; Krebs, p. 6. 
 
— lOO 
 
 TABI^E SHOWING THE AGGREGATE FREQUENCY AND THE 
 IIEI.ATIVE PERCENTAGE OF THE PREPOSITIONS IN CASK- 
 CONSTRUCTION IN APOI,I*ONIUS AND IN HOMER. 
 
 Prepos. 
 
 I. 
 63 
 
 II. 
 
 68 
 
 III 
 72 
 
 IV 
 95 
 
 TotinAp. 
 
 iv 
 
 298 — .170 
 
 htl 
 
 72 
 
 66 
 
 60 
 
 94 
 
 292— .167 
 
 df 
 
 37 
 
 32 
 
 43 
 
 53 
 
 165— .094 
 
 iic 
 
 34 
 
 42 
 
 41 
 
 46 
 
 T63 .093 
 
 hth 
 
 26 
 
 30 
 
 31 
 
 32 
 
 119 — .068 
 
 icard 
 
 20 
 
 II 
 
 26 
 
 31 
 
 88— 050 
 
 IutA 
 
 16 
 
 18 
 
 23 
 
 26 
 
 83= .047 
 
 At6 
 
 19 
 
 9 
 
 17 
 
 24 
 
 69= .039 
 
 Afupi 
 
 17 
 
 15 
 
 15 
 
 22 
 
 69= .039 
 
 irbv 
 
 17 
 
 12 
 
 18 
 
 t8 
 
 65= .037 
 
 ItA 
 
 12 
 
 14 
 
 13 
 
 26 
 
 65 =.037 
 
 W€pt 
 
 10 
 
 12 
 
 18 
 
 20 
 
 60= .034 
 
 dpd 
 
 14 
 
 13 
 
 8 
 
 20 
 
 55-031 
 
 hr4p 
 
 8 
 
 13 
 
 7 
 
 16 
 
 44= 025 
 
 wapd 
 
 9 
 
 14 
 
 7 
 
 10 
 
 40= .022 
 
 vp6t 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 I3fe= .007 
 
 irrl 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 3= .002 
 
 wp6 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 2= 001 
 
 itiK 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 21= .012 
 
 inriK 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 13= .007 
 
 wapiK 
 
 3 
 
 s 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 11= .006 
 
 trpSTap 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 2— .001 
 
 irpoTp6 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 i=.cxx)6 
 
 hnnrpb 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 i=.ooo6 
 
 ydi.p.4>i re 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 i=.ooo6 
 
 Total in Homer. 
 
 i893( II. 989, Od. 904)=.23i 
 
 1 121 (11. 642, Od. 479) =.136 
 
 823 (II 374. Od. 449)=. 100 
 
 690 (II. 406, Od. 284) =.084 
 
 375 (II. 266, Od. 109)=. 045 
 
 654 (II. 383, Od. 27i)=.079 
 
 384 (II. 233, Od. 151)= .046 
 
 372 (II. 273, Od. 99)= 045 
 
 225 (II. 158, Od. 67)=. 027 
 
 188 (II. 113, Od. 75)= .022 
 
 174 (II. n8. Od. 56)= .021 
 
 236(11. 157, Od. 79)=.o28 
 
 152 (II. 90, Od. 62 )=.oi8 
 
 80 (II. 53, Od. 27)= .009 
 
 419 (II. 264, Od. 155)= .051 
 
 327 (II. 168, Od. 159)= .039 
 
 10 (II. 7, Od 3)=. 001 J 
 
 34 (II. 28, Od. 6).oo4i 
 
 12 (II. I, Od. ii) = .ooi4 
 
 15 (II. 13, Od. 2)=.ooi8 
 
 10 (II. 6, Od. 4)=. 0012 
 
 q\ Homer has diroxp^ once, 
 
 oiand Siairp6 three times 
 
 o j which are not found in Ap. 
 
 I (P 760). 
 
 Total l!388|39o|4i3!552|i743 
 
 8198(11. 4746. Od. 3452). 
 
 The tendency in quantitative differences between 
 Apollonius and Homer is evident. The prepositions 
 which in Apollonius show an increase are chiefly 
 poetic. They are : oLfi<pi, Std, <rt»v, oitip, uic6^ and the 
 double prepositions dtix^ napix and Mx, Those that 
 go down are prosaic ; viz. : xaTd^ izapd and notably 
 itpo and r/><i9. 
 
 •»r 
 
 — 101 — 
 
 The quantitative differences between Apollonius 
 and Homer in the use of the individual prepositions 
 in case-construction are still further shown in the 
 following table, giving for each preposition the 
 proximate number of lines in which, at an average, 
 it occurs once. 
 
 NUMBER OF LINES IN WHICH PREPOSITION OCCURS ONCE. 
 
 » I 
 
 r 
 
 PREPOSITION. 
 
 IN APOI.I/)NIUS. 
 
 IN HOMER. 
 
 iv 
 
 19.5 
 
 14.7 
 
 iwl 
 
 20. 
 
 24.8 
 
 eh 
 
 35.3 
 
 33.7 
 
 iK 
 
 35.7 
 
 40.3 
 
 inrd 
 
 49. 
 
 74. 
 
 Kard 
 
 66.3 
 
 42.5 
 
 fijerd 
 
 70.3 
 
 72.4 
 
 dT6 
 
 84.5 
 
 74.7 
 
 dn(f>l 
 
 84.5 
 
 123.5 
 
 <ri/v 
 
 89.7 
 
 147.8 
 
 8id 
 
 89.7 
 
 159.8 
 
 vepl 
 
 97.2 
 
 117.8 
 
 dvd 
 
 106. 
 
 182.9 
 
 inr4p 
 
 132.6 
 
 347.5 
 
 wapd 
 
 146. 
 
 66.3 
 
 irpds 
 
 448. 
 
 85. 
 
 dvTl 
 
 1945. 
 
 2780. 
 
 vp6 
 
 2917. 
 
 818. 
 
 8Uk 
 
 278. 
 
 2317. 
 
 W4k 
 
 448. 
 
 1853. 
 
 irapiK 
 
 530. 
 
 2780. 
 
 trp&rap 
 
 2917. 
 
 
 
 trpoirpS 
 
 5835. 
 
 
 
 inro trp6 
 
 5835. 
 
 
 
 Ttpl r' d/Ll0f T€ 
 
 5835. 
 
 27803. 
 
 dvoirph 
 
 
 
 27803. 
 
 SiatrpS 
 
 
 
 9268. 
 
— I02 — 
 
 POSITION. 
 
 In the Indo-European parent-language the prepo- 
 sitions seem to have been pre-positive as well as 
 post-positive. In the Vedas both positions are found. 
 In classical Sanskrit the />(75/- position almost entirely 
 superseded the /reposition, — d and purd being the 
 only prepositions that stand before the case. In the 
 old Persian, on the contrary, the /r<?-position pre- 
 vails. Cf. Delbriick, Vergl. Syn., III., 43-44. 
 
 In Greek poetry the post- position is still frequent. 
 In Homer it is idiomatic and serves often as a metri- 
 cal convenience. In the tragic and lyric writers it is 
 an artificial imitation of the older poetry and is used 
 chiefly for poetic efifect. — In Attic prose only Tzepi is 
 used thus, being either a phraseological survival, or 
 being influenced by £v£z«, whose meaning it shares. 
 Cf. Brugmann, Griech. Gram.^ 433. 
 
 According to Haggett, Homer has 645 examples 
 of the post-position (II. 386, Od. 259), which 
 amounts 107.85% of the whole number of preposi- 
 tions. Of these examples 255 are cases of pure 
 anastrophe, while in 390 instances the preposition is 
 put between the noun and a qualifiying adjective or 
 dependent genitive. Apollonius has 192 cases of 
 post-position, i. e. 8.94% of his whole number of 
 prepositions in case-construction In 1 11 examples 
 the preposition stands immediately after the noun ; 
 in 29 a particle is inserted and in 5 ( I. 9 ; II. 820 ; 
 III. 738 ; IV. 492 ; 1355 ) more important words in- 
 tervene. Apollonius has 47 examples of interposition 
 between noun and adjective. The examples in which 
 tlie preposition is placed between the adjective and 
 
 I 
 
 \ 
 
 / 
 
 \ III 
 
 — 103 — 
 
 the noun, of which Apollonius has 215, and for which 
 interposition Homer also shows a marked fondness, 
 do not belong here. 
 
 The ratio of post-position in Homer after the dif- 
 ferent cases is: gen. 22.2%, dat. 45.4%» ^cc. 32 3%. 
 Apollonius has 57 examples with the genitive, 108 
 with the dative, and only 27 with the accusative, 
 giving the following ratio : gen 29.3%, dat. 56.5%, 
 ace. 14.1%. 
 
 TABI,E SHOWING THE FREQUENCY OF EACH PREPOSITION 
 
 IN POST-POSITION AND THE PERCENTAGE OF ITS TOTAI, 
 
 IN APOI,I.ONIUS AND IN HOMHR. 
 
 APOLLONIUS. 
 
 iv 68=22.9 percent 
 
 ^t/.... 33= II. 3 
 uir6...i3=io.9 
 £Tr«?p..I3=29.5 
 dT6...i2=i7.9 
 
 T€pi.. 12=20. 
 
 iK 10= 6.2 
 
 d/ii0/. 8=12.1 
 
 €i» 7= 4.3 
 
 lurd.. 6= 7.2 
 
 dw£... 2= 3.6 
 «td.... 2= 3.1 
 wapd.. 2= 5-2 
 Kard.. 1= I.I 
 irapiK 1= .9 
 ffi/v..,. 1= 1.5 
 dvrl.,. o 
 wp6.„. o 
 diatrpd o 
 vp6s... o 
 
 It 
 i( 
 
 4« 
 
 (I 
 it 
 (I 
 l< 
 <( 
 t( 
 <( 
 (I 
 I( 
 t ( 
 It 
 
 Total, 191 
 
 HOMFR. 
 
 138 (II 71, Od. 67)=7.3 per cent 
 
 142 (II. 108, Od. 34)=i2.6 
 
 63(11. 45, Od. i8)=i6.8 
 
 10(11.6, Od. 4.)= 12.5 
 
 44(11. 28. Od. i6)=ii.8 
 
 20 (II. II, Od. 9)=«.5 
 38(11. 20, Od. i8)=5-5 
 
 16 (II. 9, Od. 7)=8.i 
 
 48 (II. 20, Od. 28)= 5. 8 
 
 19(11. II, Od. 8)=4-9 
 
 14(11. 8, Od. 6)=9.2 
 
 15 (II. 10, Od. 5)=8.6 
 
 21 (II. 13, Od. 8)=4.9 
 34 (II. 10, Od. 24) = 5.2 
 
 o (cf. vp^K X I46)=6.6 
 
 8 (II. 2 Od. 6)=4.2 
 
 5 (Il-)=5o. 
 
 4(Il.)=i.2 
 
 2 (Il.)=66.6 
 
 3(11. 2, Od. i)=.9i 
 
 t( 
 «t 
 11 
 11 
 11 
 It 
 It 
 <( 
 It 
 II 
 ti 
 ti 
 
 ft 
 
 It 
 
 ti 
 (f 
 ti 
 It 
 It 
 If 
 11 
 (I 
 it 
 t < 
 It 
 It 
 It 
 It 
 It 
 It 
 It 
 t( 
 
 645 (II. 386, Od. 259) 
 
 This table shows that while «/Af '', ^^*'*i ^'^ ^^P^ and 
 vHp gain in Apollonius, 07:6, avd^ dtd, xard and (tov lose. 
 
 By far the most frequent place of the preposition is 
 before the case. Of the whole number of prepositions 
 
■\ 
 
 — 104 — 
 
 (1743), Apollonius has 1551 before the case ; 1125 
 are examples without any insertion whatever between 
 the preposition and the noun; in 87 instances the 
 preposition is separated from its case by particles 
 ( jiiv, Si, ri, yap) or by enclitics (/x«e', ixi^ etc.); in 215 
 passages the preposition is placed after a qualifying 
 adjective but before the noun. Homer has 600 ex- 
 amples of this inter-position. Apollonius separated 
 the preposition from its case by an attributive genitive 
 or by some other important word ( usually a verb ) 
 in 102 instances. Here, however, the separation of 
 the preposition from its noun is not so noticeable be- 
 cause generally an adjective, in the same case as the 
 noun precedes the preposition ; cf . I. 549 ; II. 90, 
 406. 550, 824, 1038; III. 683, 880,918, 1353. etc! 
 Only rarely is the order of words : preposition, inde- 
 pendent words of importance, case ; cf. I. 830. 1315 ; 
 II. 1 1 15; IV. 1642, 1734. For the rhetorical inter- 
 position of the object in oaths or entreaties (like 
 Latin per te deos oro ) compare III. 984 Ttp6<i a' aur^y 
 '£jtdTTjy iisdiaffojim ijde Toxijuiv | xai Jtoy ; IV. 385 ix Si 
 ffs Ttdrprj^ I aurix* ifxat tr* iXdffscav *£p(woe^. 
 
 When several nouns in the same construction are 
 governed by a preposition, that preposition may be 
 used only with one, as: I. 222. 308, 329, 701. 1056, 
 1 178; II. 188, 402, 637, 666, 102 1, 1086; III. 41, 
 198, 560. 578, 701, 744, 757,881,984. "47, 1381! 
 1393 ; IV. 44, 172, 272, 550, 631, 730, 787, 793, 
 974» 1 192 ; or it may be repeated with each, as: L 
 536-537, 818-809; II. 333-334, 365-366, 826-827, 
 998: IV. 331-332. 364-365, 681. Similar examples 
 in Homer are of frequent occurrence. 
 
 — 105 
 
 II 
 
 I. PREPOSITIONS WITH ONE CASE 
 
 A. WITH THE GKNITIVE. 
 — dvri — 
 
 The preposition avri (Sanskrit dnti\ Latin 
 ante) is an old locative case, ^'in the presence 
 •of, "opposite". These primary meanings are 
 found in the Inscriptions, e. g. avri fiatrvpov 
 "in the presence of the witnesses" (Law of 
 Gortyn). Cf Delbrueck, Vergl. Syn., Vol. I. 
 Sec. 290. In the literature this construction 
 disappears, except for the example cited by 
 Joost, Xen. Ana. IV. 7, 6 dv^" oiv hryjxoreg.— 
 In epic poetry the adverbs dvriov, ivavriov, 
 avra, iadvra, dm^iyjv, and in prose ivavriov 
 have replaced dvri in its local sense, while avri 
 itself assumes the metaphoric meanings 
 "instead of, "in place of, "in return for", 
 " in exchange for", etc. 
 
 The examples in Apollonius mean "instead 
 of and fall within the line of Homeric usage: 
 II. 448 dvrl Se rod ^dvarov fioi a<j!)ap ^edg 
 iyyvaTiL^ar, II. 851 ol 5' dvri ^€ov8eog AioXcSao \ 
 "ISfiovog €iaeri vvv ^Ayafii^aropa xvSaivovaiv; IV. 
 30 avr' ifie^ev ravaov nXoxov dfii x^^tovaa. 
 Cf. i; 307, etc. 
 
— io6 
 
 1 
 
 
 ~d7t6 — 
 
 In the Homeric poems ano (Sanskrit dpa^ 
 Latin ab) is chiefly used with the ablatival geni- 
 tive to denote "away from", "at a distance." It 
 never is equivalent to imo with passive verbs 
 (cf. Kuehner-Gerth, Sec. 430) , nor does it express 
 time with the exception of © 54 ano 5' avrov 
 {heinvov] ^opjjaaoi'ro; cf. La Roche ibid.— The 
 range of metaphoric uses also is not so large as 
 in the post-Homeric literature. 
 
 In ApoUonius the temporal use and the 
 use with passive verbs are wanting; while the 
 examples used in a metaphoric sense remain 
 within ths lines of Homeric usage. 
 
 I. IN A LOCAL SENSE. 
 
 tf) With verbs of motion. 
 
 (a) From a place:— 'Ay ftpo: HI. 356 d^)' 
 •EXXd5o$ S^'U.oi ays^^Bv, Cf. P 222. 
 
 'AidtTw: 1.989 oLTt! ovpsog di^aiteg', II. 1261 
 an ovpeog aiaaovra. Cf. N 65; x 99. 
 
 'AvaxoL^o^ai: HI. 1037 d^' oino nvpxaiyjg 
 avaxd^eo, Cf. H 819, * 158. 
 
 'AvE^X^Hai: IV. 1775 an' AlyivYj^ev dvep- 
 XOfihoiaiv. Cf. fl 492, t 38. 
 
 Baivio: IV. 114 ano vrjog s^^aav; IV. 885 
 ^alvov.,.dn6 x^vog. Cf. K 336, P 112, <P 529. 
 
 
 
 - 107 — 
 
 Ba/l/lo): IV. 901 and vriog . . . nELOfiar' . . . 
 (SaXia^at. Cf. H 793, X. 468. 
 
 El^i: HI. 534 and fjteydpoio . . . iovreg; IV. 
 1581 dyxidvog . . . dno npovxovTog iovaiv, Cf. 
 I 38, T 175 etc. 
 
 ©pGKTXG): IV. 768 ^Iptg dn' OvXvfinoio ^opovoa, 
 Cf. A 532; 4^ 32. 
 
 "Iyj^l: III. 587 an' ovpavov dyyeXov yjxev; 
 IV. 80 n68ag yixev dn' ixpio^iv. Cf. M 205; 3^ 189. 
 
 'IxvEo^ai: II. 1143 d<p' 'EXXdhog . . Ixea^at, 
 Cf. r 233 A 306. 
 
 Kuy, I. 77 dn' EvfSoiyjg Kdv^og xle. IV. 752 
 drto ^eydpoLo xiovrag. Cf. P 113; n 156. 
 
 *Opvv[iaL HI. 48 dno ^povov wpro; HI. 439 
 dno ^povov 6pi^i;T' 'Irjcov. Cf. E. 13, A 645, 
 H 635, n 515. 
 
 'Opovo: IV. 1243 dno vyjog opovaav. Cf. 
 N 505, H 615. 
 
 *Pf(j: HI. 760 5d;cpi; S' dn' 6(p^aX(i(dv .... 
 I)e€v; HI. 1352 d<^p6g dno orof-iarog x^^^dhig pes; 
 IV. 1529 dno xpoog sppee Uxvyi. Cf. A 249, 
 H 170, * 385. 
 
 Ti^yj^t: IV. 1390 and ori^apoiv ^eaav &fXG)v, 
 Cf.^276, <?) 118, etc. 
 
 4>ipG): I. 535 yacYig dno itarpihog ofifiar 
 Iveixev, Cf. B 838, M. 96; x 48. 
 
 4>opio^at: I. 1278 rijXe 5' an' dxr^g . . . 
 ^opeovro. Cf. P 301, 2 256. 
 
I 
 
 — io8 — 
 
 Xfo: I. 1067 ano /?ylf<^dpor oaa ^dacpixi 
 XBvav. Cf. * 385, h 114. 
 
 Homer has no close parallels for I. 125 
 ai^ ^Afxahing . . . d^6t4^a$ tyiv ohov, 1. 1107 ano 
 ara^fi(^v iXdaavtEg, Homer has ix in H 87, 
 293. — ^11. 1216 ttTtd xparog ard^at ^6vov; IH. 
 375 ofxapryiaavreg dip' 'E/l/ld&)g; IV. 1647 and 
 XBp<yov I v^a . . . dvaxpoveaxov. This last verb 
 is post-Homeric. 
 
 (/3) From persons: — ^I. 821 di^ drfp;{;®|tifroi;$ 
 ©pvixov dno, Cf. A 556. HI. 965 noLaai dno 
 a^eicdv ikiaa^ev. 
 
 b) With vfrbs of separation. 
 
 ^Asipcd: HI. 1366 yaiyjg aTto; similarly III. 
 1395. Cf. T 325; ^ 375. 
 
 Alvvfiai: IV. 162 aTto Spvog alvvro xikLg. 
 Cf. A 580, N 550, <& 490, etc. 
 
 'ApTtd^cj: II. 188 aro^arog ;tf ipov r' dno . . . 
 %na^ov. Cf. N. 527. 
 
 Elpyu: IV. 1206 XitiEvuv yairig t' aTto 
 ryfXo^L vYiag kkpysiv, 
 
 Ai5(i): II. 538 yaiYig t' aito hL7tk6a netafiar* 
 eXvaav; H. 1042 aTto a^erepov xoXsolo kvad^evog 
 rcTjafiuiva, Cf. H 214, P 318; v 77. 
 
 ^Vriyvvin: IV. 1636 dno ari^apov axo7ti?j)io 
 pYiyvvfiBvog nerpag. Cf. H 587. 
 
 2«6): IV. 1365 aeiadfiBvog yvluv &no . . 
 alfiriv. Cf. N 135; h. Merc. 20. 
 
 •* 
 
 s 
 
 — 109 — 
 
 'fl3f6): IV. 104 dno ;^^7/6$ scdOav vyja. Cf. 
 E 19, 835, A 143, 320, T 489. 
 
 Under this category belong two examples 
 
 in which the genitive denotes a part from the 
 
 whole I 691 xrepeuv ano ^olpav IXovaav, II. 
 
 454 ^opeovTBg i^g dno [lolpav i^ci^yjg, Cf 2 327; 
 
 s 40, V 138. 
 
 The separation is figurative in I. 815 dno 
 
 fii^rpog I Xu^Yjv . . . nal^eg afivvov. Cf. N 440; 
 
 /3 59, p 538. — III. 1014 dno aryj^ioiv dpvaaaa 
 
 '^l^v^i^v. Cf. Hes. Op. 550 dpvaad^evog noTaiidv 
 
 dno, A similar example in Homer is A 598. 
 
 Other examples in Apollonius are: IV. 109,926, 
 
 1303. With IV. 926 compare x ^16. 
 
 c) To denote the direction from which light and sound 
 
 proceed, 
 
 I. 437 ?ji(in6iievov ^veiov aTto; I. 1231 dn 
 ai^Bpog avyd^ovaa; III. 1016 dno ^av^olo 
 xapYiatog .... arpdni:ev ''Epog ^T^oya (figur.); 
 IV. 1144 otTio xpvamv ^vadvGiV dfiapvaaeTo 
 ^eyyog. Cf M 70, N 243, 2 214; t 63, 4^ 43; 
 also h. Merc. 278, etc. Similarly is IV. 724 
 dn' ovSeog dace ^aT^vaav, i. e. looking from the 
 threshold. 
 
 d) To denote the extent from a position, 
 
 I. 945 r,Epk%ovi:ai , , , dno ari(3apuv 6ficiVy 
 cf. B 448. — IV. 1400 aTto xparog Si xeXaiVYiv 
 axptg in axvy^anv xelr' anvoog, Cf. 16, 213; 
 ^ 294. 
 
— I lO - - 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 
 e) To denote position away from, apart from. 
 I. 60 olog 6j{ oXkioiv . . . apt(TT>7(i)i'. In this 
 example, as also in HI. 907=912 trdpcjj/ ano 
 ^ovvQv.ih^ prepositional phrase is redundant. 
 For examples without the preposition compare 
 I. 1240; IV. 910. Cf. Vogrinz, Gram. d. hom. 
 Dial., p. 210. A better example of position is 
 I. 937 TvrSor (XTto ^^vyiriq noXv^Yjiov r^neipoio \ 
 eig aXa xexKifievyj Iv^aog]. Cf. h. Ap. 24. Here 
 belong IL 253 and ^vfiov and 11. 865 an' iXniSog 
 where in place of a local position we have a 
 mental attitude. Cf. A 562; similarly K 324; 
 7l 344. Soph. El. 1127. 
 
 a. 
 
 IN A METAPHORIC SENSE. 
 
 a) To denote the origin or descent. 
 I 231=11. 359 tt<^' alfiarog €vj(^€r6Dvro 
 6[i(itvaL; III. 920 dtp' alfiarog ifiXdaryjaav. Cf. 
 f 18, T 163 (Ameis); h. Cer. 213. 
 
 6) To denote the source. 
 Here belongs one example of the person 
 after whom something is named: I. 625. 
 XiKivov am; cf. h. Ap. 396; Herod. VII. 74. 
 Also one example after a verb of hearing a 
 thing fi-om some one: I. 766 iknofievog . . . nv' 
 and G^eiuv iaaxovaai (3d^iv; cf. ^ 12, (i 187. 
 Another example of the source is IV. 1186 
 ^viov 5' ajto ryiTio^L xYixie Xiyvvg. 
 
 — Ill — 
 
 3 
 
 ex 
 
 Closely allied in meaning with dno is ix. 
 Of the two prepositions ex has the larger 
 variety of usages, most of which coincide in 
 poetry and in prose. Chiefly poetic and Ionic 
 is ex as a substitute for hno to denote the 
 agent. For examples of this use in Herodotus, 
 compare Lundberg, p. 13. — Poetic is also the 
 use of ex as equivalent to Ttapd with the person 
 in the singular. As ex and dno are often used 
 synonymously, we find occasionally ex in 
 ApoUonius, where Homer has dno and vice- 
 versa. On the whole, the correspondence in 
 the two authors is remarkably close. The 
 form ex is used before a consonant and e^ before 
 a vowel. The different uses may be classified 
 as follows: 
 
 1. LOCAL. 
 
 a) Of motion from a place, 
 
 (a) From countries, cities and other 
 geographical divisions, such as mountains, seas, 
 rivers, etc.:— II. 611 hi, 'Mihao ais^eci^ai. IL 1096 
 %i Mrig eveovro] similarly II. 424; III. 1060.— 
 II. 1167 'EX/ldSog e^ avrijg veofi, I. 69 e^ 
 'Onoevrog opasr. Cf. A 269, B 557, 863, E 645, 
 Z 529, H. 363, 467, I 253, 439, A 625, N 793, 
 P 350; /3 326, S 633, o 42, etc.— I. 207 ix i' 
 
 f 
 
— 112 — 
 
 1^ 
 
 apa 4>Qx>76>v xiev *l^irog. Cf. B 852, K 356, 
 537; € 282.— II. 390 f$ kUg ehiv; similarly IV. 
 779, 992, 1363.— IV. 885 ix 8e (3v^olo svvaiag 
 Eikxov, IV. 628 yaLYi<; ix fivxdryig„A7iopvvix€vog, 
 
 I. 385 <Jrv(p€Xi^av...v€i6^ev i^ Upyjg, II. 1086 
 iq^iyjxe xakaX,a,v ix vsipeoiv; similarly III. 1266. 
 — ^I. 553 i^ vnaTov opeog xiev; similarly I. 1100; 
 n. 978.— IV. 380 ix Si as Ttdrpyjg . . . iXixjEcav 
 "Epivveg. III. 213 ix neSioLO . . . Ixovro; similarly 
 III. 473, 1364. — 1. 1281 7^6g\ix nepdrv^g dvioikja; 
 
 II. 165 rii^iog , . , \ ix nspdridv dvi6v. I. 894 
 Xaoj^ dyeipaig \ a:iXuv ix noXiijv; HI. 1236 ix Si 
 nokriog ri^aaev. IV. 1267 ix Ttovroto.Jxofiiaasv, 
 I. 1160 [a^pat] al viov ix norafii^v vno SeisXov 
 riepi^vTat. III. 569 ini x^ovog ix norafiolo . . . 
 neidfiar' dvd\lofi6v. IV. 198 itovrovS' Ifiev ix 
 Ttorafiolo. II. 914 noXv^apoiog ix neU^oio \ d'^ 
 dvi6v, I. 986 ix h" dpa roiye \ v^a Xvrov Tiifiivog 
 nporepov i^riXaaav op^iov. For Homer compare 
 r 49, 505, I 330, 544, N 17, II 392, 408, P 
 743, S 207, * 35, 274, n 663; € 422, 446, 469, 
 n 25, I 41, X 72, 175, n 18, etc. For the 
 repetition of the preposition after the com- 
 pound verb in I. 986 compare B 690, Z 42, H 
 337, 436, tp 394. 5 37^ ^ 106, x 376, etc.— 
 Examples of smaller localities are I. 1148 
 [vSup] dvi^paxB Sv^dhog , , . ix xopv^g, IV. 
 1135 fpipev ix nvp6g, I. 1109 Tivad^svoi *Ifp% 
 
 *=^ 
 
 V 
 
 — 113 — 
 
 ix neiafiara nirprig, 11. 166 Xvad^evoL vedrrig 
 
 ix neicfiara Sd^vy^g, II. 827 ix Sovdxuv dvsTtr 
 
 dX^evog, IV. 924 dnenrvev ai^ofiivy^ ^U^ \ 
 
 dxpc^v ix axonelcov. II. 356 ix fieydXyig npoxodg 
 
 Im ^dpayyog. IV. 632 ix S' dpa rolo \ rcfivag 
 
 eioeXaaav. Quasi-local are II. 303 rd t [^ri'hx'] 
 
 l£ 'Afivxoio Xey^Xaaiyjg ixofiiaaav, and 11. 224 ex 
 
 no^ev d^pdaroLo xaraiaaovaat 6:^8^pov. Cf N 
 
 28, T 137, * 243; ^ 128, p 210, r 445, v 21, etc. 
 
 (iS) From buildings, parts of buildings, 
 
 ships and the like:— 1. 306 S6fio>v JJ ^pro viea^ai; 
 
 similarly I. 1212; II. 816; IV. 708.— III. 249 
 
 ix ^aXdfiov MXafiovSe . . . fienovaap; similarly 
 
 III. 671, 739.— II. 468 rov S' ix fieydpoco xtdprog- 
 
 similarly III. 285, 442; IV. 743, 876, 1119^ 
 
 1220.— I. 804 ix Si (leM^pov | . . . dneaaevopro 
 
 yvpalxag, I. 640 ix vyjdg dpiaryjsg npoeyjxav I 
 
 Ai^aXiSyjp; similarly III. 316, 1199; IV. 659. 
 
 I. 307 ix pyjolo . . . ehtp. IV. 673 r^vre fi^?xi \ ix 
 ara^fi^p . . . ehip, I. 976 ryjp f.iip viov i^ en 
 narpog | . . . dpriyayep 'Vhom he led even 
 recently from her father's." For Homer com- 
 pare r 142, Z 377, 507, A 227, X 472; a 441, 
 /3 5, y 441, S 300, 310, ri 339, 3 257, l 548, x 5l' 
 V 116, 19, p 455, a 198, t 60, etc. 
 
 (y) From parts of the body:— IV. 1308 
 «t' ix narpog xe^Xyjg ^dps ['A^^j.>7]. II. 666 
 lSp6g I ell3erai ix :{ay6va)v re xai avx^vog, IV. 
 
i^ 
 
 — 114 — 
 
 704 (la^oi I nXT^fifivpov Tioxiyjg €x vrjivog, II. 50 
 arri^ec^v i^ al^a xehdaaai; similarly II. 207; III. 
 289; IV. 901.— III. 1303 <pUya ^voioGivreg \ ex 
 aro^idrcdv. Homeric examples are: T 221, A 
 109, 140, E 110, 582, 657, K 10, 15, A 398, N 
 529, etc.; also h. Ap. 131. 
 
 (5) In such phrases as "rising from the 
 couch", "drawing the sword from the scabbard", 
 "drinking out of a cup". I. 1105 cdpvvro 5' 
 f£ Evv^g; similarly II. 431, 1239; IV. 871, 1110. 
 III. 1380 ix xoXeolo ^ipev ^iq>og; similarly IV. 
 207, 1054.— III. 1035 lei(3a>v ix Unaoq. Cf A 
 534, H 336, T 62, X 190; /3 2, 5 730, e 1, x 23, 
 4 349, etc.;— A 194, M 190;— I 469. 
 
 (f) Here belong two examples of ix with 
 the person in the singular. This use corre- 
 sponds to ei$ with the person in the singular. 
 A typical example is II. 277 or' ig ^iviia xai 
 ix <pLv^og m€v. In III. 721 ix xelvolo {^Irjaovog] 
 5' ixdvsi I ''Apyog, the preposition might also 
 denote the agent. A Homeric example seems 
 
 to be * 217. 
 
 B) Of implied motion. 
 
 II. 700 ix hk vv navTi^v \ . ,.(iYjpia . . . | xalov. 
 II. 1171 ix vYiog texl a^tOiv elfiara Svmt. 
 With a verbal noun IV. 255 nloov . . . | i^ Alyjg 
 iaaea^L, Of the direction from which a 
 sound comes: III. 1212 aiovaa \ xev^iiCSv Jg 
 
 «?< 
 
 ♦ 
 
 
 — 115 — 
 
 vTtdrov, Also of a native place: III. 704 elyiv 
 i^ 'AibEQ . . . 'Eptvvg. IV. 1149 at 5' laav ix 
 nefHuv dlayjiSeg. For examples from Homer 
 compare: B 625, * 154; a 417, 267, n 247, 
 p 455, etc. 
 
 c) Of the position from which the operation takes place, 
 I. 801 7tep3f(Txo2^ inavkovg \ ix vyjCSv. Cf. 
 2 210 and La Roche ibid. I. 1115 ix 5' irspyjg.,. 
 [^aivero], i. e. "on the other side appeared." 
 I. 1361 dxTYiv ix x6?i7toio . . . iGiSh^ai. Cf A 
 275; 8 524.— II. 402 'Afzapavr^v \ rrjU^ev i^ 
 opicdv nshioio re Kipxaioio \ <J?aGig . . . elg aXa 
 l3dX^ei, Cf e 283.— II. 1107 oi U nvi darpa . . . 
 fpaiver' ISea^at \ ix ve^ii^v. Cf E 864, A 62. 
 d) Of the direction with verbs of looking, 
 III. 745 ehpaxov ix VYiibv. IV. 568 ix 
 novroLO . . . | Sepxo^ievot Kepxvpav, IV. 898 eiopfiov 
 hehoxYi^evai ix TtepicdTf^g. Cf A 337, H 154; 
 also T 375, 11 715, etc. 
 
 e) Of the extent or measurement from a point, 
 I. 222 xpdarog i^ vrdroLO xai avxevog . . | 
 hoveovro , . . e^Eipai, I. 743 ix.., oifiov \... ^vvoxri 
 xexd:{aaTo. 1. 1310—1313 rolatv Se rXavxog . . . 
 a?i6g i^etpadv^Yi | . . . | iJ^.^ Se T^axvriev re xdpyj 
 xai aryj^e' deipag \ veio^ev ix 'kayovidv, II. 736 
 ex h" avTyjg [dxpyjg] . . . xaraxexlirai Yinsipovhe. 
 III. 1271 ooGov r' ix ^al^lhog . . . vvaaa \ yiyverar, 
 cf 16 oaov ovpavdg iar dm yaiYig, IV. 180 
 
— ii6 — 
 
 [Xpvaeov aurov] 2xil(^ emEi^evog iSfio) \ aix^voq 
 If vnaroLO nohyivexk^. IV. 1346 s^oa^EvaL i^ 
 vndroio I ai';^ero$. IV. 1608 Sei^ag 8e ol si 
 vTtdroLO I xpdarog . . . ear ini vrj^vv | . . . ^axdpeaac 
 ,,Mxro, Cf. H 177, n 640, 2 353, X 397, etc. 
 
 a. TEMPORAL. 
 
 I. 861 d^^oT.iYi K Eig Yjixap del s^ Yiiiarog yiev \ 
 vavraiyjg III. 1340 i^ iovg, IV. 1772 eig Irog 
 ic iTfog.— II. 911 8^ ov. III. 302 ex Se rod. 
 IV. 431 if In xeivov, \ e^ ok A 6, 493, 295, 
 I 106, H 86; a 188, /3 27, 90, ^ 245, ete. 
 
 3. METAPHORIC. 
 
 a) Of a preference or discrimination. 
 
 I. 620 oiy\ ^' ex naCEidv yEpapov TtEpifdtfaro 
 narpog \ 'T^inv'kELa. 11. 1150 rov (iev [xpiov] . . . 
 IppE^Ev ... 1 4>i;f 16) ex ndvruiv . . . Aa'. I. 1352 pvaC 
 oTtaaaav , . . dplarovg \ vleag ex hri^oio. Cf. A 96, 
 680, 2 431, etc. 
 
 b) Of the source or origin. 
 
 (a) When the source is a person: — I. 283 
 TO yap oLov Iyjv en ^oinov eeXSidp \ ex ae^ev. I. 
 1071 ex Aiog Yiiiap enriXv^Ev; similarly II. 196 
 ^hfparov ex Aiog yiev\ II. 527 ex Aiog oiJpai; II. 
 995 ex Aio^Ev nvoial . . . | yiIv'^ov, II. 1122 to he 
 (ivfiov ex Aiog vhup \ l^^ev. IV. 446 ex oe^ev 
 ovXofiEPai r Ipi^Eg. IV. 1082 evlaxero if e^ev 
 opxoig. Here belong the examples of learning 
 or hearing a thing from a person: III. 182 Jf 
 
 t yt 
 
 ■V^ 
 
 'r 
 
 V 
 
 — II7-- 
 
 avrolo . . . huEvreg. III. 677 ihdYjg ex narpog 
 eviTLriv. III. 903 Eiaaiovaai \ if EfiE^av Note- 
 worthy is the example of naming a place after 
 some one: IV. 1762 diuEL^aro 5' ovvo^ta Q)7p>7$ | 
 if e^Ev. For Homeric parallels compare: A 63, 
 525, B 197, e 140, 251, K 68, H 19; a 283, [i 
 136, 374, p 518, etc.; also h. Merc. 477; Xen. 
 Ana. II. 6, 17. 
 
 {(i) When the source is a thing: — III. 294 
 [Ttrp] a^ka^arov if oXiyoio \ haXov dvEyp6[.i£vov. 
 
 III. 498 86aELV 6' if o^iog yevvcdv onopov; 
 similarly III. 1027. — III. 1347 ex nora^olo 
 podidv I . . . d(pvaodfjEvog. IV. 157 ^dnrova ex 
 xvxEidvog. IV. 674 nporEpyjg if i?.vog e(i?ydarYiaEv, 
 
 IV. 1426 ex Se vv XEivcdP \ bEvSpEiJV . . . e^E<pavEv. 
 IV. 1446 pcdydhog ex TtErpyjg niEV. IV. 1734 ex 
 he yvvYi ^6Xolo nE?LELv. — Here belong three 
 other examples denoting the origin: II. 931 ex 
 rov he Avpyj tieXel ovvofia x^P^- I^- 1079 xTiayyifj 
 8'fiov tieXel if 6(xd8oLO. III. 1301 Secvog 5' if 
 avrov neTiErat j3p6^og. Cf. x 350, etc. 
 
 c) Of the material out of which something is made. 
 II. 845 vriiog ex xorivoio <^d/layf. III. 1324 
 rvxrYiv if dhd\iavrog em^vvEGXEv ex^r^Yjv. Cf. 
 
 X 152. 
 
 d) Of the progenitor. 
 
 II. 1153 TG)v if dfi^orEpov sifih yhog. III. 
 919 if atToIo Atog yhog. Cf. E 544, H 113, 
 <I> 157, * 347; v 192, etc. 
 
if 
 
 — i[8 — 
 
 e) Of the agent, 
 .901 Ttarra yBvomo \ €;c jwaxapor; gumi^fiy 
 II. 608 /.lopaiuov yjev \ fx (laxdficdv. I. 1098 ix 
 yap Tvig [Tfa^] aveuoi . . | . neneipyiraL, 11. 426 
 ix ydp T37$ [Ki;7tp(f5o$] xXvrd Tielpara xelrai 
 de^Xuv, II. 798 8^ o^eui' ehoaav riaiv. III. 
 431 [dvdyxYj] yj i^is xai h^^d^e vela^ai ijiex^pasv 
 ix (iaail^og, which the scholiast exphiins by 
 d^iyfie^a npog ae (iiao^evreg vno rov (iaaikkdg. 
 Cf. B 33, 70, 669, E 384, P 101, etc. 
 
 /) Of the cause: ^Hn consequence of ^' ' ^ on account of ^\ 
 
 I. 498 veixeog i^ okoolo Siexpi^sv. I. 520 ix 5' 
 
 dve^ioio I eifiioi ixXv^ovro nvaaGOfiivyig aXog dxpai; 
 
 similarly 11. 1248; III. 345; IV. 215, 607.— 
 
 I. 1073 i^ dx8(>iv epyoio,..e^v6ovro. II. 432 ix 
 
 xa^droio | ao^^^ dvatpvatocov. III. &27 ix S" apa 
 
 rov velxog neXev, lY. 613 ?u7iciv ix narpog 
 
 ivmijg. IV. 1725 ix be vv xeivrig \ ^oXn^g . . . 
 
 yvvdixeg | avSpdai byipmavrai. Cf. H 111, I 566, 
 
 A 308; y 135, S 343, ^ 29, o 197, w 388, etc. 
 
 g) Of conformity' ^^ according toy 
 
 III. 1006 ix [lop^ng, Cf K 68. 
 
 Metaphoric are also III. 616 xovpriv ^' i^ 
 dx^c^v dSivog xareXutpeev vnpog "refreshing sleep 
 gave the maiden rest from her anxieties*'. 
 Homer uses the simple genitive in l 460 xdS 5e 
 jc' ifiov xijp Xcd^i^aeie xaxc^v. II. 828 Ix . . . 
 d^pdaroio '* unexpectedly"; cf. and anovSyjg 
 "earnestly" H 359, M 233. 
 
 1. 
 
 '!#» 
 
 
 4 
 
 'i> 
 
 — 119 — 
 
 TtpO 
 
 The primary meaning of npo ( Sanskrit pri, 
 Latin pro) is "forward", "in advance of", 
 "before". Homer uses it chiefly in the local 
 sense. In Apollonius Ttpo is used in case- 
 construction only twice, and in both passages 
 it is local. I. 781 Ttpo noXyjog II. 811 Ttpo dcreog, 
 Cf. 351, T 292, X 110, fl 783; x 105, u 468. 
 
 It is not surprising that Apollonius avoided 
 the temporal Ttpo (K 224, A 50=8 469. o 524, 
 p 476), because this usage had become prosaic. 
 Cf. Lutz, p. 60; also Sobolewski, p. 105. That 
 he did not use Ttpo in its metaphoric sense of 
 hnip or 7t8pL "in behalf of" (A 156, 373, 57) 
 may be accounted for by the very small per- 
 centage which Ttpo holds among the prepo- 
 sitions in Apollonius. 
 
 In the sense of Ttpo (local) , Apollonius used 
 three double prepositions, none of which are 
 
 found in Homer. 
 
 a) TtpoTtap. 
 I. 454 TtoTiLOv npoTtap alyiaTiOlo; IV. 1286 
 bo^LXov TtpoTtap aiyia^lo. Cf. Hes. Th. 518; 
 Eurip. Phoen. 120. 
 
 (3) Ttponpo. 
 III. 453 TtpoTtpo 5' dp 6<p^a?i(i(^v en ol 
 (VSaX/lfTo ndvra. 
 
 y) VTtOTtpO. 
 IV. 178 (jTtOTtpO TtoSoV. 
 
— I20 
 
 VTIEX 
 
 This compound preposition means ^^from 
 beneath", ''away from under'*, and is almost 
 exclusively used in a local sense. There is no 
 notable divergence in Apollonius from the 
 Homeric usage. 
 
 1. OF PLACE- 
 
 I 745 ^vvo'^Yi x8^d?.aaro j(^iridvog \ vep^ev 
 vnex f.ia^olo. I. 913 Xvaev vnex nerpyig, I. 1166 
 rvr^ov vnex ^pvyirig Ttape^fTpfor. I. 1204 
 vnex nporovuv ipvoyirai, II. 670 vne^ aXog 
 elXxov iper^d. IV. 931 SeX^lveg vne^ a>.6g . | . . 
 iXioacdVTai. III. 575 rvr^ov vnex eXeog x^P^¥ 
 inixeXoav, III. 1182 vnex yevvuv sXdaaaa, 
 
 III. 1318 vnex nifog ... | ;ta^6(T3>7J^. IV. 1657 Inex 
 ^eXeoiv ipvaavro. Cf. A 465, 504, S 232, ete. 
 
 2. OF PERSON. 
 
 IV. 949 aX^yj vne^ dTiXYjg ^e^erai [afpdipav]. 
 
 IV. 1222 ^Xv^e 5' oipog | . . . vnex Aiog. Cf. P 
 581, 589; X 37. 
 
 3. METAPHORIC. 
 
 III. 608 vnex xaxoTyjrog aXv^vj, Cf. vnex 
 xaxov in N 89, 700, T 300; f£ 107. 
 
 ♦ ' 
 
 121 
 
 I:' 
 
 w 
 
 B. WITH THE DATIVE. 
 
 iv 
 
 Form: — The preposition iv was probably 
 at one time a locative case without suffix, — ivi 
 being the form with suffix. To iv and ivl 
 correspond eiv and eivi, which seem to be 
 metrical lengthenings of the former. The 
 numerical relation of these forms in case-con- 
 struction in Apollonius as compared with 
 Homer is as follows: 
 
 
 ivl 
 
 ip 
 
 €lv 
 
 elvi 
 
 Apol. 
 Horn. 
 
 157 
 6oi 
 
 133 
 1251 
 
 8 
 36 
 
 
 5 
 
 These figures show a special fondness on the 
 part of Apollonius for ivi, while he avoided elvi 
 altogether. 
 
 Meaning: — iv denotes primarily rest in a 
 place. Hence in sense as well as in case- 
 construction, it stands between ix and eig. 
 Besides a) the radical sense "in", iv has the 
 following local meanings: 
 
 b) "among", with the plural of persons. 
 
 c) "on", of superposition. 
 
 d) "into" or "upon" with verbs of motion 
 (constructio praegnans). Closely connected 
 with these local uses is the quasi-instrumental 
 use in such phrases as ivi ;f fpciv bovpara vid^iYi- 
 
i 
 
 — 122 — 
 
 aavrsg; celov S" fV;^fta$ ^^ 7ta?Mirtaiv or iv 
 ofp^Ti^olat i^ovrsg. The examples in which iv 
 is used metaphorically are rare in epic poetry, 
 and denote chiefly the occasion, the condition 
 or state. Likewise the temporal use of ev is 
 little represented in the epic literature. 
 
 I. LOCAL. 
 
 WITH VERBS OF REST TO DENOTE: 
 
 a) The place in which something is or happens. 
 (a) With proper names of countries, 
 islands or cities: — IV. 425 Ai>j h dfi^idTiO) . . . 
 xd^ov; IV. 434 Airi evi xdXXine ri^ao). III. 1177 
 ov 'D.yvyiYi svi (dri^ri | . . . nepvev. II. 522 iv 
 ie Keo xarevdoaaro. IV. 1687 KpriZYi evi hi] 
 xvE^g Yjvli^oi^o. IV. 614 rov iv TuTtapii 
 Aaxepei'^ \,„erixrev. I. 83 Ai^vyi hi Tap;|^i;(JarTo; 
 IV. 1483 Ai[3vYi hi.,. sXovro. I. 770 MatmXo) 
 iv . . . iyyvdii^ev. I. 536-537 &ar' u^eoi 
 *ot/3ct) x^9^^ ^ ^^^ Yiv'^ol I Yi nov iv 'Oprvyixi . • . 
 aryjcdfieioi. I. 1305 T>7i'6) iv dfx^ipvrYi nepvev. 
 I. 94 liYiXeix; hi ^^ri hi h^^ata vals Tiiaa^eig; 
 cf. A 155 iv 4>3t'p, h 555 'I^dxij hi olxia vaiav: 
 Find. Pyth. III. 101, and scliol. to Nem. V. 25 
 TlviXevg i' iv ^^lyi ipi^6?jixL vale Xiaa^eig, 
 Hence there is no need for construing hi with 
 vaU, as Gerhard and Wellauer have done for 
 the reason that the caesura of the verse falls 
 between case and preposition. The Bucolic 
 
 i-r 
 
 
 I 
 
 — 123 — 
 
 Diaeresis satisfies the requirements of the meter, 
 so that there is no cause for changing the read- 
 ing of the Manuscripts he to ivL These 
 remarks apply equally as well to IV. 1687. — 
 I. 45 4>i;Xdxv? hi byjpdv s^.einro. For examples 
 from Homer compare B 766, V 244, N 453; a 
 395, h 556, e 123, ^ 80, X 325, v 260, etc. 
 
 Q3) With appellatives signifying the great 
 divisions of the world and other localities: — 
 I. 128 ivl 7ip6rYiai Mvxy;vai(jiv dyopioiv | . . . 
 dne^T^xaro: similarly I. 673 aryj h' dp ivi ^eaari 
 dyopfi (assembly). A mixed example is II. 
 1021-1024, describing the perverted customs 
 of the Mossynoeci on the Pontus, oaaa fiev 
 d[i<pahiYi pe^eiv ^e/xigy yi ivl Syi(i% \ n dyop^j rdhe 
 ndvta bofioig hi ^lYi'^avouivrai \ oaaa 5' ivi 
 fieydpoig 7t€7tovi^[iE^a, xeiva S^vpa^e | d^eyecdg 
 fjieaariaiv ivi ^e^ovaiv dyvialg. — I. 499 iv al^epi 
 rexfiap expvaiv. I. 831 Aiyairi oaai \^v^aoi] elv 
 aTii vaisrdjovaiv, similarly III. 1293; IV. 562, 
 588, 790, 981, 1635.— IV. 1713 dlaei hi crxttpw 
 re(ievog . . . \7t0ie0v. III. 114 evpe hi rovy^ . . . 
 ^Xep^ iv dTiOYi. II. 910 w iv [drrpo] ...ayiag 
 evvd^ero vvxrag; similarly III. 134; IV. 1129, 
 1137. — I. 126 ivi ^Yioarig \ ipep^ero Aaimeiyjg. 
 III. 1031 Tc5 S' hi [(36^po)] ^^:^vv I dpveiov 
 a^d(eiv. I. 1323 [lolpav dvaTOJiaeiv XaXv^mv 
 iv dneipovi yai^', similar examples are: II. 151, 
 
I 
 
 — 124 — 
 
 872, 1018; III. 204, 855; IV. 480, 986, 1498.— 
 IV. 916 Kvnpig er iv hiraig dvepeylaro [Bovtt^v], 
 
 II. 820 xelro ydp elafterft ^')raxid(]eog er noraiiolo', 
 IV. 316 elaiiib'valai 8' sv dGnsra n^sa XeItiov. 
 IL 278 G)g 5' or' irl xvYiiiolai xvreg . . . | >? alyag 
 xepaovg 7,e npoxag i^revovreg; similarly II. 1213; 
 
 III. 851. — II. 972 iv xo^Tto) . . . | xsXaav. I. 965 
 aarsog evXifxevi npvuvT^aia vy;dg dvd^^ai; IV. 1123 
 rovg 5' Evpsv . . . | 'TXXixio iv T^iuevi. III. 42 tl en 
 [fii^X^^ '^dvrahaiha7.a j^d7^xevev. 11.387 tv? f^tr 
 t' ivi [vYiabi] vr,6v . . . Tto/j^aa^'; similarly IV. 
 452, 544, 1726. IV. 331 kfpy? ^ev iv [i^/ydw] 
 lepov eaxev ehe'^Tiov \ iv h' erepYi . . . (ialvov is a 
 typical example of iv with a verb of rest and 
 of motion in the same sentence. — II. 1006 
 epGYievi:i vo^u evi noif^iaivovGiv. L 1006 ivi 
 ^vvoj(^Y} ?.ifievog . . . reravro; similarly II. 318; 
 
 IV. 627. — I. 375 iv 5' 6?.XL) ^eardg aropeaavro 
 ^dXayyag. III. 976 Ttdrp'}? evt vaierdaaxov. 
 III. 1206 ne^o) evt (io^pov opv^ag; IV. 1394 
 neSov, G) evL Xdh(^v . . . ^iero fiyjXa. I. 81 
 nXayj^^evrag Ai(3vyig ivi neipaai. II. 131 J)$ he 
 fieXiGcdov Gfi^vog . . . fjteXiGGoxofioi nerpYi evi 
 xanviooGiv. II. 939 cS evt [^naTafidi] xovpyj \ 
 Ay^ruig . , , \ ov 5f^a$ . . . dva^v^et; III. 57 
 Ttoradw evt ^aGiht vYJa xartG^^t; III. 168 fjpcjeg 
 
 . . , iv 7iora(.io} xa^^ eXog T^eXo^yifievot- — I. 16 
 evt Ttovro} . . . vogtov oXeGG^; similarly III. 743; 
 
 r 
 
 4 
 
 ! 
 
 
 4 
 
 — 125 — 
 
 IV. 1705. — II. 1193 ivi novrov GreividnCiGvviaGt. 
 IV. 13 xefidg, yjvre (ia^etYig Tdp(peGtv iv ^vTiOxoto 
 xvvi^v i<p6(3^Gev ofioxTirj. II. 843 xej(yrat tovh^ 
 dvepog iv ^dovl xeivri tvfi(3og. III. 170 y} ivi 
 X(^PV • • • ^hpf^ocdvrtg "sitting in their place"; III. 
 1163 ore Syj irdpoig i^avTtg e^ixro iv x^PV- — ^• 
 529 ibaGavro . . . ipeGGefxev <5 ivi x^P^':> similarly 
 III. 944, 980; IV. 1396. For Homeric 
 examples compare A 105, 358, F 34, A 483, 
 I 634, 20, 631, 2 36, 4> 77, 239; a 186, y 103, 
 5 335, yj 244, t 25, 36, 57, 200, x 210, v 188, 
 o 441, p 136, etc. 
 
 (y) Of buildings, parts of buildings and 
 the like: — I. 148 h6[iotg evt Tvv^apeoto . . . rexev; 
 similarly I. 225; II. 437, 459, 1022, 1154. I. 818 
 dXX olat xovpat T^i^irif^eg ev re SofiotGiv \ ev re 
 X^polg dyopYi re xai elT^xnivriGt [leTiOvro, is a 
 mixed example. — IV. 1022 ert [xot [lirpYj [levet, 
 0)g ivi narpog S6uaGtv. IV. 810 ov 5>7 vvv 
 H^eipuvog iv y]^eGt Kevravpoto vYitdbeg xo^eovGt. 
 
 III. 656 ore rtg vv^^yi '^aT.epov itoGtv iv ^aXd- 
 ^otGtv fivperai] similarly III. 671, 798, 1127. — 
 
 IV. 1093 6p(pvaiYi ivi ;^aXx6i^ dXerpevovGa xaXiii, 
 I. 285 xeveolGL keXei^^o^at iv ^eydpotGtv; 
 similarly I. 810, 909; II. 304, 778, 1023; III. 
 228, 305, 1116; IV. 8, 1083, 1160.— II. 1028 
 iv I'^idTG} jiaGi7.evg ^oGGvvt ^adcroji^; cf. Xen. 
 Ana. V. 4, 26. III. 939 vYidvhe ^ed$ l^t, n;^ 
 
— 126 — 
 
 m xovpriv Siisig, III. 278 npoSo^o) evL ro^a 
 ravvaaag; similarly III. 648, 838; IV. 471. — 
 I. 1174 ip TtpofioTi-^ . . . yovvar' exafi-^ev; III. 215 
 larap 5' iv npofioXftai^ — II. 381 hvpareoig 
 nvfiyoiatp ip olxta rexri^papreg. IV. 1283 fivxal 
 arixolg Ipi <pavrd^uprai. I. 121 ara^fiolaip ip 
 'l^ix^oio [iiioyyias AioXiSrig]; II. 123 (5$ S" or 
 ipi ara^fiolGLP ansipopa (li^Xa i^^yjaap Kvxoi, — 
 Here belong three examples of ip with the 
 genitive in the elliptical construction, i. e. with 
 the characteristic place understood: I. 960 
 'Idopeg ISpvaaPTo | Upop . . . 'lyjoopiyjg ip ^A^^pyjg; 
 cf. X 282; also Aesch. Sup. 228, 416; Arist. 
 Kan. 774. — IV. 1159 ov fisp ip 'A^lxtrooio ydfiop 
 (lEPsatPB releaaai; IV. 1722 ip 'A?.xlv6olo (Soo- 
 xraaiag opouaai; cf. >7 132; Herod. I. 36. The 
 examples in Homer, coming under this cate- 
 gory are numerous. Cf. H 339, A 132, H 642; 
 ^ 15, n 441, i; 1, etc. 
 
 (5) Of beds: — I. 264 ip Xexeeaot xa2.v^l^' 
 d^€Pog'y IV. 1069 xovpi^g nipi ^y^ndaaxop \ omv 
 ipl Xf;Kf€(T<T(.— 1. 872 TOP 6' ipi ^iixrpoig 'T4^(7tvly^g 
 eldre; II. 1238 rovg 5' ipi Xixrpoig (in concubitu) 
 rir^s 3fd.— Cf X 503; a 437,^337, x 497, etc. 
 
 (f) Of vehicles and the like.— III. 309 ip 
 ap^aoip 'EeXioLO Sipevaag. IV. 219 6 S'evrvxru 
 ipi bi^po) Aii^ryjg Innoiai fxeTBTtpensp. I. 1111 
 Ttavporipovg irdpoiP ip pyji Xinopreg; III. 525 
 
 f 
 
 L- 
 
 ^ 
 
 f 
 
 
 127 
 
 ipy^rvoia^' ipl vyjI — .1. 622 Xdpmxi 5' ip xolXyi 
 (iLP vnep^' aXog vixe, II. 132 do'k'kBeg w ipi 
 ai(i^2.o) ^ofi(3yib6p xXopBOPtat [jueXiaaai']. III. 
 801 ^(opiafiop ... ri Ipl noXXa <|)dp/[^am . . . 
 exBLTo. III. 858 x£:^ipyiP ix^idha ^rjyov \ Kaonivi 
 iv x6x^(f> afiYicyaro. III. 1298 G)g S' or' ivi 
 roYjrolGiP BvpptvoL x^dpoLOLV I ^vaai . . . dva^ap- 
 fiaipovaip. I. 746 x^^^^h • • • «^ aani^L ^aip€r\ 
 C£ B 87, 345, 367, U 402, ^ 248, etc. 
 
 (^) Of parts of the body.— II. 956 Itiepr^aiv 
 ip dyxoivYiaiP SdfiaaaBP. IV. 1732 elaaro ydp 
 ol Saifioviyj /3c5;ia^ . . .q)iv dyoarG), III. 1160 
 vypd 5' ipi (37ie(pdpoLg exev o^fiara, IV. 696 
 oaae i^vg ipi ^Xe^dpoiCLP dveax^^ov, II. 281 
 d;cp'y?$ ip yepveaat [idryjv dpdfSyjCfav oSovrag. III. 
 63 OGGOP ifiolatp ipi a^hog enXero yvioig. IV. 
 1142 dr^ea . . . Xevxolg ipi . , . xoT^noig \ ia^opeov. 
 
 III. 644 ipi xpabiri a^eaoi dXyo$. III. 728 ^yi 
 ydf> fioc ip o^^aX^olat (paeipot r.dig; similarly 
 
 IV. 853, 1145.— III. 93 at^cog eaaer' ipo^fiaatv, 
 III. 457 ip ovaOL . . . opcipet avbyj. III. 635 ^oXig 
 S' iaayelparo ^v[idp \ 6g ndpog iv arippocg; IV. 
 1059 ip areppoLg dx^oiP elXiaaero ^viiog. — I. 478 
 ^opov ^e^v ^apoaXeov x>7p oibdvei ip ar^^sacL; 
 similarly III. 397, 759; IV. 1721.— Cf A 83, 
 238, I 554, E 213, 316, 2 555, T 169,* 417, etc. 
 
 Here belong also ^pyjv and ^vfiog. The 
 examples are mixed, i. e. partly local and 
 
128 — 
 
 partly metaphoric: — iv ^peoi ^v^dg Idv^ri; 
 similarly IV. 782, 794, 1671. Cf. 202, 413, 
 K 232, Pill,* 386, * 600; n 73, i; 38, etc.— 
 III. 551 xeap 8b fioi wg ivi 3i;/ic5 . . . nponoaGerai; 
 similarly III. 700; IV. 1045. Cf. B 223, I 459; 
 ;t 11, etc. 
 
 Noteworthy are two examples in Apollonius, 
 for which Homer seems to have no parallel; 
 VIZ. I. 460 siv iol aiVw nop^vpeaxev Ixaara "he 
 pondered everything within himself*'. III. 23 
 avhixa TtopipvpovaaL ivi a^iaiv "thinking differ- 
 ently within themselves". 
 
 (>7) The instrumental use of h: — This use 
 of h with the dative is the more plastic form 
 for the simple dative. Both uses are well 
 represented in poetry, while in Attic prose the 
 latter construction prevails. Some of the 
 examples here given are on the boundary line 
 of the local and of the instrumental use; others 
 are more clearly instrumental. 
 
 1st. Examples which are local as well as 
 instrumental: I. 254 hi xrepeeaaiv sTivaMg; 
 similarly III. 1030; IV. 214.— I. 1034 6 5' ivi 
 ^afid^oLGiv sXvG^eig. Homer uses the simple 
 dative in H 640, * 319; ^ 479, etc.— I. 561 ivi 
 X^pc^iv . . . nyjhd^.t'' dfitpienEOx; II. 1057 7t?Lardyyjv 
 ivi x^poi rivdoauv; similarly III. 1263; IV. 222, 
 1153, 1175, 970, 1053. Cf. A 14, 238, 221, 
 
 ♦ 
 
 t% 
 
 — 129 — 
 
 etc.— II. 399 ivi vyji Ttape^. Cf. M 16; a 211, 
 13 226, y 131, V 317. 
 
 2nd. Examples that are more clearly 
 instrumental: II. 332 xaprvvavreg ialg ivi 
 X^fxylv ipsTfid "plying the oars with their 
 hands"; similarly II. 712; III. 140; IV. 904.— 
 I. 814 iv o^^a^fzolai . . . opocoro] IV. 1617 repag 
 alvov iv 6^^a:;{,fiotGLV iMvreg. Cf. A 587, T 306, 
 2 135, 190; ^ 459, x 385, £ 343, etc. For the 
 dative compare (1) Apollonius I. 519, 631; III. 
 1009; IV. 128, 476, 1038, 1668; (2) Homer 
 r 28, 169, E 770, K 275, N 99; /? 155, y 373, 
 S 47, 226, 269, etc.— II. 44 en ^aiSpog iv 
 o^fiaaiv. Cf. Boiling on the Epic Fragment 
 from Oxyrynchus, A. J. P. XXII —III. 343 ^ 
 S' ivi yofitpoig laxsrai [yYivg'\ "the ship is held 
 together by bolts". III. 206 iv dhei^yiroiai 
 xareL^vaavre (BoEtaig. IV. 888 ravvaavreg iv 
 Ifidvreaat; cf the scholiast. 
 
 d) Place ''among,'' or ''between''. 
 
 In Apollonius as in Homer this use is 
 limited to plurals denoting persons or an 
 assembly of persons. I. 441 and HI. 605 are 
 plural in sense, and II. 597 is personification. 
 The examples are: — ^I. 1213 ov iv ^pvouEOOiv 
 Ine^vev. II. 238 ot ivi Qp'^xeaaiv avaaaov. 
 Cf. A 109, A 470, H 45, etc.— I. 343 ^fievoL iv 
 (ihaom; similarly I. 441, 464; II. 309, 881. 
 
Cf. H. 417, M 206, 209, 2 569, etc.— I. 656 ijf 
 ivl r^Giv . . . wyo^svBV. I. 1338 ^dg hi roloiv 
 anaaiv. II. 10 toIov 5' iv navreaci . . . h<paro 
 (iv^v, similarly III. 443; IV. 1276. Cf. n 378, 
 etc.; also Aescli. Pro. 973; Arist. Nub. 1366. — 
 XL 597 iv S' dpa fieaaaig IlXyiyaaL Sivyjeig elx^v 
 poog. II. 748 rov ^ev h b^tyovoiai l,ocdvavTyiv 
 ovofirjaav, II. 1281 cdprj h' fjfiiv ivl o^ia 
 fiyirtdao^ai'y similarly IV. 1191. Cf. K 435; 
 4 144, etc. III. 605 ivl XaXx(07t>7$ yeveii rdfie 
 Ivypd rerix^oLt' Cf. I 634; y 103, etc. — III. 
 667 yj h' ivl natGlv ^ar\ Cf. a 114.— III. 812 
 oa' ivi (^uolGL neTjovrai, Cf Aesch. Pro. 442. — 
 III. 1105 AiYiTYig h' ov rolog iv dvbpdaiv, Cf p 
 354. — IV. 88 ^£ovg ivi aolmv iraipoig . . . reOtv 
 fiv^Giv inuaropag . . . noiriaat. Cf. ^ 703, etc. — 
 Without Homeric parallel is III. 314=835 iv 
 noaiv in the sense of iunoh6v\ but compare 
 Pind. Pyth. VIII. 43; Soph. Ant. 1327; Eurip. 
 Ale. 739. 
 
 c) To denote superposition. 
 
 Kuehner-Gerth and Sobolewski are princi- 
 pally responsible for this category. Greek or 
 Roman writers would hardly have formed this 
 sub-division. The distinction rests with us, 
 and it comes from our trying to express with 
 greater logical accuracy the position of things. 
 Whether we should render the Greek iv by 
 "in" or "on" depends largely on our idiom. 
 
 I 
 
 ♦ 
 
 ^. 
 
 , 
 
 — 131 — 
 
 We can say "to hunt in the mountains'*, but we 
 can not say "to sacrifice in the beach". "On the 
 campus" and "in the campus" show no difference. 
 Either is correct, but one may be more 
 habitual than the other. Idiomatic differences 
 exist in all languages. Thus the German "aw/ 
 dem Lande wohnen", is in English "to live in 
 the country". The most important cases are 
 those in which a distinction in meaning is to 
 be expressed; as, "fish live in the sea", but "a 
 log floats on the sea". — In the following 
 examples from Apollonius we would translate 
 iv by "on". I. 728 iv h' dp ixdorcd \ ripfian 
 SaiSaXa 7toX/ld SiaxpiSov ei ixexaaro, i. e. on 
 either end of the Argo were separately wrought 
 many curious works. Cf Lalin, p. 2, b. — 
 
 I. 1090 xexXt^evov (laTuaxolg ivl x6eaaLV "reclin- 
 ing on soft skins". II. 26 Afoi/, ovr' iv opsaatv 
 dvipsg dfi^inhovrai; similarly 11. 478, 525, 
 1102; III. 857, 968; IV. 265, 287, 518, 1680.— 
 
 II. 927 iv aiyia^o) ^rsve?j)v Td<pov dfi^snhovro, 
 II. 1235 evr^ iv 'OXviino) Tirrivov yjvaaatv, IV. 
 232 evpovreg It* eiv kXog oUfian v^a, IV. 280 
 xvpfiiag, olg evi ndaat oSol . . . eaoiv, "maps, on 
 which were all the roads". IV. 882 ;ta^fi;va$ 
 t' d^^snevovro, r^g evt , , . vvxr^ deaav. IV. 
 1717 ipyjfialip ivl \>e^eLv dxT'^, For Homer com- 
 pare A 29, 34, * 316; a 108, yi 287, r 520, etc. 
 
— I32— 
 WITH VERBS OF MOTION, IMPI^YING SUBSEQUENT REST: 
 
 When motion is expressed by iv with the 
 dative instead of t-ig^ ini or npog with the 
 accusative, we have what is known as the 
 '' constructio praeg7ians'\ i. e. the rest or 
 position, consequent upon the motion, is antic- 
 ipated; e. g. iv yatri neaeeiv (IV. 388) '^'to fall 
 (to the ground and remain lying) on the 
 ground". This use is chiefly epic. For the 
 examples in Aeschylus see Lalin, p. 3-4. 
 Apollonius adheres to the Homeric usage. 
 
 BttU'6): 1) Of going aboard a ship II. 962 
 ivl vrii . . . l^riaav. Cf. B 610. 2) Of landing 
 IV. 332 iv 5' irepYi [vyjoo)] . . . palvov. 
 
 MX'ku: II. 107 iv xoviYiai (id2,8v. Cf. E 588; 
 X 352, etc.; similarly III. 1307 rov S' iv ;^3^o^i 
 xd(3(3aXev oxXdg. Metaphoric are II. 256 ^ri 
 fioi ravra vou evi fiaXkeo] IV. 1109 yi h^ snog iv 
 ^v^G) nvxivov lidXer. Cf. E 513; i; 65. 
 
 Aexo^ai: III. 585 5f;^3at ivi ^BydpOLOLV 
 i^eortov; IV. 186 Hix^oLt 5' ivl ;^fpcrtr i-^oiv; IV. 
 
 1133 (J ivl x6Xno} U^aro. Cf. 2 331, * 89; p 110. 
 
 Ai;u) (hvvi^): I. 638 'T^inv'keia hvv' ivl 
 Tei;;^eat rarpog. IV. 769 hv h" ivl novro) Aiyaioi 
 f Ipt$]. Cf. K 254, * 131; o 496, etc. 
 
 EfXew: I. 1247 ivl ora^^olOL vo^^eg eXaav 
 llin^^al Cf. ^ 210. 
 
 'Ep€iS(j: 1. 1234 a>$ rd Ttpwra pooj Ivl xdXniv 
 Ipetdev. 
 
 «»y 
 
 — 133 — 
 
 ©aat^G): III. 251 ^dfiL^ev \ iv ueydpoig; cf. 
 
 II. 453 0? xal npoa^ev in'' yj^iari xelas ^dui^ov. 
 
 @p6(Jxco: IV. 487 ivi ara^^olai ^opovrsg, 
 Cf. E 161. 
 
 'lSpi;(i): IV. 1548 <t>ot/3ou xrepag ISpvov iv 
 X^ovL Cf. y 38, e 86. 
 
 ''1^6): I. 788 xXia^G) evi . ..elaev; similarly II. 
 36; III. 49; IV. 689. Cf. I 200, 150, * 202, etc. 
 
 Mi;po^^af: 11. 371 xokiti^ iv ev^ioovri . . . 
 (ivperai; cf. schol. 
 
 TiriyvvfiL: IV. 694 (pdayavov iv ;t^ort Tirj^ag; 
 IV. 1091 yT^rivaig evi . , . xevrpa nyj^e. Cf. Z 
 10, K 374, X 276, etc. 
 
 Uinro: I. 506 eneaev 5' ivl x^iaoiv cjxeavolo; 
 similarly I. 757, 1027, 1056; II. 1014, 1038; 
 
 III. 1312; IV. 388, 1290. Cf. A 482, E 370, 
 400, 538, n 258, etc. 
 
 TIpo-<^ep(x) : III. 1114 iv o^^aTi^olGtv iTisy- 
 ;^eta$ npo^epovaa, 
 
 2x>7pt7trw: 11.668 Irt ;/a/>7;K>7^d$(T;c>7p67troi^Tf. 
 
 Ti^yifii: II. 233 xaxii iv yaarepi ^ea^ai. 
 Cf. A 441. — IV. 159 avTYi ivl x^9V "^n^^vlyevvv^ 
 
 X6(o: III. 757 [i'Scop] TO ^>7 veov ie Xe/?)7Tt,| 
 ns Tiov iv yav2.(^ xsxv^oit- Cf. v 261. 
 
 In IV. 930 TtlayxrYiatv ivl aniXd^saaiv 
 ipvaaai the preposition means between. 
 
— 134 — 
 9. TEMPORAL. 
 
 I. 1080 mLTCkoiihri h" hi vvxri; similarly 
 m. 798, 862; IV. 60.— III. 327 npor ipoi hi 
 %aTi; similarly IV. 236, 1477, 1500.— IV. 217 
 ^vTjoxoifi hi fXYivL IV. 244 rfil ivi Tfirdri^, 
 For examples of this use in Homer compare 
 n 643, 2 251; (i 76, p 176, a 367, x 301; also 
 h. Merc. 67, 155, 400. A blending of the 
 local and temporal use gives: 
 
 3. THE HETAPHORIC USAGES TO DE nOTE 
 
 a) The occasion* 
 
 A good example to show this transition is 
 I. 818 bXX olai xovpat T^yiin^eg ev re io^oLCiv sv 
 re x^P^^^i ayopy? re xai eiTianivYiat ^eXovro, "only 
 the captive maidens were honored in the house, 
 at the dance, at the meeting and at banquets". 
 Other examples are: I. 200 h araSiYi Se^y^^evog 
 dvn^epea^ai. I. 215 x^9^ ^^^ hvevovaav. I. 
 290 ov8' h ompo) madfiYjv; II. 306 oUv r' h 
 ovelpaat ^vfiov laivcdv. I. 467 xvSog hi nroX- 
 ifioiaiv dapo/ittt. — Cf. A 258, Q. 568; e 395, 
 5 497=;i 384, T 581, etc. Another metaphoric 
 usage is that of 
 
 ^) The cofidiiian or state, 
 
 I. 160 hi ^vvoxv TtoXeiioio, "in the pressure 
 of war". I. 1211 roioiaiv h T^^eatv avrog 
 l^ep(3ev. Cf. I 143, 285. II. 66 xaxii 8i^aavreg 
 h ala-jj. Cf. X 61, etc. II. 214 [;tapti'] xai 
 
 y 
 
 4 
 
 \ 
 
 — 135 — 
 
 dpyaleoLatv dvdnro^ai h xajidroiaiv, ''even in 
 hardships I return thanks". II. 333-334 inei 
 <pdog ov vv ri roaaov \ eaaer' h evx^dXiiOLv, oaov 
 r hi xdpret ;^apo)r ''since safety will depend 
 not so much upon entreaties as upon the 
 strength of your hands". — II 643 vfierepvi dper^ 
 6VL ^dpGog dsEcj. II. 646 evre ne^isa^e e^kehoi 
 dpya^ieoLg hi hei^aaiv, "when you are bold in 
 painful fears". Cf n 212, <p 88.— II. 1132= 
 III. 476 h xax6rYiri. Cf. V 20, H 40, 51; r 360. 
 —IV. 1735 iiix^Yi he oi h ^LUryjri. Cf B 232, 
 H 314, 331, n 130; 3 313. 
 
 Noteworthy are I. 1113 rolac Se Ma;cp<d5e$ 
 Gxomai xai ndaa nepaiyj \ Opyjcxiyig hi ;|<ep(Ttr 
 salg npovpaiver' iSea^ai; IV. 202 vvv 5' hi 
 X^poiv nalhag eovg ndrprjv re ^I'kYiv yepa^ovg re 
 roxYJag laxo^iev; III. 549 ^ivevg ye ^eii hi 
 Kvnpihi voarov ne^pahev eaaea^ai, Cf. I 97, 
 741; X 69; also Soph. 0. C. 1443, 0. T. 314; 
 Arist. Lys. 30 h ralg yvvai^iv eariv h ocdryipia. 
 In IV. 998 ^eX^v Se ^oii evt ^(opyj^ea^ai, 
 purpose seems to be expressed. The phrase 
 is equivalent to eg noXe^ov ^cdprj^ea^t 226,A 
 E 737, 376, K 78, T 36, etc. As Homer has 
 no instance of hi to express the purpose, and 
 no other example occurs in Apollonius, I am 
 enclined to believe that hi in IV, 998 should 
 read em. 
 
— 136 — 
 
 — avv — 
 
 B. Gildersleeve (A. J. P. XXIII., p. 15) calls 
 «Tuv **a false Smerdis on the list of the prepositions". 
 T. Mommsen (Beitr., p. 29) says: "Mir ist der 
 linguistische Ursprung und also auch die Urbedeut- 
 ung des Wortchens, wie bei vielen andern Praposi- 
 tionen, dunkel.*' Generally speaking it means 
 •*with", **in company with" " with the help of " 
 or ** attended by ". When used with a person, it is 
 sociative ; otherwise, it is, as a rule, modal or instru- 
 mental. As in Homer, so also in Apollonius ffOv ap- 
 proaches occasionally the local sense of fj^erd c. dat. 
 as in I. 415 ( ^^829), I. 869; IV. 861. In as far as 
 Apollonius has (tuv more frequently with the person, 
 he conforms with the use in the Odyssey ; but in the 
 preponderence of the plural, he agrees more closely 
 with the Iliad. Cf. T. Mommsen, Beitr. p. 55, and 
 187. The combination of a person and thing with 
 trov does not occur in our author ; nor has he an 
 instance of two nouns in different numbers governed 
 by only one <tov. In four passages (I. 1200; III. 
 1287; IV. 1228, 1589; cf. S'498, / 194; V 118, etc.,) 
 ffov is used after adro^-^ in place of the simple dative, 
 of which Apollonius has twelve examples. Cf. T. 
 Mommsen, Beitr. p. 66, 188. The variant form 
 $ov^ which occurs nine times in Homer, is found twice 
 in Apollonius, and only where the meter calls for it. 
 
 As (Tuv belongs chiefly to the higher class of poetry 
 ( Mommsen, pp. 3-7 ), it is not surprising to find an 
 increase of this preposition in Apollonius in propor- 
 tion to its frequency in Homer. It may be classified 
 as follows : 
 
 \ HI* 
 
 f r y 
 
 4 
 
 \ 
 
 tf 
 
 'J 
 
 \ 
 
 - 137 — 
 
 I. SOCIATIVE, TO DENOTE: 
 
 a) Aaompaniment, 
 
 I. 70 dptOTj^ecrcTf avv avh^aaiv 6(ppa veoiro. 
 I. 131 avv xal ol *'Tyla$ xlev; similarly I. 263, 
 415, 557, 754, 756, 869, 888, 992; II. 122, 305, 
 458, 466, 705, 815, 1166; III. 240, 450, 703, 
 869, 1000, 1164, 1238; IV. 22, 72, 734, 861, 
 1019, 1039. Homeric examples are: A 227, 
 307, 325, Z 372, A 140, P 407, 2 65, 4> 460, 
 ^V 829, n 430; a 191, 362, ^ 183, (3 32, 85, 
 8 751, ^ 52, 80, etc. 
 
 d) Partnership or co-operation. 
 
 I. 111=11. 1191 avv hk 01 "Apyot, I TeD^er. 
 III. 539 avv ho[\LQvi Tteipyj^eiyjv; similarly IV.547, 
 822. Cf. r 439, Z 314, I 49, A 792; >? 235, 
 ^ 493, V 391, V 2, etc. 
 
 Here belongs the metaphoric expression 
 ^to lie with', found in the following examples: 
 
 III. 839 ovncd /lexrpa avv dvSpdat nopavvovaa. 
 
 IV. 1105=1117 XExrpov 8e avv dvept nopaaiv- 
 ovaav. IV. 793 re a>vv d^avdracg r^e ^vyjr'^atv 
 iaveiv IV. 1152 avv d'kT.YikoiaLV e^i^av. Homer 
 uses Ttapd c. dat. instead. Cf. e 154, yj 347, 
 X 464, ^ 219. 
 
 a. nODAL. 
 
 The best examples of this use are: I. 512 
 avv dfilSpoaiYi . . . av^ii; cf. B 787; co 193; Aesch. 
 Sept. 487. — 11. 1069 avv xeXdSo); cf. A 161; 
 
— 138 — 
 
 I 151; Aesch. Pers. 470.— III. 126 ^^ xeveaTg 
 avv x^9^'^^y cf- ^ 3^9- — Examples which border 
 on this as well as on the following category 
 are: I. 241 avv r ev x£(y t^ OLtaaovr ag; similarly 
 
 I. 1059; III. 499.— I. 1207 ""TTiag x^^^h ^^^ 
 xaXniSi . . . St^)7To xp/iVYig hpov poor. III. 176 
 xard vYia avv evrsat fiifive^' exYi^^oi; similarly 
 IV. 1122, 1533.— III. 862 avv op^vaiom 
 pkpEaaiv. III. 899 avv noTiieaiv oveiaaiv olxct^^ 
 hoia^e. III. 1197 /?>? ^' k ipw^'^^^ • • • '^'^^^ 
 rig ^p avv naaiv xp^^^^f- m* ^^'^^ ^vv Sovpi 
 xai daniSt [3alv ig df^Xoi;. III. 1287 (391 5' 
 avr^i Ttporepidae avv dani^i. Cf. A 170, A 419, 
 E 297, I 80, 194, K 182, H 498, n 248; X 359, 
 V 118, 258, etc. 
 
 3, INSTRUriENTAL. 
 
 II. 1224 avv Evreai neipyi^^vai. IV. 1096 
 avv tevx^<^iv i^eXdaaifiL Ko^xovg. — Cf. E 220, 
 Z 418, A 386, N 719, etc. 
 
 4. CONCOniTANT: ••TOGETHER WITH." 
 
 I. 617 avv r'^aiv iovg eppaiaav axoirag, 
 1. 1200 i^rietpe avv avroig exf^aai yaiyjg [i^drriv], 
 
 II. 828 avv oarm Ivag exepaev, II. 1120 
 xparepo avv Sovpari xv^arog opfiY} \ viYJag 4>p$otot 
 fi€T' Yiiovag ^dXe. III. 689 fiyj a^E narrip 
 ^ELvoLai avv dvSpdaiv avrix oXiaaYi. IV. 1228 
 eXitwv ... xai atEivag avroig avv 'Ex^vdai 
 v^aovg, IV. 1589 a^vrog \ avrC) avv rpiTtoSi 
 axeiov ETtXEro, Cf. n 803, P 57; (i 408, etc. 
 
 ♦ V 
 
 — 139 — 
 
 5. TEHPORAL. 
 
 IV. 1005 avv Aiyirao xeXev^o), Here avv 
 seems to have the same meaning as d[ia 
 (temporal); i. e. "at the arrival of Aeetes." 
 The example has been variously interpreted. 
 Cf. Haggett, p. 29. The difficulty arises from 
 the doubtful sense of xE?iev^og in this particular 
 passage. Herwerden (Mnemosyne, XI. p. 120) 
 suggests xeXeva^o), taking avv in the meta- 
 phoric sense of xard "according to". It is not 
 impossible that the phrase means "with the 
 expedition", hence "with the fleet of Aeetes". 
 What Gildersleeve said in regard to avv in 
 general, viz. that it is "a false Smerdis on the 
 list of the prepositions", may be said more 
 particularly of this example. 
 
 C. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 — Eig — 
 
 Form: — Morphologically si<^ bears a close relation 
 to iv. Originally there were the two forms iv and 
 ^v<^, related to each other as U and ^c. The doublets 
 h and tv? were employed to differentiate the specific 
 in and inio relations, ^v being restricted to the dative 
 and cvy to the accusative. Exceptions to this restric- 
 tion are seen in Pindar (01. X. 90; Pyth. II. 
 21, 157; Nem. VII. 46), where ^v governs the 
 accusative ; cf. Latin in with the accusative and with 
 
- I40 — 
 
 tlie ablative. The form ^v? was in turn bifurcated, 
 owing to the influence of following sounds, into 
 ^9 before consonants and ^a- before vowels, for which 
 the Inscription of Gortyna still gives evidence. In 
 Ionic- Attic at a later period cv? became £jV by loss of 
 the V with compensatory lengthening. The doublets 
 i? and £iV were both used for a time, until finally 
 m became the standard prose form. 
 
 In Apollonius the form k occurs 1 1 2 times in case- 
 construction , while ef? is found only 53 times, giving 
 the proportion of 2 to i , as is also the case in Homer. 
 
 Meaning: — Besides its local meanings, "to", 
 * * into' ' , " toward' ' , ei^ developed in the later language 
 a number of metaphoric usages. Krebs (p. 1 10 ) 
 says: *'Bei der Fliichtigkeit seiner Natur verliert 
 sich e/y mehr als jede andere Praposition in eine reich 
 ausgebildete Phraseologie'*. Most of these meta- 
 phoric usages are not represented in epic poetry, and 
 Apollonius remained true to his department. He 
 uses £^9: 
 
 I. IN A LOCAL SENSE TO DENOTE: 
 
 a) The place to which or into which a motion tends, 
 (a) With proper names of countries, 
 islands, cities, seas and rivers: III. 61 f$ "^ kila 
 v(L\}i:i7Jkyii:ai\ similar is the example with a 
 noun which implies motion: IV. 1508 €$ " kiha 
 yiverat olfiog, — IV. 652 eg Ai^T^iyiv inepyiaav 
 v^aov. II. 692 el S* dv oniaaG) \ yalav eg 
 AlfiovLYiv aaxYi^ia vdarov ondacYi, III. 601 
 ne^netv eg 'Axct-dha yalav; similarly IIL 1080; 
 IV. 1327.— I. 336=11. 416 eg 'E;iXaSa voarog; 
 
 — 141 — 
 
 similar examples are eg 'E^l^dSa yalav Ixea^ai 
 L904;cf. II. 639,893; III. 992; IV. 98; eg 'EXXciSa 
 . . . xc^ag dyeiv II. 1139; of. I. 416; III. 29, 339, 
 1059. — IV. 608 '"R^ihavov npoxvXivberaL d^poa 
 ndvra; cf. IV. 626— III. 2 eg 'ioi^xdv dvyjyaye 
 xCyag; cf. also III. 89, 1113 1134; IV. 1161.— 
 IV. 1490 eg Al^vyiv dnevaaae. I. 623 eg 
 OivoiriV ipwavro. I. 419 eg 'OprvyiYiv . . . Scopa 
 xofiLoaG^; cf IV. 1703.— II. 1156 veviie^' eg 
 'Opxo^^^ov. II. 986 TIoi^Toi' eg " A^etvov . . . 
 vne^evyerai dxvyjv. — For Homeric examples 
 compare: B 667, 752, T 75, Z 207, I 381, K 28, 
 A 22, fl 753; a 18, 85, 172, y 159, v 160, ^ 295, 
 
 X 128, etc. 
 
 (/3) With appellatives signifying the great 
 divisions of the world and other localities: — 
 
 I. 635 eg aiyia'kov npoxeovro, I. 1108 eg ain- 
 Sivyjv dvayov (36ag ovpeog axpriv. IV. 759 eX^elv 
 eig dxrdg. 11. 368 eXiaasrai eig oka similarly 
 
 II. 403, 746.— IV. 100 eg hf^ov dTiCog dv^yei 
 vyja . . . ekdav. L 1010 nohag 5' eig (Sev^g 
 [dX6$] epet^ov. III. 589 eyjv eg yalav iovrag. 
 Different is III. 1358 eg yalav . . . neoovreg 
 "falling to the ground", for which no Homeric 
 parallel can be found. The same may be said 
 of I. 1051; IV. 597. Homer has ev c. dat. after 
 TtiTtro. — II. 831 eig eTiog op^yj^evrog xanpiov, 
 
 III. 1196 (391 p' eg epyi^aiYiv. II. 1081 eg ripa 
 
 ) 
 
— 142 — 
 
 xiSvar^ dirtyi; III. 1382 dv6j(^ovrag ig riepa; 
 similarly III. 1396; IV. 949.— I. 1263 eg Se 
 xeXev^v . . . ^E6v. TV. 636 ^ipe . . . x6^nov 
 ig Ci}xeavolo. I. 1110 y]peaav ig Xifxiva Qp^ixiov, 
 
 I. 916 exsXaav vijaov ig 'H/lfXTp)7g ^ Ar7^avrihog\ 
 similarly IV. 521. — II. 1091 aiaaovreg . . . 
 7i€pdT>7$ eig ovpea yaiyig; similarly II. 1242. — 
 
 III. 1269 ig Tieiiov ro ^Api^tov r^eiyovro; also 
 
 IV. 809. — II. 934 g? 5' ig neXayog 7t£<^6p>7To. 
 
 II. 934 >lai<^og . . . raviovro \ ig noSag dfjt(pO' 
 repovg. II. 1167 viofi' ig nokiv Ar/Jrao; cf. III. 
 1404 ^£f K ig TtToXfcf^pov. IV. 597 nkaev . . . 
 Xi^VYig ig npojpdg noXv^ev^iog, I. 1051 ig Si 
 nvXxxg 6(id8o} niaev, I. 1007 ig aXjivpov . . . 
 vSap I Svnrovreg; similarly IV. 1599 ig vSara . . . 
 ^xe, I. 1188 ^yj 3' Ifisv elg vXviv, III. 41 ig 
 XOiXxeijiva xal axfiovag . . . ^el^nxsi, "he went 
 to his forge and anvil"; cf. S' 273. I. 1236 
 XaXxov ig nxm^ta <pop€Vfi8vov [i'Scop]. IV. 1566 
 vija ixofiiaaafiEV ig roSe TiifivYig x^^t^^- 
 
 (y) Of buildings, parts of buildings, 
 enclosures and the like: — I. 577 ^uiJX' 
 ipinovrai . . . elg avXiv; similarly I. 1173. — I. 
 853 'T4'i7tvXy^g ^aaiXriiov ig Sdfxov cSpro Ahov- 
 iSyjg; smiilarly III. 177, 528, 538; IV. 348, 440. 
 Here belong the examples of ig with the 
 genitive to denote the characteristic locality of 
 a person: I. 337 ^wal 6" a(i(iL neXovrac ig 
 
 m-i 
 
 ♦ 
 
 1"*' 
 
 — M3 — 
 
 Alrjrao xelev^i; III. 212 ig Airirao xiovreg, 
 
 II. 353 ev^a fiiv eig 'At^ao xaraijidng icri 
 xeXev^og. III. 419 r68e x(kig dTtoiaeai eig 
 (SaaiXijog. IV. 1002 MYjSeiav . . . eov ig Ttarpog 
 dyea^ar, also IV. 1077; cf * 48, fl 160, 482; 
 ^ 195, et€.; also Herod. I. 92, 113; V. 51. 
 Noteworthy is the example with the possessive 
 pronoun: I. 708 eig eov copTo veea^at; cf. ^ 574. 
 — IV. 1602 Innov ig ei'pia xvx'kov dy^vog 
 aiieXkri, IV. 689 d^ixovro KipxYig ig fieyapov. 
 
 III. 738 vyjov olaofiai eig 'Exdryjg; III. 841 ^iv 
 eig 'Exdryjg nepLxa?i?Ja vyjov dyoiev. IV. 104 
 eig yap ^iv [v^a] ^Yiaavreg. This last example 
 may also be tmesis. Homeric examples for 
 this category are: A 222, Z 490; a 276, h 674, 
 X 60, n 328, 407, p 442, etc. 
 
 (5) Quasi-local are the examples of ig 
 with nouns denoting meetings, contests and 
 the like: — I. 654 iovaai eig dyopr^v "going to 
 the assembly"; similarly IV. 214.— III. 1239 
 ''iG^^iov elac , . , ig dywra "he went to the 
 Isthmian contest". III. 1278 ^alv' ig'ae^Xov. 
 
 IV. 1154 fiYj Ttplv ig dXxyjv . . . inL^pLGetev ofiiXog 
 "before the crowd might rush to the fight '*. 
 III. 1384 ineiyo^evovg ig apyja "rushing into 
 fight''. IV, 1742 elfii 5' ig avydg reXiov. IV. 
 805 ^eovg 6' eig Salra xd'Xeaaa, IV. 454 ig 
 'koxov 'pev; in N 277 purpose is signified. 1. 109 
 
— 144 — 
 
 arT>7 (iLV TpiTGivlg dpiari^Ldi^ ig oiil^ov (opaev 
 "A^rivaiy!; similarly III. 1165; IV. 183.— III. 
 820 Iva . . . avryjaeiev ig cjTtYiv; similarly III. 907 
 avvov xexXo[iai elg myiv "1 summoned him into 
 my presence''. Cf. 13, I 487, P 129, T 34, 45, 
 173, ^ 685, n 204, 520; y 420, etc. Under 
 this subdivision belong a few figurative 
 expressions: IV. 404 ig arnv [i^Go^ev; similarly 
 
 I. 477; IV. 1014.— I. 363 eig epyov npCSrog 
 rpdne^'; II. 886 sypea^' elg epyov. IV. 385 
 olxotr' eig lpe/3o$. III. 903 (lyj narpog ig ovara 
 (iv^og IxYirai. III. 298 otTta/ldg he fieTerpundro 
 Ttapeidg ig jiT^oov. The expression ig ;telpa$ 
 tivbg Ixea^at "to fall into one's hands'' occurs 
 three times in Apollonius: II. 1170; IV. 415, 
 1041, with which compare K 448. Other 
 examples in Homer are 11 327; a 421, fj, 372, 
 etc. — The phrase elg ev "into one place", 
 which occurs four times in Apollonius (I. 39; 
 
 II. 322; IV. 135, 1333), is the equivalent for 
 the Homeric ig x(^ov eva A 446, 60. Similar 
 IS II. 606 Tterpat 5' elg eva ;^c5poi/ . . . ippi^oi^ev, 
 which borders on the brachylogical use of elg, 
 i. e. the '^ constructio praegnans'\ seen more 
 clearly in the following examples: I. 647 3? ye 
 \:^^X^^ f^sf^oprrat . .,ig avydg r^eXiov, cf A 789, 
 * 305.— IV. 336 elg dxrag nTiri^vv Xinev "he 
 left a force at the headland". Cf 276 i^dvYi 
 
 I 
 
 4 - 
 
 - 145 - 
 
 Xig T.vyeveiog \ elg bh6v\ "^ 148 ^yiTC lepemeiv ig 
 nyjydg; y 36 d7teSeipor6!.iy}aa \ ig l36^pov. Cf 
 also Herod. III. 11, V. 12, 108, VIII. 57. 
 
 (e) Examples in which mere direction 
 toward a place is signified, chiefly after verbs 
 of looking or their equivalent: — IV. 310 [vi^aog} 
 ig alytaTiOvg dvexovaa; a similar example is 
 
 I. 938 elg aXa xex?afievy;, "extending toward the 
 sea''; also II. 732 elg dXa Sepxofievyj,— lU. 744 
 vavrat elg 'EXtxnv re xai darepag 'Uptwvog 
 eSpaxov ix vyjcdv; cf I. 248 ig al^epa x^'^P^^^ 
 aeipov, I. 725 ig ieXiov dviovra \ oaae [idXoLg. 
 III. 951 ig Se xe?iev^ovg \ ry^Mae nanraiveaxe. 
 
 II. 684 avydaaaa'^aL ig o^fiara xa;id ^eolo. 
 
 III. 560 ig Se neTieiag \ xai xipxovg Xevaavreg, 
 
 IV. 681 elg re (pvyjv elg r' 6f.^iara nanraivovreg. 
 Cf. B 271, A 81, M 239, N 7, 371; i 166, 
 fi 247, etc.; also h. Ap. 24. 
 
 b) The person into whose presence motion takes place. 
 This use with the noun in the singular 
 
 is poetic. Examples in prose are rare; cf. 
 
 Thucyd. I. 128, 4. 11. 37, 3. III. 3, 6. IV. 
 
 67, 2; also the example from Isaeus VII. 14 
 
 iX^v elg rriv ifiYjv fiyjrepa. The examples in 
 
 Apollonius are: 
 
 (a) With proper names: — II. 777 neiper' 
 
 ig A^rriv roaaov n7^6ov\ III. 1172 eg Aly^rriv 
 
 levai, IV. 762 ig AioXov i?iMv. IV. 773 elg 
 
— 14^ — 
 
 ^'HcjKXKTTor k^riaaro, I. 1330 i^e^i^xet I . . . 
 Te^^HCiv eg ^Irjaova. I. 12 Ixsro 4 TIeXiyiv, 
 
 I. 1296 eg 'Ayvid^yjv Tl^vv 36pe. 11. 277 or' 
 eg <J^iv^a . . . Ioiep. For Homeric examples see 
 H 312. 272, I 480, 402, U 574, X 499; 
 y 317, ^ 175, ^ 127, etc. 
 
 {(3) With pronouns in the singular: — 
 
 II. 467 elg e xo^iaaat; IV. 772 opder re fiiv dg 
 i veea^ai. Cf. * 203; ^ 436. In II. 49 eig 
 avrov ex o^f^ara direction is signified; cf. 
 3 170. In a figurative sense I. 250 a^?,yi 6' 
 eig irepriv oXo^vpero. 
 
 (y) With plurals: — III. 1147 eig erdpovg 
 xal vrja . . . opro veea^ai. This example is 
 noteworthy because person and thing are 
 governed by the same preposition; cf. X 331 
 ini v^a ^oriv eX^ovr' ig eraipovg. — IV. 1479 eg 
 5' erdpovg avi6v; cf. A 141, X 492, etc. Of 
 direction III. 503 eg d?i?^yiXovg opoorro; cf. H 484. 
 
 a, IN A TEMPORAL SENSE. 
 
 I. 603 oaaov eg evbiov xev evaroT^og o^xdg 
 dviaaai "as far as a vessel can sail up to 
 midday". I. 690 inepx^l^^^^^ ^^i; oto/t^ai eig 
 erog "in the following year". I. 861 dfi^oXivj 
 S* eig yj[iap del e^ yjfiarog ^ev \ vavriXiYig "from 
 day to day the voyage was put off". Similarly 
 IV. 1772 eig erog e^ ereog "from year to year"; 
 cf. Theocr. 18, 15.— I. 1151 eg )^g> . . . vyjaov 
 
 i ^ 
 
 — 147 — 
 
 Xinov "toward dawn they left the island"; 
 similarly IV. 1620, 1688.— III. 1389 ^ifivei eg 
 cjpatV Cf. A601, T703; 1 135, X375, ^384, etc. 
 
 3. IN A ilETAPHORIC SENSE TO DENOTE: 
 
 a) Purpose: 
 
 II. 64 napyjyopeovreg eg dXxriv "exhorting 
 him to fortitude". II. 1051 ovx e^no^ai iovg \ 
 r oaaov enapxeaaeiv eig ex^aaiv. III. 1176 nope 
 U a<piv . . I . . AiyjrYig xoi^^Ttovg eg de^Xov oSovrag. 
 IV. 1459 dpiievoL eg r68e epyov, Cf. A 226, 
 E 737; T 429, etc. 
 
 b) A limit or measure: 
 I. 1193 roaavi . . . ^lYixog re xal eg Tid^og 
 Yiev ibea^at. II. 221 yijpag , , . eg reTuog eXxo; 
 II. 314 Aiog voov . . . X9^'^^'^ ... 4 teXog, III. 
 1381 ovra . . | . . 7to/lia$ ^lev er eg vyjSvv TjcLyovag 
 re I rifiiOeag dvexovrag. Cf. 11 640, 2 353, 
 X 397, etc.; also h. Merc. 462, h. VII. 29. 
 Without Homeric parallel is eg with the 
 numeral in II. 976 rerpdSog eig exarov Sevoiro 
 xev "it would lack but four to one hundred". 
 
 — Ttepi r dfi(pi re — 
 
 This combination of nepi and dfi^i occurs 
 once in ApoUonius and once in Homer in case- 
 construction; viz: III. 633 nepi r' dfi^i re 
 roixovg \ ndnrrivev; cf. P 760 Tto^Xd 8e revx&x, 
 jfCL^ neaov nepi r' dfi^i re rd^pov. 
 
i,\S — 
 
 II. PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES. 
 
 (GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE.) 
 
 — hid 
 
 The preposition <>.^ means "througli", first in a 
 local then in a causal sense. In composition with 
 verbs it has frequently the meaning "apart", "in 
 twain '*. Its numerical relation with the cases as well 
 as its different usages vary much in poetry 
 (especially epic) and in prose. In Homer the 
 relation of the cases is: 4 gen., 3 ace. ; in the Orators: 
 I gen., 3 66 ace. Apollonius agrees with Homer, 
 having 36 examples of the genitive and 29 of the 
 accusative. While in Homer, as also in Apollonius, 
 this preposition is confined almost exclusively to the 
 local use, in prose and in comedy the metaphoric 
 uses to denote cause, origin, author, quality, means, 
 manner and the like preponderate. Cf lyUtz, pp. 63- 
 69; Sobolewski, pp. 109-12 1; Krebs, pp 65-69. 
 
 A. WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 ONLY IN A LOCAL SENSE. 
 
 (a) Of linear motion "through" a place 
 and beyond it, kd being equivalent to htex and 
 Sianpo; cf. Kuehner-Gerth, Sec. 434. In some 
 of the examples motion is implied: — I. 237 
 laav fierd v^a St acreog; also III. 871, 884. — 
 11. 686 ^Yj ^' Ifisvat Ttovrovbe k' ref>og; similarly 
 I 777; IL 935, 1036; III. 141, 275, 1357, 1378; 
 
 * ^ 
 
 ♦ 
 
 — 149 — 
 
 IV. 966, 1169, 1285.— IV. 123 5t' drpamTolo 
 (16^' lepov dTiCog Ixovro. II. 779 ore hevpo k' 
 'AaiSog r,7teipoio \ ne^og 6(3yi) IV. 1567 v^a . . . 
 ixo^iaaa^ev .. .Si' r.Tisipov. IV. 1662 Sid xXyjlSog 
 iovaav. II. 187 Sid ve^kdv . . . diOGovaai. IV. 
 913 r^x^ ^^ Ttoptpvpeoio Si" olSfiarog. L 789 
 eoavfihcjg xaXyjg Sid naordSog ehev dyovaa. 
 
 II. 329 St avrcdv \ nerpdcdv novrovSe goyj nrepv- 
 yeaai Sirirai] also 11.565. — IV. 1543 Sid p6);^^oto 
 SvYirai, IV. 632 enrd Sid arofidrcdv hi poor. 
 IV. 847 G8var ...Si vSarog. I. 377 5t' avrduv 
 \j)aUyyG>v'] ^opeoiro. Cf. B 458, E 752, I 478, 
 E 288, r 49, X 309; 183, 293, etc. 
 
 (/?) Of diffusive motion, remaining within 
 a space but spreading all through it: — III. 211 
 T^epa 7iov?iVv e<p'^xe 5t' dareog. I. 1137 iorj . . . 
 nld^otro Si repog. IV. 1458 Sl msipoio xiovteg', 
 also IV. 1472. — III. 761 oSvvyi Ofivxovaa Sid 
 Xpoog. Cf. X 118 etc.; also h. Merc. 231, h. 
 Cer. 67, 130. 
 
 In IV. 199 Sid vYjog dfioi(3aSig dvepog dvyjp 
 i(6^evog the sense of Sid fades into that of iv. 
 Cf. L 400. Similarly in the quasi-local 
 examples III. 1312 3td ^Xoyog a^ap iTiva^eig 
 and IV. 872 anaipovra Sid (pTioyog. 
 
 A figurative local use is to be found in 
 
 III. 792 fie Sid arofiarog ^opeovaai. The closest 
 Homeric parallel H 91 is not so bold and 
 
). 
 
 — ISO — 
 
 shows the accusative instead of the genitive. 
 Cf. Xen. Cyr. 1, 4.25. 
 
 The uses of 5id with the genitive denote 
 the time or the instrument are post-Homeric 
 constructions, and are for that reason not 
 found in Apollonius. 
 
 B. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 I. IN A LOCAL SENSE. 
 
 This use is poetic and mainly Homeric. 
 No distinction between the accusative and the 
 genitive can be drawn except that 5id in the 
 sense of "between" (I. 2, etc.) is confined to 
 the accusative: — I. 2 Sid nerpag \ Ki;ay£a$ . . . 
 '^Tuaaav 'Apyci; similarly II. 214, 422; IV. 784, 
 1000. Cf * 846.— I. 922 Std fih:^ea novrov] 
 UfievoL. IV. 644 Si e^vm ftvpta KeXridv \ xai 
 AtyvQv nepoiivrsg, IV. 272 hid ndaav oSevaai \ 
 EifidTty^v 'Aoiyjv re. IV. 290 ^ci^vv 8id xoXtwv 
 Iyiolv. IV. 374 ^aydvoi avrixa rovSe fiiaov 
 Sid TuoLifiov d^ijaai. III. 1052 arv^eXriv Sid 
 veiov dpoGOvig. IV. 1763 Sid fivfiov olSna 
 ^.inovreg \ Aiyivy^g dxT'^atv ineax^^v, I. 9 
 ph^pa xiciv Sid. IV. 306 KaXov Se Sid orofia 
 neipe; similarly IV. 647. Cf H 91, P 283, 
 * 122, etc. 
 
 As an example of diffusive motion can be 
 cited only III. 709 opro S' ioyj \ XenraXsYi Sid 
 S6(iar\ cf A 600; ^ 50. 
 
 « k 
 
 't 
 
 — 151 — 
 
 J. IN THE TEMPORAL SENSE. 
 
 In Homer this use is confined to the 
 Odyssey and chiefly to 0, K and £1 of the 
 Iliad; cf Vogrinz, p. 215. The examples in 
 Apollonius are — Sid xv€<pag I. 518, 651, 1255; 
 II. 155, 729, 1287; III. 1361; IV. 70, 1069. 
 Sid vixra II. 42; IV. 868. Cf B 57, K 41, 
 142, etc. 
 
 3. IN THE CAUSAL SENSE "OWING TO". 
 
 I. 423 GYiv Sid iiYJriv, also II. 75. Cf A 
 73, K 497; ^ 520, etc; also h. Cer. 414. 
 
 — Siix — 
 
 In the use of this preposition Apollonius differs 
 considerably from Homer. He has it 21 times in 
 case-construction, whereas Homer has it only 12 
 times (all in the Odyssey, except O 124). Homer 
 uses it only with the genitive; Apollonius has it 11 
 times with the genitive and 10 times with the 
 accusative. It occurs only in the local sense, 
 
 A. WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 IT. 746 Sie^ dxpyjg dvepevyerai; also II. 
 752.— I. 1157 Si6^ iiUg diaaovaav, cf I. 1328; 
 II. 351, 806.— 11. 644 Sie^ 'AtSao 8ef>8^p(^v\ 
 areTCkoi^Yiv, III. 158 /?>7 Sk Siex [leydpoio. III. 
 887 Siex neSiidv 8?idovaa; similarly III. 915. — 
 IV. 161 no2.vnpefivoio Sie^ v^vQ rerdvvaro. 
 Homer has only the two phrases Siex (isydpoio 
 X 388, p 61, a 185, t 47, etc; and ^tex npo^vpoio 
 124; a 101, etc. 
 
\ 
 
 — 152 — 
 
 B. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 1. 1014 fiie^ aXog olSaa vfovto; also IV. 457, 
 657.— II. 622 v^a Siex neXayog oevev. II. 560 
 V Insira 8iix Tthpa; s^Aasiav; simiLarly 11.618; 
 IV. 304, 858, 961; cf. ^td nhpag s. M. III. 73 
 (I dvaelpag . . . (Suoiai f)i8x 7tpoa?Jg <p6p6v vi^cdp, 
 
 — xard — 
 
 The radical sense of xard is "down". Collateral 
 with this is the meaning of extension "through*'. 
 These two local uses are practically the only ones in 
 epic poetry, the metaphor ic use to denote conformity 
 excepted. While the meaning "down" predom- 
 inates in the use with the genitive, "through" is 
 expressed chiefly by the accusative. In Attic prose 
 these local usages disappeared almost entirely and in 
 their place developed a number of metaphoric uses to 
 denote time, cause, occasion and the like. Cf. Lutz, 
 pp. 69-81. Apollonius avoided all these later prose- 
 constructions. 
 
 In point of the frequency of zar« with its respective 
 cases, the accusative ranks first in all departments of 
 the literature. The proportion m Apollonius is as 
 I to 3, which is also that for the Orators. In Homer 
 it is as I to 8, and in the later historians it varies as 
 much as I to 25. Cf. Westphal for Xenophon and 
 Krebs for Polybius. 
 
 A. WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 
 The only use with the genitive in 
 Apollonius as in Homer is the local use. The 
 
 ♦ ^ 
 
 v; 
 
 k 
 
 ♦ 
 
 14 
 
 \ 
 
 ^i 
 
 If 
 
 — 153 — 
 
 examples in Apollonius express (a) motion 
 ^*down from'', (/3) motion 'Mown upon" and 
 (y) position "down beneath" or "in". This 
 last use is not Homeric. 
 
 (a) To denote the origin or starting point 
 from which the motion proceeds. The genitive 
 is ablatival and the line of motion usually 
 vertical: — 11. 286 xard 5' ai^spog oikro: similarly 
 II. 429; III. 1264; IV. 510, 840, 1704.— IV. 34 
 (iXe(pdp(j)v be xar^ dS-poa 8dxpva ^6Vt:v. IV. 911 
 ^eorolo xard (^vyov hSope noi^ro}. I 565 xd8 
 Si* airov [lotov^ Xiva x,^vav. I. 1261 ;caTd 
 xpordrpcdv d?^ig l^pug xrjxiev. III. 70 xar^ avrCdv 
 [opkidv^ )<eL^appot . . . (popeovro; IV . 4:44 '/\Xi(idroio 
 xwt ovpeog Yiyays 3>7pa. IV. 1600 rixe xojrd 
 npv[LVYig\ similarly IV. 1594 a^pd^B xard 
 npVfxvYjg. Here belongs IV. 638 ''Epyj GxoneXoio 
 xa^' *Epxvviov idx^yjaev, where motion of the 
 sound is implied. For Homer compare: Z 128, 
 A 196, 811, N 539, 74, 169, T 52; ^ 399, etc. 
 
 (/?) To denote the "terminus" to which 
 the motion tends: — IV. 654 xar' aiyiaTuolo 
 xEj(^vvrai. III. 1021 xar ovSeog o^^ar epetSov 
 (the direction of sight is practically a motion 
 of the eye). IV. 158 <pdpfiax palve xar^ 
 o^^aXfiuv; IV. 1523 noT^Xyj xar 6^^a?.ii(^v 
 Xier a;t^^5; cf. E 696=n 344; also T 217; 
 n 123, T 321, 421, * 100, etc. More difficult 
 
— 154 — 
 
 * 
 
 to classify and without Homeric parallel is 
 IV. 315 l4ov vYiaoio xar' axpordryig eviovro. 
 Cf. Haggett, p. 33. 
 
 (y) To denote position "down beneath" or 
 "in"; — I. 155 AvyxBvg . . . ixexaaro \ d^imaiv, 
 ei irsov ye neXsi xXeog, dvepa xelvov ^>7tSia)$ xai 
 vep^e xard x^^^i avyd^ea^ai. IV. 1326 xard 
 vri^vog . . . ipepovaa; also IV. 1352, 1371. 
 Though post-Homeric, this use is still poetic; 
 cf. Krueger Sec. 68, 24 A. 1. 
 
 B. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 I. IN A LOCAL SENSE. 
 
 As xaTd with the genitive denotes the 
 starting or finishing point in a line of motion, 
 so the accusative usually describes the whole 
 of that line's motion. The line need not be 
 vertical, and so xard comes to be used like 
 dvd or 5id. 
 
 a) Of motion to signify, 
 
 (a) "Over" or "through'', like 3ed:— Two 
 very good examples to show that xatd is 
 almost synonymous with S(d are: I. 2 IlorToio 
 xard aro/wa xoX lid nhpag . . . ^Xaaav 'Apyw; 
 also IV. 1000.— III. 1241 she . . . xar' aXaog. 
 III. 873 Tp6x(^v eifeiav xar dfia^irov; similarly 
 III. 1237.— III. 1335 ^dX'kev dpripofievyiv aki 
 xard ^aXov oSovrag. I. 575 xar Ix^ta aYj[iav- 
 
 > 
 
 — 155 — 
 
 r^pog . . . i^ETtovrat III. 411 rovg Jyldw . . . 
 arv^eTiYjv xard veiov ''Apyjog, IV. 363 xard 
 novrov . . . ^opBviiai\ IV. 1319 nXa^ofievoL xard 
 novrov, — III. 113 ^yj 5' Ifiev OvXvfinoio xard 
 nrvxoLg* IV. 473 alfia xar {nrzikYiv vnoioxsro. 
 Cf A 483, A 276, 278, K 136, A 68, n 349, 
 2 321, T 25, X 146, * 559, * 330; ^ 406, 429, 
 ^ 473, 7t 150, a 97, etc. 
 
 (/3) "Upon", of inflicting wounds. This 
 use is frequent in Homer; but ApoUonius has 
 only two instances, having had little occasion 
 for it in a descriptive poem: — I. 429 xard 
 nXarvv avx^^oL xo-^ag. II. Ill ovra . . . xard 
 -kandpnv TaXaolo. Cf E 66, 73, 579, Z 64, 
 E 447, n 343; <& 406, etc. 
 
 (y) "Under":— IV. 964 xard (3ev^g . . • 
 
 Ivvov, Cf Z 136, etc. Other more noteworthy 
 
 examples are: II. 1037 nva^d^evog nrepvyag 
 
 xard VYia\ cf. x 122. — III. 809 helyL oT^ov 
 
 arvyepolo xard <ppevag jj/l^' 'AtSao; cf. T 125. — 
 
 IV. 145 xar o^fiara veioero] cf h. Ven. 156. 
 
 d) Of extent ''over'\ or of place ''within'' ''among'' 
 
 "on" or "at", 
 
 IV. 1769 xar dy(hva . . . hripioi^vro. III. 
 1353 xard naaav dvaaraxveaxov dpoi^pav. 
 I. 621 xard Svjfiov avacasv; III. 639 ^vaG^o 
 iov xard Ivjfiov . . . xovpyjv, IV. 968 ipcrievra 
 xard Spia TtOLfiaivecxev, I. 974 xard 5(o^ar' 
 
— 156 — 
 
 dx^parog ^€v axoLTig] II. 499 xara ^w^ar' . . . 
 evrd^ovro. III. 168 xa^' eXog XeXoxyifJ^^voi. 
 IV. 1216 Ux^vrai . . . xaS-' iepor 'ATtoXXcji^og. 
 IV. 414 xara ^uXov dXe^eo hovpara KoXx^^^- 
 III. 753 (p^LG^ai . . . xard veiov "Apyjog-, also III. 
 777._II1. 176 xard v^a , , . iiiuve^'. II. 773 
 dliolyjaav . . . xard v^oov; similarly III. 324. — 
 
 I. 247 £>g ^daav . . . xard nrokiv\ also IV. 1066. 
 — II. 995 dX(Jmg ^A?yX^ovLoio xard nrv^oig 
 evvyj^eloa. [III. 684 Ivep^e xard oryj^og 
 TtenorYiro [^v^og]. I. 1253 t^v^i^T^Yiro xard 
 oril3or' 'Hpaxl^i; similarly III. 534, 926, 1217. 
 — IV. 1645 ovpiy^ aluaroeaaa xard o^vpov. 
 
 II. 824 xard 7t7.arv (ioaxero rl(pog. III. 1053 
 xard (aXxa$ dvaaraxT^i^t Fiyavreg] similarly 
 
 III. 1332. Cf. A 487, B 99, 130, 211, E 332, 
 Z 391, 54, A 77, M 318, N 707, 682, n 96, 
 T 231, X 146; a 247, 375, (3 140, 383, etc. 
 
 J. IN A riETAPHORIC SENSE TO DENOTE: 
 
 a) Fitness or conformity. 
 I. 8 xard (3d^iv, I. 371-372 axdnrov h' 
 al-^a xar Bvpog oaov nepi^dXkero ;|<«po$ | rM 
 xard npi^pav, I. 299 fiolpav xard ^v^ov 
 dvid^ovad nep SfinYjg rX^^t <J)ep8tv. I. 382 xard 
 xaipov. II. 756 xard x>l6o$. I. 333=1. 839, 
 1210; III. 1040; IV. 360 xard xoa^ov. II. 1162 
 xard fiolpav. III. 552 xar oiuvov. I 660 xard 
 Xpeiio; III. 189=IV. 530, 887 xard xp^og. Cf. 
 
 J 
 
 — 157 — 
 
 A 136, 286, B 214, E 759, 146, K 169, A 48, 
 M 85, P 205, a 622; 3 489, ete. 
 
 5) Distribution. 
 
 I. 358 TtendXax^^ xard xXi^l^ag iperfid. 
 II. 999 xexptfiBvai xard ^v7.a, Cf. B 362, 
 I 521, etc. 
 
 — Ttapex — 
 
 This double preposition, formed from napd 
 and €x, governs either the accusative or the 
 genitive, according as the stress falls on the 
 first or second element. 
 
 A. WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 
 I. LOCAL. 
 
 II. 975 ^efS'pa . . . Tiape^ e^ev dvhxoL 
 (3dX:^iov; cf. K 349.— IV. 550 rrjabe nape^ hUg] 
 cf I 116. 
 
 J. HETAPHORIC, "CONTRARY TO". 
 
 II. 344 fiYi rTiYir oiidvolo ndpet, sri. vyii 
 nepYJaar, cf III. 552=111. 742 7tape|^ ov narpog. 
 
 B. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 1. LOCAL, 'ALONGSIDE OF". 
 
 II. 1012 G6ovro Ttape^ Ti/SapyjvtSa yalav; 
 cf I 7; fi 276, 443. Quasi-local is also 11. 1115 
 Ttape^ bXiyov ^vdroio. 
 
 J. HETAPHORIC, ♦* CONTRARY TO". 
 
 I. 130; 323; IV. 102 napex voov; cf K 391, 
 T 133. — I. 1315 Ttapex . . . Aiog . . . (iovXriv; 
 cf h. Ven. 36. — II. 341 firj r?iyjre nape^ ifid 
 ^eoipara (i^var, cf h. Merc. 547. 
 
— 158- 
 
 Form: —Trzip and l>^£ip (poetic) are etymologically 
 the same as Sanskrit updrt and Latin s-ufier. The 
 form t>-££'/> occurs five times in ApoUonius, as also in 
 Homer; and only in the phrase o7r£\p aXa^ where the 
 long syllable is necessary for the meter. 
 
 Meaning:: — The fundamental meaning of ItTtip is 
 **over", ** above". With the genitive it denotes 
 chiefly position '*over** or, in a geographical sense, 
 '* beyond'*, where the prospective might justify one 
 to say •* above"; and sometimes motion *'over" or 
 *' across" a space or an object. This last use is 
 more common with the accusative. In ApoUonius 
 oTcip signifies a few times motion "along side of", 
 which is not a Homeric usage. While these local 
 meanings prevail in epic poetry, in the later language 
 the metaphoric usages to denote **in defence of ", "in 
 behalf of" come into greater prominence. Cf. 
 Kiihner-Gerth, Sec. 435; Sobolewski, pp. 134-136; 
 Lutz, pp. 89-97; Krebs, pp. 40-43. Likewise, the 
 accusative diminishes very much in the later 
 language, as the following figures show: Aristophanes 
 — gen. 24, ace. 2 of which one passage is disputed; 
 the Orators — gen. 1270, ace. 21; Polybius — gen. 533, 
 ace. 39; Xenophon — gen, 130. ace. 13. Cf. Sobolew- 
 ski, lyUtz, Krebs and Westphal respectively. ApoUo- 
 nius agrees with Homer in the numerical relation of 
 OTtip with its cases. Homer has: gen. 49, ace. 331; 
 ApoUonius: gen. 29, ace. 15. 
 
 4 
 
 — 159 — 
 A. WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 
 I. IN A LOCAL SENSE TO DENOTE: 
 
 (a) Position ''above" or "over'': — 1.776 
 Soficdv vTtsp dvreXXovra, II. 171 vnep vefpeidv 
 r.sp^evov. II. 580 vTtEp X6<pa?.yig yap df.irix^'^^^ 
 Yiev 6?i6^poq\ similarly IV. 1348 earav vnep 
 xe^aX'^g. II. 1087 xova^ov reymv vnep eiaat- 
 ovreg, IV. 139 wg 6' ore rv(poiJ.evYig vXi^g vnep 
 al^aTidEaaa \ xanvolo arpo^dXtyyeg dnsipiroi 
 elXiaaovrai. IV. 1269 yairig vnep oaaov e^ovGa. 
 Cf. B 20, 59, N 200, 2 226, * 68; S 803, ^ 68, 
 etc. Here belong three examples in which 
 vTiip means practically "on": II. 94 x64^e . . . 
 vTief) ovarog. II. 103 y^?.aa ineaovfievov xeipaX^g 
 vTtep. II. 108 rov ^' aoaov lovrog \ Se^irepri 
 axai^g vnep 6<ppvog YiT^aae X^^P'- ^^- A 528, 
 N 616, 483. 
 
 (/3) Position "beyond": — I. 940 xeivtat 
 5' vnep vharog Alarjnoio. II. 362 r^g [axpYjg^ 
 xai iinep , . . nepioxi^ovrai deylAat. II. 398 oiv 
 vTtep [Bv^^pidv] . . . KoTiXOi exovrai (dwell); cf. 
 Herod. VII. 69. — IV. 286 nyiyai yap vnkp 
 nvoLYJg ^opeao . . . fiopiivpovaiv. IV. 1576 nsT^yog 
 Kpyiryig vnep, IV. 1624 dyxi^vog vTtsp npovx- 
 ovrog iSovro. Cf. * 73; v 257. 
 
 {y) Motion "over" or "across": — I. 1084 
 vnep ^av^olo xapiqatog AiaoviSao Tuytar^ 
 dXxvovig, II. 585 vrjog vnep ndayjg xarendTifiEvov, 
 
•-^ 
 
 — i6o -- 
 
 III. 1362 Tia^Ttov avaXhyiaxovrEg vnk^ j(^^ov6g, 
 
 IV. 1424 I'Ttep yaiYig op^oarahov r^e^ovro. In 
 II. 271 and III. 1112 vnep novroio is used in 
 the sense of Imp oka p 575; H 320. Cf. further 
 382, etc. Significant is IV. 1691 '^akoi^v 
 vnkp ^akfxcjvL^og axpYig, i. e. '^ alongside of; cf. 
 ^ 300. This seems to have been the start for 
 the un-Homeric vnep c. ace. to denote motion 
 "alongside of". 
 
 a. IN THE METAPHORIC SENSE. 
 
 (a) "In behalf of':— 11. 636 i^g i^vx^g 
 dXiycdv vnep. IV. 380 Selvi^v vnep . . . 6rX)7<T6). 
 IV. 406 KoXx^ig )7pa fpepoiev vnep Geo, Cf. A 444, 
 Z 524. 
 
 (/3) "About", "concerning": — IV. 531 
 ni;So IpYiv nevaofievog fisrexca^e rrjah' vnep 
 air^g vavTiXiYig. IV. 1175 ov voov i^epeov 
 xovpyjg vnep. This usage seems to be post^ 
 Homeric. 
 
 (y) In entreaties, like npog c. gen.: — III. 
 701 Xlogo^' vnep fiaxdpcjv aeo r avr^g rihe 
 roxYHJv. Cf. 660, 665, X 338, D. 466; o 261. 
 
 B. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 1. IN A LOCAL SENSE TO DENOTE: 
 
 (a) Motion "over' and "beyond":— 1.236 
 vneip aXa vavriXXea^aL; similarly I. 918; II. 
 1140; III. 1071; IV. 299.— III. 198 vnep bovaxdg 
 T€ xai vbup I ;gfp(Toi^d' i^anefiyiaav. III. 219 
 
 J 
 
 — i6i — 
 
 vnep ovSov . . . e(iav. III. 1191 Yp.iog . . . Uero \ 
 . . . vedrag vnep d;fpfag Ai'^ionriLdv . IV. 1692 
 KpYiralov vnep fieya Xatr^a ^eovrag. Cf E 16 
 * 227, n 13; y 73, 8 172, yj 135, c 254, 260, 
 V 63, etc. 
 
 {(3) Motion "alongside of": — I. 568 
 ItaaiYiv . . . vnep hoXixYiv ^eov dxpyjv. I. 599 
 KvvaarpaiYiv vnep dxpyjv \ yjvvaav. This use is 
 post-Homeric. 
 
 (y) Position "above'':— II. 378 Fevy^raiyiv 
 vnep dxpijv [vaierdovai]. Also this use is post- 
 Homeric. Cf Xen. Ana. I. 1, 9. 
 
 2. IN THE METAPHORIC SENSE -CONTRARY TO". 
 
 I. 1030=1V. 20 vnep ^topov and IV. 1252 
 vnep Aiog ahav. Cf. T 59, Z 333, 487, H 780, 
 T30, 336, * 517; a 34, 35, e 436, etc. 
 
 III. PREPOSITIONS WITH THREE 
 
 CASES. 
 
 As its connection with d,a^w^ I,atin amdo, shows, 
 d,a^i denotes primarily in a local sense a surrounding 
 from do^k sides. This limitation, however, disappears 
 in most cases, and «//^c comes to have the same 
 meaning as Tzepi^ i. e. "around about", "on a// 
 sides*'. Of the two prepositions dfi<ft is the more 
 poetic and the rarer. It is not found in the Orators 
 (I.utz, p. 63, Note), nor in Polybius (Krebs, p. 98), 
 
— I62 — 
 
 nor in Aristotle (Hagfors, p. 70). In Plato it is rare. 
 In Thucydides it occurs onl> twice (Debbert, p. 29). 
 Aristophanes has five examples, one c. dat, and four 
 c. ace. (Sobolewski. p. 229). Xenophon, differing 
 here again from the other Attic prose- writers, has it 
 147 times, twice c. gen. and 145 times c. ace. 
 (Westphal, p. 3). 
 
 Herodotus and the Tragedians approached more 
 closely to the epic usage, and they construe repi with 
 three cases. Cf. Lundberg, pp. 24-25; Lalin, pp. 
 18-21; Schumacher, pp. 6-16. 
 
 Apollonius agrees with Homer in general usage; 
 
 but differs from him in the numerical relation with 
 
 cases, as the following figures show: 
 
 Apollonius: gen. 11, dat. 32, ace. 26. 
 Homer: •' 2, " 88, *• 135. 
 
 The increase with the dative is not surprlsiiig, 
 because this is the most poetic of the three con- 
 structions. The increase with the genitive is due to 
 the tendency to replace the prosaic -spi by a 
 
 poetic a!x<pL 
 
 A, WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 
 ONLY IN THE METAPHORIC SENSE ''ON ACCOUNT 
 
 OF", "FOR". ••ABOUT": 
 
 I. 120 T% 6' a^^i . . . ifioyriGe, I. 1150 
 
 hair dfi^l ^€dg ^hav. I. 1214 ^oog dn^i 
 
 yBidfiopov dvtioidvra; similarly II. 89 r.vre ravpo)\ 
 
 <l)op(3dSog a/i^i ^oog . . . SyjpidaG^ov. — I. 1343 
 
 d^^' i(iev . . . byipiaaa^ai. II. 637 dfi<pl he rolo\ 
 
 xai rod ofiug, xal aslo, xai dXXov heibt iraLfuv. 
 
 II. 971 'Innokvr^ (uicr^pa . . . iyyvdXi^ev \ dfi^i 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 
 4 
 
 :. ( 
 
 J 
 
 k 
 
 * 
 
 — 163 — 
 
 xaoiypyjryjg. III. 1100 d^<|)' ai»r% [^vvapeaaaro 
 Mivug]. IV. 491 d^<^' avrolo ^eTiovro. IV. 
 1469 oi) e^ev dficp' irdpoio fieraXX^aai rd 
 haara. The two examples in Homer are 
 n 825 and ^ 267; of. also Aescli. Ag. 62, 1083, 
 1141; Sept. 1012. 
 
 Noteworthy is the examj^le in an entreaty, 
 where dfi^i is synonymous with erexa, vnep or 
 yog:— 11. 216 ^oifjov r d^cpi xai avr^g ehexev 
 ''Epy^g 'Alaao^ai. Homer has no parallel; but 
 compare Eurip. Supp. 280. 
 
 B. WITH THE DATIVE. 
 
 I. IN A LOCAL 5ENSE TO DENOTE POSITION 
 
 •♦AROUND", ••AT", •NEAR", -AflONG", 
 
 ••ON" OR •♦IN": 
 
 (a)Of a place or object:— I. 618 gvv rriaiv 
 tovg eppacaav dxoirag \ d^Kp" evvri (i. e. in bed). 
 I. 1033 duipi he hovpi oareov eppaia^yj. 11. 703 
 du^i he haiofzevoig [jiyjpioig] evpvp j^opov earri. 
 Gavro. II. 733 du(pi he rriaiv [nerpaig] xvfxa . . . 
 (Spifiei. in. 137 dfi^i h' ixdaro) [xvxkco] hL7t:^6ai 
 d^i^lheg . . . elXioaovrai. Cf. 2 344, X 443, ^V 40; 
 3 434, etc.— Quasi-local are also III. 117 d^^' 
 darpaydTioiOL . . J^l^iocovro "they amused them- 
 selves around the dice", i. e. they played dice. 
 The simple dative occurs in ip 430; in * 88 the 
 preposition is causal. Apollonius has also 
 dfx^i c. ace. with t^l^Laoiiai in 11. 813, and napd 
 
i 
 
 — 164 — =- 
 
 c. dat. in I. 458.— III. 623 ohro b' du^i f^deGotp 
 avTYj d6^?.6vovGa', similarly IV. 364. — IV. 731 
 oJtt t' a(i<pi ^oolg moyi^aav de^loig, 
 
 (/?) Of parts of the body:— 1. 221=11. 680 
 dfz^l 8e vuroig, I. 721=111. 1281 r^^' (^^ixoiGi. 
 
 I. 1172 dix^i be nooGlp. Cf. B 45, F 328, A 
 527, N 36; X 586, ^ 23. 
 
 (y) Of persons: — I. 1306 d^r^aaro yalav 
 d|U<|)' avrolg [i. e. vldai Bopeao]. I. 1327 d^Kpl Se 
 ol [r^iavxu] . . . d^pE6v vboyp. IV. 136 du<pi he 
 Ttaiaiv I vyjnidxotg . . . poi^Q 7ta?.9iOfievoig ;tetpa$ 
 (id?.ov dGxoi?.6io(yai [?.exU8eg']. IV. 957 d^^l 
 
 [yuj/atxt] xivvperat 6p(pavd rexva \ x^poGvvYi 
 noGLog. Cf. M 396, N 181; y429, p38, 4)223, etc. 
 
 3. IN A riETAPHGRIC SENSE TO DENOTE: 
 
 (a) The cause ''on account of", "for": — 
 
 II. 838 d^(pl 8e xYibeiYi vexvog fievov dGxoi^^ocdvreg 
 "they remained sorrowful on account of the 
 burial of the dead''. III. 318 vnobbeiGag dfi<pl 
 GToXo} AiGovibao, III. 459 rdp/^ft 5' du^' 
 avru. IV. 575 (iovldg dficp' avrolg, IV. 1029 
 d^^L t' df^?vOf$ . . . drv^oftai. Cf. F 157, I 547, 
 £1 108; 5 153, X 546, etc. Here belong two 
 examples of the inner cause: II. 96 6 5' dfi<p' 
 obvvYi yvv^ Yipinev, cf. h. Merc. 172.— IV. 1065 
 h^eirig . . . nenapuevov d^f' oSvvyiglv; cf. ^V 88. 
 The simple dative occurs in E 399. 
 
 
 ( 
 A 
 
 J 
 
 \ 
 
 -165- 
 
 (i) The object of contention "'for": — 
 I. 747 dfi(pi be (iovGlv Tr^?.t36ai udpvavro. III. 
 1385 dii^^ ovpoiGLi' eyeipo^ievov 7to?J^ioio. Cf. 
 r 70, M 421, H 447, 587. 
 
 (y) With verbs of hearing and the like: 
 "about", "concerning": — III. 678 ebdy:g ex 
 narpog evinriv I da^l r e^oi xai naiGiv. IV. 
 356 TLva Ty;vbe GviuprvvaG^e iievoivYiv \ dfKp" 
 ifioL IV. 1331 dfi^i be vogto) \ ovn fid?J' dvnxpv 
 voeu ^driv. Cf. TI 647; b 151, etc. 
 
 C. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 ONLY LOCAL IN APOLLONIUS AS IN HOMER. 
 
 (a) Of a place or object: — I. 1178 aa^)' 
 ^Apyav^6veLov 6po$ npoxodg re Kloio [d<ptxopro], 
 I. 1184 d^Kpi Ttvpyjia biveveGxov. I. 1248 d^<pi 
 be X^P^^ cpoira xex^riycxig. II. 376 df^i^i Gibyjpea 
 epya ^eTiovrai. II. 516 dii^i r' ipv[ivYjv \ "OSpi^r 
 xai nora^ov lepov poor "ATtibavolo. II. 767 
 Kvl^Lxov du<pl AoXlovlyjv ereT^eGGav, 11. 813 
 balr dfj,<pi . . . e^^toovro. II. 850 a[.i(pi be ri^vye 
 ^dXayya na'kaiyeveog xorivoio \ aGrv (3a?.elv, 
 
 III. 881 dfi^i dXGea xai Gxomdg noT^vnibaxag 
 [aypoiLevai]. IV. 51-52 dT^cdiievvi dfi^i re 
 vexpovg, \ di.i<pi re ^i;(T7ia/lea$ pi^ag x^ovog. IV. 
 535 xev^erai alri \ d^(pi nokiv dyavyjv 'T^iXyjiba. 
 
 IV. 550 d{j.(pL re yalav | AvGoviyjv vriGovg re 
 AiyvGrtbag . . | . . 'ApycJ>7$ Ttepiikaia Grifiara vrjog \ 
 VYj^epreg ne^arat, IV. 1452 iivlai \ d[.t^^ bXiyviv 
 (ze?iirog yXvxepov 2,i(3a nenrYjvlaL. Cf. B 461, 
 533, A 425, H 135, 434, 435, I 530; X513, etc. 
 
— i66 — 
 
 (/3) Of persons: — I. 843 d^^i ie rovye 
 VBYivtheq.. .eVkiaaovro xe;^apwfrat. I. 883 dve^a^ 
 d^fpl xivvpofievai npo/^sovro. II. 452 rov 5' dfi(pi 
 Ttspixrirai iyepe^ovro. III. 1215 d^(pibe r^vye] 
 [^Exdvyjv] o^ELYi v?.ax'?} x^o^^oi xvveg i(p^eyyovro. 
 Cf. r 231, A 419, M 414, n 601; X 570, etc. 
 
 (y) Of parts of the body: — I. 427 ()ondX(f) 
 fiiaaov xdpyj du^i uerona \ 7tkii^ev\ IV. 44 neTtkov 
 . . . d^^i iieruna | areCka^evYi xai xa7A naprjia. — 
 III. 121 yXvxepop Se ol d^<pi napeidg \ XP^^V 
 ^dXXsv spev^og; similarly III. 461; IV. 1277.— 
 
 III. 761 dfifpL T dpaidg \ Ivag . . . Svvei d^og, 
 
 IV. 1347 i^u(7fxivaL . . . df.i^i re vCyra xai i^vag; 
 similarly IV. liQ9. C£ K 573, n 580, 2 414; 
 ^ 153, etc. 
 
 — dvd — 
 
 The preposition «•>« belongs chiefly to the depart- 
 ment of poetry. Attic prose- writers avoid it almost 
 entirely. To use the words of Gildersleeve, ' Viva is dead 
 to the prose of everyday life and xard reigns in iti 
 stead.* * Lutz ( p. 4 ) cites only three examples from 
 the Orators ( Andoc. 2, Dem. i ), to which Sobolewski 
 (p. 66 ) has added another from Demosthenes. Like- 
 wise, of all prepositions in Polybius «>« has the least 
 number of occurrences; cf. Krebs, pp. 33-34. 
 Herodotus and Xenophon, who approach nearer to 
 the poetic diction, use it somewhat oftener ; cf. Lund- 
 berg, pp. 16-17 ; and Westphal, p. 3. ** The large 
 use of «v«," as Gildersleeve remarks in the American 
 Journal of Philology, Vol. XXIII., p. 26, ** gives at 
 
 ^> 
 
 ■< . 
 
 <M 
 
 J 
 
 "Mi J^k 
 
 — 167 — 
 
 once an antique hue and we may expect to find it in 
 conscious poetry. ' ' In this regard we are not disap- 
 pointed in Apollonius, who in proportion to the bulk 
 of his work uses it more frequently than Homer. 
 He restricts its use, however, to the accusative ( with 
 the possible exception of II. 701, where it might be 
 construed with the dative, although tmesis is evi- 
 dently intended ), and employs it only in a local 
 sense. In lyric poetry and in the lyric parts of 
 tragedy «'>a is used with the dative. Homer also has 
 nine examples of this use, and in three passages 
 (/5 416, t 177, « 284), he seems to use it even with 
 the genitive, according to Delbriick, Monro, Vogrinz 
 and others. As this construction, however, does not 
 occur elsewhere in the literature, it seems preferable 
 to take avd with the verb in those three passages. 
 
 Of the two apocopated forms in Apollonius, av (be- 
 fore dentals ) occurs only in tmesis ( eight times ) , 
 but the corresponding form a/i ( before labials ) is 
 used twelve times in case- construction. All these 
 forms are found in Homer. The uses of avd in Apol- 
 lonius may be classified as follows : 
 
 ONLY WITH THE ACCUSATIVE AND ONLY IN A 
 
 LOCAL SENSE: 
 
 a) Of motion up through a place or through a crowd 
 
 of people. 
 
 I. 308 u<5iv . . . /^Yikov dv r^a^eyjv, r,e 
 
 KXdpov. I. 310 dvd 7i2.yj^vv . . . xiev; II. 590 
 
 dvd ndvrag i6v. — I. 812 dfi nro2.L€^pov . . . 
 
 d:^dXy!vro; similarly I. 653; III. 823; IV. 1172, 
 
 1279.— III. 166 dv ai^epa nokXov iovn. III. 
 
 685 dvd aroua ^vlev ivtanslv. IV. 1056 
 
arpsvyofievoig 5' dv o^Ckov enrilv'^Bv evv^reipa \ 
 ^v^ epyiav av^peaai. IV. 1110 avrixa S' capro | 
 ix lexBov dva 5(owa. IV. 1336 Tikov &g, og pa 
 r dv' vTiYjv I avvvoiiov riv ^e^km^v copverai. Cf. 
 Z 505, K 362, N 199, n 349, 2 493, X 452, 
 * 74; 6 456, x 251, 275, o 80; ^ 234, etc. 
 
 5) 0/ mofian over sfiace. 
 II. avpai, aiT dva ndaav \ yalav b^dg . . . 
 nveiovaiv 11. 697 dva vyjaov ibiveov. II. 1086 
 i^psyjxe ;|;;dXa^'ar | ix ve<pmv dva r aarv xal 
 oixia. II. 1091 diGaovreg . . . aw TtEkayog; IV. 
 1536 npriaovTog dyyTeca | du ne7.ayog. — IV. 231 
 dva yalav . , . a^ovaiv. IV. 1382 j.\3v7^g dva 
 ^ivag spYiiiovg vyja . . . (pipt-iv. Cf. E 87, 96, 
 Z 71; e 329, 330, x 308, fi 143, 333. 
 
 c) Of motion up to, or simply to; i. e. of the goal. 
 I. 528 dm aeX^ara ^dvreg. I. 838 elfii 
 ^' vnorpoTtog avrig dm 7tr6?uv; similarly III. 
 573. — IV. 115 oLTid vyjog sfiyjaav \ noiYievr dva 
 X^^ov. Cf. X 77. 
 
 d) Of motion up along, or simply along, 
 I. 526=IV. 580 dva ^eaariv \ arelpav . . . 
 %^o(Tf. I. 781 dva ari^ov yiisv i^pcjg; similarly 
 IV. 43, 47. — II. 168 hivYievT dva Jioanooov 
 i^vvovro, II. 825 iXvoevrog dva ^poa^ovg 
 norafiolo veiaer 'A/3avTtd5>7$. Cf. E 87, K 339; 
 X 176, 4. 136, etc. 
 
 j 
 
 1 
 
 — 169 — 
 
 e) 0/ motion up, upon. 
 II. 1367 Toz/ p' dva ;^elpa 7jx^(jsv\ cf. K 466; 
 y 492, etc. The reverse of this is rest "'on": 
 III. 44 YiGio bofio) fiiVidTov dvd ^porov, cf. S 278. 
 Homer uses dvd c. dat. in H 352, 153, etc. 
 
 /) With verbs denoting extent over or in a place. 
 In this category dvd is nearly synonymous 
 with h, as in I. 166, 825, 1130.— I. 127 
 [xdnpiog'] og p evi ^yjaartg \ t^jepfisro Aa^Tteiyjg, 
 ^Epvfidv^tov dji [leya rhpog, I. 166 'A/lfor 
 Xiner di.i 7i62.iv; similarly I. 825; II. 998'; III. 
 748; IV. 1177.— I. 1061 eneipyiaavTo r de^Xov 
 &ji ne^Lov jiEi^m'iov; also II. 516; IV. 974. — 
 I. 1130 drd aneog . . . e^TidaTYiasv I. 1292 
 xvhog dv 'EXXdSa /f>7 ae xayiv-^ri. II. 1018 dv 
 ovpea vaiETaovaiv ^oaaivag; IV. 1338 <p2.oyyYi 
 vTiorpo^ieovaLV dv ovpsa . . . (iyjaaai. — IV. 623 
 dvd KeXri^v yjnsLpov Ttenravrat [^.tfivai]. IV. 
 996 drd nXyj^vv xexdpovro. IV. 1359 ov6' m 
 rdaS' dvd x^P^^ iaeSpaxov, IV. 1440 nai^aaae 
 he rovK dvd X^P^^^ I ^^"P f'^fpf^*)^* IV. 1742 
 d^ nklayog vaieiv. Cf. 517, .0 488; y 215, 
 V 367, g 474, 80, n 96, etc. 
 
 g) With verbs denoting the direction toward or over 
 
 a place, 
 
 II. 363 da nk'kayog rerpafifievYi] II. 810 a^ 
 
 neXayog ^yjevuevoi. III. 1283 nanrrivag S' dvd 
 
 vecov. Cf. T 212. 
 
^ 
 
 — 170 — 
 
 sni 
 
 Of all the prepositions i^ri ( Sanskrit dpi ) is per- 
 haps the most difficult, because its meanings are so 
 numerous that at times it is hard to distinguish one 
 from the other. In a local sense it denotes resf tipon 
 a place or object, position bordering on a place, or 
 motion toward or upon something. From these primary 
 local meanings (upon, at, near, to), have been 
 derived the metaphoric meanings, which Monro sum- 
 marizes in part as follows : ' * After ( as we speak of 
 following upon); with, at {\. e. close upon); in ad- 
 dition, besides, esp. of an addition made to correspond 
 with or complete something else ; also attached to as an 
 inseparable incident or condition of a person or thing ; 
 and conversely, on the condition, in the ciraimstances y 
 etc.*' — In other words, trt' in the metaphoric usages 
 may denote sequence in time, as well as succession in 
 order; it may be used in a hostile sense against, or in 
 a friendly sense /^r, in regatd to ; it may express the 
 occasion or the action at which one is present or in 
 which one participates, — the /^r^^w, in whose power 
 something is ( hence depends upon the person ) ; 
 furthermore, it may signify the cause, the nuayis, the 
 condition, i\i^ purpose, the circumstance, and the like. 
 Apart from these embarrassing metaphoric us3ges, it is 
 astonishing how the question regarding the difference 
 of ^-e with the genitive and dative in a local sense, 
 apparently the easiest of all usages, was for a long 
 time involved in a haze of conflicting opinions. Cf. 
 Forman, The Difference between the Genitive and 
 Dative used with c^rj' to denote Superposition, p. 4 
 seq. According to the investigation of Forman, the 
 
 i 
 
 — 171 — 
 
 dative is the picturesque and emphatic means of in- 
 dicating locality and the genitive the colorless means. 
 In this fact lies the solution for the large use of 
 (7:1 with the locative dative in poetry, and its 
 limited use in prose. For the Orators compare Lutz, 
 pp. 104-106. In his conception of superposition and 
 proximity with the genitive and dative, Apollonius 
 agrees with Homer, as the following calculations 
 show : 
 
 Ap. : -a) Superpos.: gen. 38. dat. 51; b) Prox.: gen. 3, dat. 29. 
 Ho:-fl) " " 138, " 22y, b) " '* 9, " 121. 
 
 Also in the other usages Apollonius remained within 
 the limits of his department. Thus he keeps the 
 metaphoric usages almost entirely to the dative, 
 though in the later language a large share of these 
 usages fell to the genitive and accusative. Cf. 
 Schumacher, pp. 54-59, Sobolewski, pp. 141 -146 and 
 166; Lundberg, pp. 32-36; Lutz, pp. 101-104 and 
 1 1 7- 1 24; Krebs, pp. 80-84 and 93-98. 
 
 After these introductory remarks we may proceed 
 to classify the different uses of ^-i in Apollonius. 
 
 A. WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 I. IN A LOCAL SENSE TO DENOTE: 
 
 SUPERPOSITION. 
 
 a) With verbs of rest, or words implying position, 
 
 (a) Of place, usually the large divisions 
 of space: — III. 930 vi^ov en dxpefiovcov ""Epyjg 
 ryiTtaTts ^ov?Ag. II. 407 in dxp>7$ nenrdfievov 
 ^yjyolo; similarly III. 202.— 11.916 in dyx^dXov 
 ^dv6v dxr^g; cf. I. 444 3ai'f«j^ , , . in^ 'AaiSog 
 r^neipoto. — II. 401 in r.neipoLO KvradSog . . . 
 
.? 
 
 — 172 — 
 
 4>d(Tf$ hivrieig evpvv poor Eig a/la [3d?.?.ci, III. 
 455 e^er inl Sporor. IV. 954 zopvcpyig em 
 Xf0crd5og axpY;g op3o$. II. 259 en 6(p^a?^^i^v 
 dXaop vi^og. I. 320 (Jtyj 6' dp sni npo^oX^g, 
 
 II. 1058 bovTZFi ini Gxomyjg nepi^iyixEog. IV. 1318 
 6g ini z^ovog . . . xdiieaS^s] cf. IV. 1330, 1357. 
 For Homer compare A 46, 536, A 38, N 12, 
 H 157, 2 422, T 50, U^ 61; a 104, 162, 185, 190, 
 y 90, h 718, e 82, 151, 195, ^ 136, etc. 
 
 (/3) Of veliicics: — I. 658 [topa] dyeir ini 
 vYi6g\ similarly XL 211, 1187. — II. 1254 rov ^ev 
 [aieTOp] in* dxpordryig l8ov..*VYj6g vnepnTdf-iEvov 
 vE(pe(dv ax^^or. Here belongs I. 566 in ixpio^tv 
 "upon the deck". Cf. E 550, 455, N 665 
 n 223, n 275, 447; a 260, /3 332, y 505, g 188, 
 p 249, etc. 
 
 5) With verbs of motion. 
 (a) Of motion down, down upon: — 11.550 
 ^^xev in^ d^eivoio no^ag Qwi^i^og dxr^g. Of 
 throwing the cable on the shore to fasten the 
 ship: IV. 660 neia^iar in' 'liovcdv . . . (idXov; 
 cf. HI. 569, IV. 78. — Of disembarking or land- 
 ing: II. 631 in' ineipoio /JatV^aei/; similarly 
 
 III. 199; IV. 514. — Of sitting down upon: 
 II. 203 ix h' iX^idv (.isydpoio xa^s^ero . . . ovSov 
 in' avlsioio- cf. 11 522; e 195, x 314, 366, etc. 
 Here belong the examples of looking or fixing 
 the eyes upon the ground: I. 784 iju x^ovog 
 
 % " 
 
 — I73-- 
 
 o^liar iptiaag] similarly 11.685,111.22. Homer 
 has xard c. gen.; but compare Theocr. II. 112. 
 {i3) Of motion up, upon: — Here the prin- 
 cipal expression is that of embarking, or going 
 on board a sliip. IV. 1535, 1584 ini vriog e(3av 
 {e^SyjGav)', cf. N 665, ;i 534, etc. Similar to 
 this is IV. 1661 (Syjaar in Lxpi6^Lv''he mounted 
 the platform"; also III. 573 ini v/jog \ evvaiag 
 ipvaavreg ''drawing the mooring stones upon 
 the ship". Other examples are: I. 1237 in' 
 avxhog dv^sro n^(pvv "she put her arm upon, 
 or around, his neck'*. III. 683 ^v'^og . . . ol 
 in dxpoTdrr^g dveTe?./i6v \ y?vMGyjg. IV. 578 
 ^opeovro \ vyjgov ent xpavayjg 'ti?.exrpiSog. IV. 
 939 v^ov in ai'rdcoi^ cniT^dkjv xai xv^iarog 
 dy^g I p6ovr'. Cf. I 588, M 265, 2 531; S 817, 
 S' 500, (?) 51, etc. 
 
 PROXIMITY. 
 
 In three examples ini c. gen. means 
 "close upon", "at" or "near". — Though prox- 
 imity is clearly meant, yet the perspective 
 renders the image of the object as one of 
 superposition, and so this category can not be 
 said to differ much from the preceding. The 
 examples are: I. 29 <py:yoi 5' dypid^eg . . . dxrijg 
 &pyjLxiyjg Zcxivy^g em . . . crixoi^i^iv. III. 880 in 
 axTYig dypo^evai nyjy^g 'Aj-ivioi^og. IV. 516 in 
 'IX^vpixolo ^e'kanfia^eog noraj-tolo | . . . nvpyov 
 Uetfiav. Cf. X 153; e 489, x 96 etc 
 
— 174 — 
 
 OTHER I.OCAI. USES ARE: 
 
 Motion '*over'' or '^across", without any 
 definite goal: 1. 182 novrov Ini yXavxolo ^eeaxev 
 ol^fiarog. Homer has no close parallel. 
 
 Motion ''toward": IV. 1576 ini x^ipog 
 5f^(Tfp% . . . i^mm^e; c£ r 5, E 700; y 171, 
 e 238. 
 
 Succession: IV. 671 dXXo (5' in' aX?.G)v \ 
 avfxfiiyesg fieXiuv. Seaton reads an' for in\ 
 as suggested by L. 
 
 J. IN A TEMPORAL SENSE. 
 
 II. 782 ini IlpioXao xaGiyv/jroio ^avoprog, 
 III. 918 ovmj rig rolog ini n^orepov yever 
 iLvSpciv. Cf. B 797=r 403, X 156 in' eipyjvyig 
 "in time of peace"; E 637,=^P 332 ini nporspuv 
 dv^p^nciv. 
 
 B. WITH THE DATIVE. 
 I. IN A LOCAL SENSE TO DENOTE: 
 
 SUPERPOSITION. 
 
 a) JVM the idea of rest or position '*iipoiV' or''over'\ 
 (a) Of place:— I. 549 in' dxporarr.ai hi 
 vv^Kpai I n>7Xfd5f$ xopv^iGiv iMufieov elaopo- 
 uGai. II. 735 in' dxpordryi [?itGGdSi] nscpvaGiv; cf. 
 A 484. — I. 178 in6?uGGev in (xppvGiv aiyiakolo; 
 similarly IV. 1298 vdovrog in' ocppmi naxrcoXolo 
 xvxvoi XLvrjGovGiv iov ^teXog. IV. 605 ^a^d'^oig 
 Im TEpGaivovrar, IV. 1503 xelro h' ini ^a^d- 
 ^m, Cf. T 151, * 853; y5, 38, v 119, 284, 
 
 4 ■• 
 
 - 175 - 
 
 etc. — Noteworthy is I. 497 rii-ihv K ojg yala 
 xai oi'paro^ rM S-dXaacra, | ro npii' in' d'/.TiyjAoiGi 
 jiifi GwapT^poTu i-iop^Yi I veix8og i^ oAoolo hiexpi^ev 
 ducpig exaGTa; cf. I. 946; also E 141; ^ 389, ^ 47. 
 
 {fi) Of tlie object: — II. 1103 in' dxpor- 
 droiGiv driGvpog dxpefioveGGiv; similarly 11.1148, 
 1273 nsnrdfievov T^aGtoLGiv ini hpvog dxpsfiov- 
 6GGLV. In II. 481 71 cm \hpvi] n')v7^6v aidva 
 Tpi^eGxe [a^uaSpi'd^], evi would seem more 
 natural: cf A.J. P., XVII. 31.— II. 487 'kui^Yiia 
 l>e^aL in arrw [/i?6)^c3] lepd\ a similar example 
 is II. 496 pi^ov in iG'^apo^iv, III. 218 
 'XakxeriGiv ini yXv^iheGGiv dp>7pet [^pty;c6$]; cf. 
 2 275. — IV. 955 opSog ini gteTley} rvniSog . . . 
 ciiAov ipsLGag. III. 1158 V^e 6' ini x^afiaXoj 
 G(pe?LaL I. 435 xalov ini G^i^YiGtv. Cf. A 462, 
 240; X 273, 459, e 59, etc. 
 
 (y) Of vehicles: — III. 877 ;j;pi;(iftof$ . . . 
 i^' apixaGLV iGry^vla; cf Z 354, A 600, P 459. 
 In IV. 85 ini vyji <pevyo)U8v, the dative seems 
 to be instrumental; cf.fi 414. 
 
 (5) Of parts of the body: — I. 219 in' 
 dxpordroiGL noSup (on tiptoe); also II. 90. — 
 IV. 1403 fivlai nv^oftevoiGLV i^' eXxegl nopGaiv- 
 ovro. IV. 1404 'EGnEpiSEg xE^aXalg Im ;^apa$ 
 iX^ovGat dpyv:pEag ^av^iiGL Xty egtevov. IV. 172 
 ini ^av^YiGL napYi'iGLV rM ^Er6no) | . . . I^ev 
 IpEV^og, I. 946 TEGGapEg aivordripGLV ini 
 
— 176 — 
 
 nXevprig dpapvlai [xdpsg'] III. 167 ini ael^aOL 
 vyjog . . . Xsloxwhoi, Cf. 436, K 26, 91, 
 A 623, H 419, 102, 393, P 210; v 60, p 90, 
 a 378, X 102, etc., also h. Merc. 388. 
 
 b) With verbs 0/ moiioH {construdio praeg7ians) : 
 (a) Of place:— I. 1104 ^oi;paTa . . . btu 
 ^riyiuvL (3d?.G)aiv; similarly XL 430, IV. 902.— 
 
 II. 365-366 ini neipaaiv aiyiaXolo \ olxtyi em 
 npoSX^ri pool ''ATivog nora^olo \ heivov ipevyovrai. 
 I. 1194 ini x^ovi ^-^xe fpaphpyjv; similarly IV. 
 523. — IV. 1555 in' d?.?.oSan^ nepocjvreg [yaiYi]. 
 I. 453 ini yj^a^ud^om . . . ^vXXdSa x^^^^^^^^oi. 
 Cf. E 729, Z 273, 303, 473, A 161, N 654, X 60, 
 n 487; L 284, X 315, 60, 348, x 387, etc. 
 
 {(d) Of the object:— I. 329 iX:^o^i8voig ini 
 Xai(peaLV rM xai laTu \ xexXi^iho) . . . iSptoovro, 
 I. 365 and 5' //^/ar' . . . vyji^aavro Xelg) ini 
 nXara^i^vi, I. 376 xXlvav ini np6rr,aL <pdXay^iv. 
 
 III. 1286 eyxog enyi^sv . . . in oifidxo). IV. 
 124 ^ Ini [<|)>7yw] xc5ag ^el3?.yjro. IV. 187 
 [xGkzg] r^ 5' ini tpapog \ xd^l3a7.8. IV. 717 ehev 
 ini ^earolGLv . . . ^povoiaiv. Cf Z 213, H 60, 
 A 371, * 18, ^s 876; ^ 422, n 408, r 101, etc. 
 Under this category seems to belong II. 1285 
 v^' ixelevaev in' svvairiaiv ipvaoai, Cf A 485; 
 also Haggett, p. 46. 
 
 ^ (y) Of parts of the body:— I. 517 Tioi/Sag 
 . . . ini re yX6aa^aL x^ovro aiiofiivaig, 11. 104 
 
 t 
 
 ■ 
 
 — 177 — 
 
 cSfiOLatv in' d^^repotai xeda^yi, 11. 220 in' 
 o^^a:^ fiolmv. 'Epivvg Xa^ ini^yj. III. 1159 
 ipeiaafihyj Xatii ini x^^pi napsiriv; similarly IV. 
 693.— III. 1227 €716 xpari x6pvv ^ero. III. 1393 
 nlnrov . . . in dyoaru) xai n?i8vpolg. IV. 44 
 nenXov in b^pvoiv . . . arei^ia^evyi. Cf F 336, 
 E 743, E 165, 102, 480, n 137, * 396, 727; 
 a 364, S 213, x 123, o 230, etc. 
 
 PROXIMITY. 
 
 (a) On the border of bodies of water: — 
 
 I. 554 no2.iYi S' ini xvfiaTog dyii reyye noSag. 
 
 II. 505 norafio) em Ttoifiaivovaiv. I. 1321 ini 
 npoxoYiOL Kioto . . . nenporai . . . (lolpav dva- 
 nX^aetv; similarly II. 972; III. 67; IV. 615.— 
 IV. 251 ini pYjyyXaiv eSeLf^iav [eSog']. I. 54 in 
 'Afi^pvaaoto poYiaiv . . . rexev, similarly I. 309. 
 — I. 36 yeivaro Stvyjevrog i<p' vSaaiv 'AmSavolo; 
 similarly I. 537; II. 658; III. 875; IV. 1309.— 
 Cf E 36, 479, 598, Z 15, H 86, 133, 490, 
 501, K 287, A 712, M 168, n 719, P 263, T 390^ 
 4> 87; o 442, u 82, etc. 
 
 (^) Of other localities:— III. 1033 nvpxaiyiv 
 ei vYiYiaag iTti /Jo^po). IV. 691 i(p' iariYi di^avre 
 l^avov. III. 235 rri 6" em [^eaaav:ioi] no?iXai 
 Six2.iSeg . . . ^Xafioi r' eoav. IV. 1272 in' 
 oiYixeaat ^daaeiv. III. 679 ini yaiyjg neipaoi 
 vaierdeiv; similar examples are: IV. 1173,1225. 
 
f^ 
 
 -178- 
 
 1565, 1595. — IV. 1158 v^dvaiov ini Ttfo^o^Yiotv 
 aeiSov. IV. 1605 ini aroiidreaai x^T^^va . . . 
 xporeovrai. — ^IV. 1613 aire [axar3at] axoXiolg 
 ini VEio^i xevrpoig . . . 5(;|^dG)VTo. — Cf. B 788, 
 r 153; a 196, /3 419, 8 579, $ 52, 153, t 105, 
 284, X 461, etc. 
 
 (y) Of the occupation: — I. 730 in d<pyiro 
 fJl.i8V0L Ipy w " sitting at or around the immortal 
 work". Cf. A 175, 258; n 111; also Eurip. 
 Ale. 361, 439. Similar to this is IV. 1658 in' 
 iper/iolaiv [yjfievoi], 
 
 OTHER LOCAL USES ARE THOSE WHICH DENOTE: 
 
 (a) The limit: — II. 112 ogov S' ini Up^an 
 "i. e. skin-deep". IV. 938 dvaaxo[ievai Xevxolg 
 ini yovvaai ne(ag. 
 
 (/3) The direction towards or against: — 
 III. 444 in avru 5' ofifiara xovpyj , . . cxo/iivYi; 
 similarly III. 1022. Cf. A 88; a 364, n 439, 
 ^ 358, etc.— III. 284 [^Epwg] yXv^iSag ... V 
 ini MyiSeiri; cf. III. 276 ini (pop^doLV olarpog \ 
 reTiTisrai, — II. 285 vyiaoLOiv em nXoTipcTt 
 XLXovreg. Cf. T 283, etc. 
 
 {y) The motion over: — IV. 952 nifine 
 ini xvfiaatv. Cf. B 6; >; 264. 
 
 Examples of a figurative local use are: 
 1. 1140, III. 497; IV. 1197. Cf. A 55, K 46; 
 B 427, ^ 554, V 209, etc. 
 
 ^ - 
 
 — 179 — 
 
 a. IN A TEMPORAL SENSE. 
 
 (a) Of a particular point in time: — I. 934 
 ini vvxri II. 453 in' jj^art; similarly IV. 977. 
 — Cf. K 48, N 234, T 110, 229; ^ 105, etc. 
 Here belongs I. 260 ini npofio^at xiovrov ^^at 
 the departure of those going". * Cf. SchoL: r^ 
 i^oSu ruv dpiareuv. 
 
 (/3) Of succession in time: — II. 475 in* 
 ijfiaTi 6' ^fiap 6p6p6i. II. 633 arovoeaaav in' 
 yjfxaTL vvxra ^vXdaau; cf. 11.622,947; IV. 1632. 
 Homer has no parallel. Akin to the preceding 
 examples are the following, most of which 
 refer to the order in which the Argonauts 
 enlisted: I. 40 ini rolci . . . no?iv<py!i.iog Ixavev) 
 similarly 1. 53, 86, 90, 95, 115, 133, 179, 190, 
 740, 1046; 11. 792, 955.— Cf. H 163-167, * 355, 
 401, 514; i; 162, 185, etc. Different are the 
 examples 
 
 OF GEOGRAPHICAL SUCCESSIONS: 
 
 a) With verbs 0/ motion, '' after' \ '' next to'': 
 
 I. 932 inx rri ['A^iSu^ xai 'A^apvihog . . . 
 nova . . . napri^ei^ov. II. 357 ini rii [d;cp>2] 
 Ttapavela^e xo:^vovg Ila^T^yovuiV', cf. also IL 
 654, 1017, 1247; IV. 564, 570. This use, as 
 well as the next, is not Homeric. 
 
 b) With verbs of rest denoting the position ''beyond'', 
 
 II. 379 T>7 h" ini [dxpYi] Moaavpoixoi . . . 
 vifiovrat. II. 397-398 i^eiyjg Si ^dnetpeg ini 
 
il 
 
 — i8o — 
 
 acphi [Bej^fctpoKTt] vaierdovaiv] Bv^yjpeg 5' inl 
 rolGiv. 
 
 OF ACCESSION, ACCUHULATION OR ADDITION: 
 
 I. 297 en a/iyeGLV aXyog apoio, IL 81 in' 
 dX^6> 5' dXXo; arirai Sovnog. Notice the 
 alliteration in the last two cases. Similar 
 examples are: I. 811, 1064; II. 1044; III. 125, 
 178, 1284; IV. 411, 447, 1188, 1274. Cf. I 639, 
 H 130; y 113, yi 120-121, 216. 
 
 OF THE CAUSE. 
 
 I. 286-287 w em noX2,yiv\ dyXaLYjv xai xv8og 
 e'^ov ndpog, (L em fiovvo) \ {.drp^v npdrov eT^vaa 
 xai vararov. II. 860 oXol) ini nyifian xyjSog 
 eXovro, III. 643 ini afperepoig dx^ovoa Ttaiai; 
 cf. IV. 995 eolg ini naioi ydvva^ai. III. 692 
 fiY^ h^ dXeyeivov Jc^' vldai x^6og eXoLO. III. 1056 
 in aiVci I . . . akexoiev d'^'kri^ovg. III. 1254 
 yYi^oavvoL . . , in iTincopiioiv de^Xov. IV. 8 
 GtvyepG) ini . . . de^Xo) . . . xexo^^evog. IV. 
 994 ini ^e g^lgl xayx<^'Xdaaxev . . . noKig, IV. 
 1294 olxTLGro} ^avdro) em. IV. 1495 Kdv^ov 
 enetpvev ini pviveGGiv. IV. 1604 in^ av^^vL 
 yavpog. Cf. A 162, I 492, H 67; y 549, ^ 43, 
 n 19, G 414, i; 358, 374, <?> 376, o) 91. 
 
 OF THE CONDITION OR ATTENDANT 
 CIRCUMSTANCE. 
 
 I. 252 in' dyMtri (^lotolo, "with the joy of 
 life". I. 422 in anvi^ovi [loip^, "with good 
 
 I. •*" ■ - 
 
 
 — i8i — 
 
 luck". I. 514 op^olGiv in' ovaGiv 'Ipeueovreg^ 
 "with eager ears"; cf. III. 1260.— I. 652 ini 
 nvoLYi [3opeao; cf. I. 1013. — I. 767 Syjpoi^ nep 
 in eXni^i ^yiYjGaio, II. 205 d3?LyjxP^ ^^ ^^^ 
 x6f.iari xexXir dvavhog. IV. 711 (xel'/uxTpd re 
 VYj^paT^iYiGiv xalev in sv^^jTiiiGL: cf. IV. 1599 
 oLfia 6' evx^d2.YiGLV. IV. 1305 dvyjvvGTo) in 
 oce^/lco. IV. 1455 8iepolg ini x^i'keGLV nnev 
 tavMg. Cf. N 485, 2 501, T 181; n 99, etc. 
 
 OF THE PURPOSE. 
 
 I. 425 ini (3ovGiv l^uGaG^y^v, "they girded 
 themselves for the purpose of killing the oxen". 
 III. 403 in o^veioiGiv eSy^re. IV. 1547 Op<p£vg 
 xex?yer 'An6?.X(dvog rptnoSa . . . vogto} em 
 ^letXia ^eG^at. IV. 1430 i<p' ofxerepoiGiv ovetap \ 
 Sevp' e^ioTitv xa[idroLGtv, Cf. I 602, K 304, 
 * 574; G 44. 
 
 OF THE PERSON OR THING UPON WHICH 
 SOHETHINQ DEPENDS. 
 
 I. 713 elvat in' dfi^i. III. 507 ini xaprei 
 XeLpcdv. IV. 545 xoipaveovrog in 6(ppvGL l^avGi- 
 ^0010. This use is post-Homeric. 
 
 IN A HOSTILE SENSE, **AGAINST", *«UPON*\ 
 
 I. 1025 ini g^lgi ;|^fipag aetpai^; cf. II. 92. 
 — II. 5 o(7t' ini xai ^etvoiGiv detxea ^eG(idv 
 e^yjxev, "who imposed an unjust law even upon 
 strangers". IL 69 in" dXj{.riXom fievog ^epov. 
 III. 1351 bhovTag ^yjyei ^y^pevriiGLV in dvSpoGiv. 
 
- I82 - 
 
 IV. 7 ^6?j)v alnvv ini a^iat fiyirioLaaxev, cf. IV. 
 462. Other examples are: I. 42; II. 1038; IV. 
 448, 971, 1087, 1101, 1665. For Homer com- 
 pare: A 382, F 15, 132, A 178, E 14, 630, A 293, 
 442, n 608, * 362; 8 822, o 182, etc. 
 
 IN A FRIENDLY SENSE, ••FOR". 
 
 I. 612 e^op 3' ini XyiidSeaaiv rpyj^vv Ipov, 
 III. 28 xovpyjv AlYjreu ^fX^at . . . in ^Irjaovi; 
 cf. III. 143. — III. 708 a^^ in aX?iyi?Lr,ai 
 (mutually) Secrar yoov. III. 742 in dvepi 
 (lyiridaa^ai. Cf. A 162, I 492; n 19. 
 
 With a verb expressing a hental attitude 
 towards another ptrson. 
 
 III. 405 ia^?.olg yap in dvfipdciv oijrL 
 
 (leyaipci. Cf B 270; a 414, x 412. 
 
 C. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 1. IN A LOCAL SENSE TO DENOTE: 
 
 a) Motion '7<?*' or ** towards*' a place or object, 
 
 I. 832 ini vria xi6p; similarly II. 71, 295, 
 814, 835, III. 826, 1165, 1318, 1345. Cf. 
 A 12, 371, B 8, 17, 168, etc. — In three passages 
 (I. 523, 910; 11. 933) Apollonius uses ini vyja 
 ^aivsiv in the sense of "going on board", for 
 which Homer uses ini vyjog ^aiveiv. The 
 phrase ini v^a ^aiveiv in Homer means only 
 ^'to go to the ship". — Other examples are: 
 L 849 ini G^ea S6fiaT ayeaxov; cf. I. 872; III. 
 36. — I. 881 fiiXiGGat . . . aXTuoT irC okT^v 
 
 « -•< 
 
 7 
 
 ",i "ill. 
 
 - 183- 
 
 xapnov . . . nenoryjuevar, cf. 684. — I. 925 
 l^epovYjGov em npovj^ovGav Ixovto. 1. 1298 
 yivGQiV ini yalav Ixovro; similar are: II. 404; 
 
 III. 891; IV. 631, 1761. Cf I 619,2 240, ^V 205, 
 X 55, ^ 43, 91, 88, 492, p 205, r 170, etc. 
 The examples with animate beings that fall 
 under this category are: 11. 677 dvep^ofievog 
 T)7/l' in dneipova S^fiov, cf. ^ 43. — 11. 1046 
 YIX6 5' in olcdvov ray(^LGr6v [SeXog. This is the 
 nearest approach to the Homeric use with 
 persons, as B 18, E 590, etc. — In 11. 371 it 
 seems best to read In instead of in. 
 
 b) Motion upon, 
 III. 803 iv^e^evyj S' ini yovvar obvpero; cf. 
 
 IV. 1046. — III. 1334 ?.alov em CTf/^apcj meaag 
 
 nohi. III. 1373 ini yalav . . .nlnrov, IV. 885 
 
 ^alvov ini xXyjlSag; cf Z 386, 442.— IV. 1516 
 
 axpy^v in axav^ov iveGtYipi^ato . . . rapGov nohog, 
 
 Cf. r 270; a 146, etc. 
 
 c ) Limit or a point of measurement * * as far as' ' , 
 
 ''up to". 
 
 1. 565 in r.Xaxdryjv ipvGavreg [Xtva], 1. 744 
 ix 5f ol &110V nrix^v em Gxatov ^vvoxyj xe^d^^aGro. 
 II. 791 6(Tt' ini 'Pyjliaiov npo^odg. III. 412 
 ra^idv ini re'^Gov. IV. 947 xoXnov in i^vag 
 ELXi^aGat. IV. 1401 and xparog 8e xeXaiVYjv 
 d;^pi$ €71* axvyjGriv xelr dnvoog. II. 1609 far' 
 ini vYihvv I . . . fiaxdpEGGL . . . elxto. Cf. F 12 
 A 7; ^ 120. 
 
 I 
 
— i84 — 
 
 M 
 
 I 
 
 d) Extent or motion over a space. 
 I. 424 ml novrov iXevaofie^'; cf. IV. 1318 €>' 
 vypY^v TtXal^ofievoi. — 11. 975 pie^pa . . . ini yalav 
 lYjai; III. 743 vv^ . . . ini yalav aysv xve^ag. 
 IV. 183 7(0$ fiev ^' enl yalav ixiSvaro, III. 
 1054 GTieipofiEvidv d(j)tog SvocpepYjv ini (iidXov 
 oidvrcjv, Cf. H 88, e 1, K 27, 11 695; y 105, 
 S 381, etc. Here belongs the example denot- 
 ing direction -'over": 1.631 ndnraivov ini 
 nlarvv . . . novrov. Cf. A 350, U^ 143; e 84, 
 158, etc. — Noteworthy is IV. 1357 i^' vypriv 
 ErXyjuev; cf. ^ 370 novrov in drpvyerov xaxd 
 
 ndax^eiv, 
 
 e) Position, 
 
 I. 930 ini hs^td yalav e^ovreg; cf. II. 347; 
 IV. 1621. — II. 1269 e^ov S' in dpLOrepd . . . 
 KavxaGov. Cf. E 355, N 326; y 171, f 277. 
 This use is common in military language. 
 
 A figurative local use is seen in IV. 618 
 ini yyj^oavvag rpdnero voog; cf. r422. — IV. 678 
 rd 6' ini orixag ^yayev al6v; cf. B 687, T 113, 
 2 602.— IV. 1773 ini x:^vrd neipa^' Ixdvo) \ 
 vfiErepcdv xafidrcdv; cf ^ 226, ^ 338, -^ 248. 
 
 J. IN A TEHPORAL SENSE TO DENOTE THE 
 
 EXTENT OF TlflE. 
 
 I. 605 iTii xvE^g, ^^till night". I. 793 ini 
 Xpovov," for a time"; similar are IV. 960, 1255, 
 1545. — IV. 1293 vvxr^ ini naaav xai ^dog^ 
 "for a whole night and day", IV. 1632 cV 
 
 I 
 
 c'J 
 
 -185- 
 
 ^^ap, "by day". For examples like ini Syjpov 
 see the chapter on the prepositions in adverbial 
 phrases.— Cf. B 299; rj 288, 494, etc. 
 
 3. OF PURPOSE. 
 
 II. 1129 iTii xf>^og/'on business". III. 375 
 ini xwag . . . veeai^ai, "to go in quest of the 
 fleece". III. 389 rig ^' dv roaov olhiia nepr^aat 
 rT^LYi ixcdv o^velov ini ;cTepa$. Cf. ft 43; y 421, 
 p 295, also Aesch. Sept. 861, Ag. 1535. 
 
 — (lerd — 
 
 Originally /j-^rd meant between or amoncr Cf. Brug- 
 
 mann, Griecli, Gram.,'* Sec. 503 From these local 
 meanings developed the sociative or comitative idea, 
 in which /^sra is equivalent to Tf'». In prose 
 Aiera (c. gen.) in a sociative sense restricted 
 the use of <rov to such an extent that in some of 
 the Orators <j''^v is practically an unknown quantity. 
 Isocrates never uses it ; Andocides has it only once ; 
 Aeschines once ; Antiphon and Lysias each have 
 it twice. Cf. T. Mommsen, pp. 3-7, where the 
 facts for the rise of li-^rd c. gen. and the fall 
 of <r6v in prose are admirably set forth. — Apollonius 
 avoids At£r« with the genitive altogether. Homer has 
 only five examples, for which compare Mommsen, p. 
 52: Monro, Sec. 196; Vogrinz, p. 219. 
 
 As Aterd c. gen. is chiefly a prose construction, 
 so /Jterd c. dat. is almost exclusively an epic usage. 
 It is foreign to all departments of prose ; while in 
 the drama we find a mere trace of it. Cf. Aeschylus, 
 Choe. 365, Pers. 613; Sophocles, Phil, mo; Euri- 
 pides, Hec. 355; Aristophanes, Av. 251, Lys. 
 1283, Ran. 336. — Apollonius has always the plural 
 after iitrd with the dative. Homer has six examples 
 with the singular of collective nouns. Cf. Mommsen, 
 
If 
 
 — i86 — 
 
 p. 44. In as far as the dative of the person pre- 
 dominates in the Argonautica, our author stands 
 closer to the Iliad than to the Odyssey, in which the 
 dative of things is more numerous. 
 
 Merd c. acc. was used primarily with plurals and 
 collective nouns after verbs of motion to denote info 
 the midst of, among; then in the sense of to with 
 words like city, ship, etc. This last use, as that with 
 proper names of countries, is an extension on the part of 
 Apollonius. In» Homer iierd is sometimes used with 
 the accusative without a verb of motion. Cf. Monro, 
 Sec. 195. This does not occur in Apollonius. Our 
 author differs also from his predecessor in the frequency 
 of ix^rd with the dative and with the accusative. 
 Homer has it 215 times with the dative and 164 
 times with the accusative. Apollonius reversed this 
 numerical relation, using it 36 times with the dative 
 and 47 times with the accusative. 
 
 A. WITH THE DATIVE. 
 
 I. IN THE LOCAL SENSE **AMONQ": ONLY OF 
 
 PERSONS. 
 
 I. 17 aXXohanolai ^er^ dvSpdai; similarly 
 I. 648, 779; III. 341, 891; IV. 481, 616, 1209, 
 1640; also I. 679; IV. 1102. Cf. E 86, n 493, 
 570, * 476, etc.— I. 979 rolg ^era Satr' dXiyvve. 
 III. 544 roiov Inog fierd naat . . . dyo^evaev^ 
 similarly II. 144; III. 90, 505, 889; IV. 56, 189. 
 Cf. K 250; n 336, etc.— III. 908 haadue'^a fisTa 
 a^iaiv, "among ourselves". Other examples 
 are: IV. 975, 1418. Cf. N270, 4>122; t 418, etc. 
 
 J. IN THE SOCIATIVE 5ENSE «*WITH": ONLY OF 
 
 PERSONS. 
 
 I. 303 fjter^ d^^mo?^iaiv sxriTjog fiifive 
 iofioig; cf X 204 and Mommsen, p. 43. — I. 340 
 
 V -I 
 
 t 
 
 — 187 -- 
 
 avv^Bciag re fisrd ^dvoiai (iaXecj^ai. Cf. I 434, 
 A 428. Other examples are: II. 536, 757; 
 IV. 6, 1465. Cf K 208; i 335, etc. 
 
 3. IN THE CONCOniTANT SENSE ••WITH": ONLY 
 
 OF THINGS. 
 
 I. 223 hoveoi^ro ^erd nvoiYiciv e^mpai. III. 
 1214 SpvivoiGi fxsrd nrop^oiCi [^iare^dvcdvroJi. 
 Compare also IV. 423, 427; for Homer ^ 367; 
 ^ 118. 
 
 More singular is the phrase ^isrd (ppealv 
 (I. 463; II. 952; HI. 18,629; IV. 56?), where, 
 according to our idiom, we render fierd by 
 "in". Cf Haggett, p. 49. 
 
 B. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 I. IN A LOCAL SENSE 'TO", LIKE irp6s: 
 
 a) 0/ persons. 
 
 (a) In the singular: — III. 25 hfiev ^srd 
 Kvnpiv. Schol. npog rvjv K. — III. 1138 veea^ac 
 kriv fierd fiYjrepa. IV. 77 fierd rrivye [Myj^eiav] 
 . . . iXdaaxov. Cf K 63, 73, N 252, 297; also 
 E 152, 614, etc. 
 
 {(i) In the plural: — III. 1148 /wer' dfi^i- 
 noTiovg [copro veea^aL], IV. 1499 fi^Xa fierd 
 a<p6ag . . . ixo^taaav. Cf A 222, K 149, etc. 
 Here belongs the example of a collective noun: 
 III. 434 Ipx^o vvv (^e^' ofitXov, Cf A 478, 
 E 21, T 47, etc. Similar is the example in 
 which fierd denotes direction towards: III. 951 
 
T 
 
 — i88 — 
 
 cf. fi 247. 
 
 d) Of place or object. 
 
 The examples under this heading have, 
 with the exception of II. 1121, the noun in 
 the singular. In this respect Apollonius 
 differs entirely from Homer, who never uses 
 the noun in the singular: — 
 
 (a) With proper names of countries: — 
 II. 424 ^fxd 5' Alar a?ag Ttofin^eg saovrai. 
 Schol.: y; ^erd awl T)7g Ttpdg. Cf. II. 1188 
 vsBG^ai . . . bIt6 ^bt Alav, \ elre fxer d^veiYiv 
 Mov noXiv 'Opxofievolo, III. 13 f.i6^' 'E;iXd5a 
 xuag ayoirro', similarly IV. 349, 369. — 111.1242 
 Ka?.avp6iav fiera . . . veiaero. 
 
 {[3) With appellatives: — I. 137 laav fiera 
 vyja; also I. 701, 1255; III. 1187; IV. 1766.— 
 II. 461 i^aviovra ^erd nroXiv; similarly II. 762, 
 892, 1095, 1189; III 331, 621.— II. 1172 xiov 
 ^erd vYiov *Ap>70$; cf. III. 914. — IV. 57 ^erd 
 Adr^top dvrpov dXvaxcd. IV. 123 fie^' lepov 
 a?i(Jog hovro. IV. 289 ^er' "Ioviyiv a)^ [idXkBC, 
 also IV. 630, 844.— IV. 720 ^srd yalav eyjv 
 xai ^cj^iar' lovreg. — 11. 1121 (ler^ rtovag ^dXe. 
 a. OF SUCCESSION IN ORDER OF PLACE, **BEVOND". 
 
 II. 367 ^erd rov 5' dy;^6ppoo$ ^Iptg . . . 
 tXiaasrai eig avla. Closely allied to this is 
 the use 
 
 ♦x 
 
 'Mum. 
 
 189 
 
 3. OF SEQUENCE IN ORDER OF TIME, **AFTER", 
 
 I. 698 ^srd trivye dz^wpro 'T-vj/tTtiiX)?; 
 similarly II. 898, 1011. Cf. K 516; 147, p 336. 
 —I. 1309=IV. 1211 iierd x^ovov. Cf x ^^2; 
 also h . Merc. 126. 
 
 4. OF PURPOSE, ''IN QUEST OF", «*AFTER", 
 
 LIKE ^ir(. 
 
 The only example of this use in Apollonius 
 is iiETd xQKig in I. 4; II. 211, 873; III. 58. Cf. 
 N 247, T 347; a 184, n 151 (of the person); 
 h. Cer. 106. 
 
 An example of a figurative local use is 
 ^er Ixvia vha^at in I. 741; III. 447. Cf, 2 
 321; (3 406. 
 
 — Ttapd — 
 
 Form : — Besides rcapd (24), which becomes rcdpa (2) 
 by anastrophe, Tzap' (8) by elision, r«^ (i) by apocope, 
 Apollonius has the form nap at five times. Homer 
 has twelve examples of 7:apat. 
 
 Use: — Of all the prepositions, ra^a is one of the 
 best to show how close Apollonius drew the line 
 between poetic and prosaic usages. In prose 
 Ttapd c. gen. predominates ; in epic poetry it is com- 
 paratively rare, in Apollonius even more so than in 
 Homer, as appears from the following figures; 
 
 Apollonius : gen. 4, dat. 16, ace. i8. 
 
 Homer: ** 67, " 219, " 133. 
 
 Orators: *♦ 974, ** 607, " 328. 
 
 Polybius: " 554, " 416, '* 491. 
 
 Again, in prose rrapd is largely restricted to a per- 
 sonal use, or to animate beings in general. Upon 
 
— IQO — 
 
 191 — 
 
 this fact was based the maxim of the old gram- 
 marians " ^ Ttapa Iful'o^aiv iariv,'* In epic poetry, how- 
 ever, it is used much more frequently of the thing 
 than of the person. ApoUonius has in all only six 
 instances of the person (3 c. gen. and 3 c. dat. ) 
 
 Furthermore, in prose a number of metaphoric 
 uses have grown around itapa; cf Kiihner-Gerth, 
 Sec. 440; Lutz, pp. 145-154; Krebs. pp. 51-58. In 
 epic poetry these usages are rare. In ApoUonius 
 they are practically conspicuous by their absence. 
 Only one example occurs with the genitive and one 
 with the accusative. 
 
 Meaning^: — The radical sense of rrapd is destde. 
 This meaning appears most distinctly in the adverbial 
 use of the preposition. In case-construction it is 
 modified according to the general nature of the cases. 
 With the genitive it is ablatival, from the side of, 
 French de ckez\ with the dative it is locatival, 
 by the side of, beside, near; with the accusative 
 it denotes a) the goal of motion, to the side of, 
 and b) motion or extent, alongside of, 
 
 A. WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 
 (a) Of a person: — 11. 1096 kvkovto Ttap' 
 
 Mrirao Ki^ratoi;; cf. B 787, N 211, etc.— III. 38 
 
 Ttapai A(6$ Yiy^v axoiTiv; cf. 5, 175; Hes. Th. 
 
 348. — Un-Homeric is the metaphoric example 
 
 of hearing something from a person: II. 417 
 
 aonaaiug xe Ttapd aeo xal ro ^eiYjv. 
 
 (/3) Of an object:— III. 568 ''Apyog fiev 
 Ttapd vYjog . . . ar€X2.h^ii; cf. N 744, H 28, 46, 
 T 143; y 431, etc. 
 
 k < 
 
 fi 
 
 B. WITH THE DATIVE. 
 
 (a) Of a person: — ^I. 455 napd Se a^ici 
 ^ivpt exeiro eihara xal (ae^v ylapor; cf. © 504; 
 X 9. — IV. 223 Ttdp Se ol sy^og . . . reravvaro; 
 cf. Z 43, 4> 547; v 387, etc. In II. 503 TtporepoLai 
 nap' dv^pdaiv, the preposition is used partly in 
 a local and partly in a temporal sense. 
 
 {(3) Of an object or of a place: — I. 319 
 'ApywT? . . . Ttapd vyji fihovreg; similarly I. 855; 
 IV. 849, 1122. Cf A 329, H 383, 345, K 35, 
 256, etc. — I. 530 G^erepoiai Ttap evreaiv 
 ibpiOGivro; cf. H 135. — I. 694 = 11. 61 Ttapd 
 Ttocaiv; cf N 617, 280, etc. II. 309 Ttap 
 kfxdpYi Yiaro yspaiog) similarly II. 158, 498; 
 III. 1193. Cf 562; h 449, ^ 239, 385, ^ 71. 
 — II. 868 ov^IfifipaaioiOL Ttap' vSaOiv' AarvTtdXaLa 
 rixre; similarly IV. 132, 973. Cf. A 475; ^ 97. 
 — In 1. 458 Ttapd Sairl xal olvo) repTtvc^g 8^l/l6G)vro, 
 the idea is temporal as well as local. Cf. y 37. 
 
 C. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 ApoUonius has no instance of Ttapd with 
 a person in the accusative. The example in 
 III. 486 is one of tmesis, not of case-construc- 
 tion. Homer, however, uses occasionally Ttapd 
 with a person in the accusative, as E 837, 
 A 592, 2 143, fl 169; y 469, 5 51, etc. 
 
 The uses in ApoUonius are: 
 
— 192 — 
 
 (a) Of motion ^Ho", ^^to the side of":— 
 I. 217 ayidv . . . Trapa ^6ov "E^ylvoio, II. 906 
 Ttapd 7tpo;j^od$ nora^olo yjXv^ov. II. 1003 
 XaU(iG)v Ttapd yalav Ixovto. III. 1276 Ttapd 
 X^l'^og iXiaao^evov norafiolo, I V. 825 Ttapd l^xvX- 
 X>7$ OTvyepop xev^f^iC^va veea^at. Cf. 220, etc. 
 
 {(3) Of motion ''alongside of':— I. 1279 
 (popeovro napal UoOLSj^iov dxpY^v. 11. 621 Ttapai 
 Ei^vviSa yalav vyja , , . aevev, II. 946 Ttapd 
 novXvv . . . i^^avvov . . . | aiyiaXov. III. 1252 
 xoij/e Ttap' ovpiaxov. IV. 324 axdneUv ndpa . . . 
 r^(id4^avro, IV. 564 Ttapat Kepxi;pai^ txoj/ro. 
 IV. 787 Ttapd XxiTiXy^g axons'Kov jiiyav r^Si 
 XdpvlSSiv SsLvov ipevyofievyjv Sexerat oSog, i. e. 
 the road leads alongside of S. and Ch. Cf 
 X 127. — IV. 1578 Ttapd ;^epo'oi' kpyo^evot 
 i^vvsG^e, Cf A 166; ^( 89, etc. 
 
 (y) Of direction "towards" or ''upon": 
 
 III. 445 o^fiara . . . Ttapd ^iinapyjv axo^evYi . . . 
 xaXvnrpr^v, Cf * 603. 
 
 {h) Of extent "alongside of", *^near":— 
 I. 967 eladfiEvoL Ttapd ^Iva. II. 502 e?u)g ndpa 
 Uyjveiolo (i^Xa vifisiv. II. 507 At^vyjp ivefiovro 
 Ttapai Mvprumov alnog. Cf A 316, B 522, 
 711, Z 34, A 622, M 313; i 46, etc. 
 
 (e) In the metaphoric sense "contrary to": — 
 III. 613 Ttap' ahav, with which compare Ttapd 
 UvafiLv (N 787), Ttapd fiolpav (^ 509). 
 
 193 — 
 
 — Ttept — 
 
 Akin to dfupi in meaning and in case-construction 
 is Tre^oj (Sanskrit /t£r/, l,2Ltin per). The as never elided. 
 
 The original meaning of ^^^pt has been the subject 
 of quite a controversy. Cf. Delbriick, Vergl. Syn. 
 I Sec. 284 ; Vogrinz, Gram. d. hom. Dial., p. 225- 
 226. — In Apollonius, as in Homer, it shows the 
 meanings around^ and above, i. e. over and beyond, as 
 in Tztp\ TzdvTwv^ above all. The former meaning is 
 generally considered the original one, and I believe, 
 correctly. Secondary meanings are : about, for, con- 
 cerning, on account of and the like. 
 
 The most distinctive difference between epic poetry 
 
 and the other departments of literature is that in the 
 
 latter the use of T^spi c. dat. practically disappeared, 
 
 except in two sets of phrases ; viz. , in regard to 
 
 clothing and with verbs of fear. Even in these 
 
 expressions r.spi was not used much, since there was 
 
 a tendency for the accusative to encroach upon the 
 
 first, and the genitive upon the second usage. From 
 
 the Orators Lutz (p. 125), cites only one example to 
 
 which, however, two more are to be added; viz., 
 
 Ant. V. 6 (i) and I^ys. Frag. 52. Aristophanes 
 
 recognized that the construction was Homeric, as is 
 
 shown by his parody of it, apart from which he uses 
 
 it only four times. Cf. Sobolewski, p. 207. The 
 
 examples in tragedy are few, as also in Thucydides 
 
 and Xenophon. Poly bins has only one example of 
 
 Its pi Q, dat. against 11 14 c. gen. and 1819 c. ace. 
 
 In the use of Tt^pi^ Apollonius differs from Homer 
 
 in several details, as will be indicated. He shows 
 
 a special fondness for using it with the dative. 
 
 Homer has : gen. 79, dat. 85, ace. 72. 
 Apollonius has : " 19, •• 31, " 
 
 10. 
 
- 194 — 
 
 A. WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 I. IN THE LOCAL SENSE ••AROUND," ••ABOUT". 
 
 This use does not occur in prose and it is 
 rare in poetry. Homer has only two cases of 
 it, (f 63, 130) and ApoUonius has only two: II. 
 1131 elXv^a nspi ;tH^; cf* II. 1191. 
 
 J. IN THE METAPHORIC MEANINGS: ••ON ACCOUNT 
 OF", ••FOR", CONCERNING", ••ABOUT". 
 
 a) To denote the object of contention. 
 
 11. 141 fidpvavro ciSyipofpopov nepi yairig; 
 
 similarly III. 1057; IV. 1485, 1765, 1770. Cf. 
 
 M 170, P 157, 734, 2 265, *437; y403,(o515,etc. 
 
 b) To denote the object of thought, anxiety or fear, 
 
 I. 901 kyik^Bv nepL ^v^ov dpeiu \ loxoiv\ 
 
 III. 60 heihi^sv . . . Ttepi h' Alaovihao. IV. 492 
 
 vavTikiYig . . .Tftpt ^Yitioaaxov) also I. 1342; III. 
 
 688; IV. 1068, 1355. Cf. T 17, ^P 553; n 191, etc. 
 
 3. IN THE SENSE OF SURPASSING: ••ABOVE". 
 
 I. 65 M64.o$, ov 7i€pi ndvrov \ Ayiroi&yjq 
 i^'Me; similarly I. 830; II. 179; III. 304, 585. 
 Cf. A 287, 417, B831, 138,2 81; >? 108, etc. From 
 this usage developed expressions like nepi nok- 
 Xou Ttotaa^at, etc., which abound in the Orators. 
 
 Examples of Ttept c. gen. used after verbs 
 of saying and asking (a 135, 405, y 77; o 347, 
 etc.), and phrases like Ttept yLv%^v, "in words" 
 (0 284), Ttepi noii^v, *4n archery'' (^ 225), Ttspt 
 Tivo$ slihai (p 563), nepi nvog dxovetv (r 270), 
 are not found in ApoUonius. 
 
 fc»» 
 
 
 — I95-- 
 
 B. WITH THE DATIVE. 
 I. IN THE LOCAL SENSE: ••AROUND". 
 
 a ) With verbs of binding , faste7iing or putting around, 
 
 I. 379 Ttfpi GxaX^olGiv eSyjaav, III. 1224 
 nspl [I8V arrj^eaaiv haro ^6pyjxa; cf. also 1. 1020; 
 II. 57, 160, 1251; III. 867. For Homer com- 
 pare: r 330, 332, H 207, 43; ^ 528, etc. 
 
 b) With verbs of falling upon, or arowid. 
 
 II. 128 TiLTtrovra Ttspi a^iai. II. 833 
 [is^pvx^g Ss ^ou Ttepi xdnneae hovpi IV. 93 
 nepi yovvaai nenryjvlav. Cf A 303, 86, etc. 
 
 c) Wifh verbs of whirli7ig around, 
 
 IV. 936 EiXiOQQvuo 'i\pyw>7 Ttfpi vyi'l. Cf. 
 A 817, X 97. Also with the accusative in IV. 
 932, 1196, 1450.— IV. 1454 TOxpatT? ^vvai 
 Ttepi TtihaxL Stvaveaxov; for the accusative com- 
 pare IV. 1642, 1664. — Here belongs IV. 325 
 axoTteXop . . . c5 nspt 8yj Gx't^idv "larpog poov. 
 
 d) Examples ifi which the idea of surrouyiding jrom 
 all sides is especially promiuefit, 
 I. 389 nepi U G<pLV aiSvYj xrixie Tiiyvvg-y 
 similarly II. 162,323, 1173; III. 1019; IV. 953. 
 Cf P 133, ^V 598, n 96, etc. 
 
 2. IN THE HETAPHORIC SENSE: ••FOR", **0N 
 
 ACCOUNT OF". 
 
 a) To denote the object of contention. 
 IV. 549 dypav'koiaiv aks^o^evov nepl [Sovglp; 
 cf. n 568, P 4, 133; p 472. In IV. 1485 the 
 genitive is used in the same sense. 
 
— 196 — 
 
 ^) Of a negotiation, 
 III. 904 Ttfpi ^om\v vnear^; cf. li. Merc. 236. 
 ^r) In expressions of fear and anxiety. 
 
 II. 875 Uoc, Ttfpt vYii, III. 638 w^i . . . 
 ^fiVcj 4)pevf$ ^fpe^ovrai. IIL 1171 i^e?j)vro 
 TtEpia^ioLV. Cf. K 240. 
 
 d) To denote the object about which anger exists. 
 1. 1340-1342 oi Ttept Ttwedi \Lriki^v,\ ov be nepi 
 xredreaOL x^Tie^d^evog (leviyivag, \ olTlX irdpov 
 nspl ^Gytog. IV. 614 ;^6)6|Mfro$ nepi naiSL Cf.h. 
 Cer. 77. This use is post-Homeric; cf. Delbrueck, 
 Vergl. Syn. Vol. I. p. 712. 
 
 e) With a verb of asking, 
 
 III. 1155 nepi Ttaioiv . . . ipeBivev. Cf dii^i 
 c. dat. in 5 151, e 287; etc. 
 
 /) To denote the inner catise. 
 
 III. 865 ear eve . . . bhvvri nepi. IV. 440 nepi 
 yoLo (iiv dvdyxYi . . . hoaav ^eivoiciv ayec^ai. 
 Homer has no close parallel, but cf h. Cer. 429 
 bpenoiiYjv nepi xdpfiari [dv^ea]; also Pind. Pyth. 
 V. 58; Aesch. Pers. 696. Choe. 35. Noteworthy 
 is III. 1257 Ttfpi a^im (P 22). 
 
 C. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 ONLY LOCAL IN APOLLONIUS AS IN HOMER: 
 
 a) With verbs of motion^ chiefly eUifftrw and dtvebm, 
 
 IV. 932 heT^qTiveq . . . eXicduvtai nepi v^a; 
 similarly III. 1218; IV. 1196, 1450.— IV. 1642 
 nepi . . . Kpriryjv . . . Sivevovta; cf. IV. 1664. — 
 I. 538 nepi /3u)|u6v . . . nebov priacGiaL nofieaaiv, 
 Cf. A 448, M 297; 5 368, £ 308, g> 69, etc. Un- 
 Homeric seems to be IV. 436 3€a$ nepi vyiov 
 ix>7Tai,i.e. to < the neighborhood of> the temple. 
 
 .jf'" 
 
 — 197 — 
 
 b) With verbs of rest. 
 III. 216 [xtoi^e^] nepi rot^ovg e^eiyjg avex^ov, 
 IV. 321 nepi Aavpiov . . . vaLerdovteg. Cf. B 757, 
 M 177, 2 374; t 402. 
 
 — npog — 
 
 Homer uses rrpo^ 327 times in case-construction. 
 ApoUonius has it only 13 times. Like the later 
 Homeric imitators, he shows a preference for the 
 poetic form nori^ which he uses 7 times, against 2 
 examples of the other poetic form Trport and 4 ex- 
 amples (with cases) of the common form np6^, 
 Cf. La Roche, Wiener Studien, XXII., p. 49. — In 
 Homer t:ot{ and Trport are about equal in number, and 
 the two together amount to a little above one half 
 of 7tp6^, ApoUonius did not use r:p6>^ with the dative. 
 With the genitive he has it only in entreaties (three 
 times), and with the accusative only in the local 
 sense, except I. 684 (temp.). The Homeric examples 
 of TT/xi? c. ace. with verbs of speaking, and in the 
 hostile sense "against", were too common in prose 
 to be imitated by ApoUonius. His uses of T^po^ are : 
 
 A. WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 In entreaties: — II. 215 'hsfftou rrpd^ Ztjvo^ . . . Xtffffofiat; 
 similarly II. 1125; III 984. Cf. A 339; v 324, etc. 
 
 B. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 I. IN A LOCAL SENSE: "TO" "TOWARDS" "UPON". 
 
 I. 774 ^r^ 5' ifisvai TtpoTi d(TTu; similarly II. 8; III. 
 322, 1154; IV. 595, 1 1 16, 1399. Cf. rii6, J 108, 
 -^41; /? 342, etc.; also h. Ap. 8. 
 
 More noteworthy are the examples denoting, (a) 
 the extent "up to* or "as far as": II. 807 ^ort 
 (TTOfia SepfiwdovTo^; and (b) the direction "towards**: 
 IV. 311 TToTt poov [dvi^stv], Cf. E 605; At 81, etc. 
 2. IN A TEHPORAL SENSE. 
 
 I. 684 ffTuyepov TtoT\ yrjpa<^j for which there is but 
 one example in Homer; viz. /o 191 noT\ ^(rnepa. 
 
li. 
 
 — igg — 
 
 11 ! 
 
 It i 
 
 c / 
 VTtO 
 
 Form: — Morphologically otto is connected with 
 Sanskrit lipa and Latin s-2ib. The poetic form 
 oTzai occurs seven times in Apollonius, but only four 
 times in Homer. 
 
 Meaning: — As appears from the adverbial use, 
 the primary meaning of 07:0 is under. In case-con- 
 struction this meaning is modified to denote a) with 
 the genitive: motion/rom under or place under \ b) 
 with the dative : position under\ c) with the accu- 
 sative : aim, direction or motion towards and imder, 
 or extension under. — The metaphoric usages to 
 denote the author, the cause, the occasion, the accorn- 
 paniment, the instrument, the means and the like 
 are developments from the original ujider, in a local 
 sense. The most characteristic epic feature of (>tJ> is 
 its use with the dative to denote the agent, in place 
 of ^Tto with the genitive. Since in prose orJt c. gen. 
 predominates (Orators: gen. 1294, dat. 63, ace. 26), 
 Apollonius used it only thirteen times with this case, 
 and in these thirteen examples we find, as a further 
 offset to prose, the form l>T.ai six times. Noteworthy 
 is also the post- Homeric ^'>r.o vozn' (at night), which 
 seems to have started with Aesch. Ag. 1030 '^tto axtrnp . 
 
 A. WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 I. IN A LOCAL SENSE TO DENOTE. 
 
 (a) Motion "away from under": — I. 10 
 
 \nkhikov\ i^ecdwafv W Vkmc,, P 235; h 39, etc. 
 (/3) Place ''under": — 11.106 Imoank^voio... 
 7tA)7^f. II. 667 o^ftara Se a<pLv \ Ao^d napa- 
 arpofp^vrat imo ^vyov. II. 743 tzovtolo 3' hno 
 orevEL r^x^evrog, IV. 1611 vnai Xayorwr; 
 similarly IV. 1644 I'Ttai . . . revovrog, "under 
 the tendon". Cf. A 106, A 14, <& 15, etc. 
 
 K:f 
 
 <T 
 
 Ui 
 
 *«#■ 
 
 — 199 — 
 
 2. IN A METAPHORIC SENSE TO DENOTE: 
 
 (a) The agent: — IV. 641 naTuvrponocdvro 
 ^ecLg VTtO] similarly II. 847 Movaecdv vtw 
 yyjpvaaa^ai, Cf. 11 434; r 114, etc. 
 
 (/?) The cause:— II. 1232 vTtal I)i7t^g 
 av^wioreivsro', also III. 969. Cf.A423,T358,etc. 
 
 (y) The accompaniment: — 1. 538 (pop^iyyog 
 vTtai^ ''to the accompaniment of the lyre"; 
 similarly IV. 1157, 1192. Cf. 275, 2 492; also 
 h. XIX. 15; Hes. Sc. 278; Arist. Ach. 1001. 
 
 B. WITH THE DATIVE. 
 I. IN A LOCAL SENSE: 
 
 (a) Of rest or position: "under" or "in": — 
 
 I. 388 vno rponi^L . . . arevdxovro ^dTiayyeg; 
 cf. also I. 544, 956, 957, 1262; II 681, 707, 732, 
 797, 1086; III. 39, 119, 221, 287, 296, 371, 1023; 
 IV. 137, 313, 676, 765, 922, 944, 982, 1107, 1528. 
 For Homer compare B 307, A 44, P 371, etc. 
 
 {(i) Of motion implying subsequent rest 
 (constructio praegnans). II. 512 Xelpcdvog W 
 avrpotaLV xo^hc^ar, cf. Ill 281, IV. 1261, 1522; 
 Homer X 482; 5 297, etc. 
 
 a. IN A HEfAPHORlC SENSE TO DENOTE: 
 
 a) The agent, 
 I. 794 vii Q,vhpd(5i vaierai darv, cf. further 
 
 II. 783; III. 469, 1342; IV. 1398, 1758; Homer 
 E 646; y 235, 305, etc. — Here belongs II. 788 
 ifiu vno Ttarol haiiaaoev xal ^pvyag ; cf. Z 453. 
 
 i\ 
 
Y 
 
 200 
 
 b) The causey instrument or means, 
 1. 114 uTt' sipeaiYiatv inEipi^aavro ^aXdaGYjg; 
 cf. II. 586. — ^I. 272 vTto (ii^rpviri ^iorov (Sapvv 
 riyyiXd^€L. 1. 815 iiyjtpvi^g vno x^p^^^ draa^dlov; 
 cf. 1. 1303; III. 1226; IV. 1369.— 1. 1308 xivvrai 
 Ttx^i^vrog vno nvoiii (3opeao; cf. II. 727. — II. 26 
 &ar€ Xeqv i)7i' dxovtL rerv^fihog, II. 117 5y?G>(T- 
 eo^ai vno ^i(p8t; similarly vno Sovpi II. 139; III. 
 416, 1186, 1329, vno ^ovpaai 111.321,1374; i^Tto 
 axT^nrpom III. 353, 395; IV. 1176.— II. 1013 
 rexcdvrai vn dvSpdat rexva yvvdixeg] cf. B714, 
 728, 742, 820, etc. II. 1109 ^epov^' vno xv^aatv. 
 IV. 269 norafjtog . . . q vno ndaa \ ap^erai 'Hfpt>7. 
 IV. 1733 apSea^t Xevx^iciv irTtai Xi^dbeaai. Cf 
 B 374, r 352, A 291, E 555, 653, Z 139, A 433, 
 N 590, 11384; r 81, etc. Examples of the imier 
 cause are: I. 7=11. 1112, 1169 vn ivveaiYiaL; cf 
 h. Cer. 39. The simple dative occurs in I. 956; 
 III. 29, 478, 818, 942; IV. 644, 772, 1443, etc.— 
 1. 263 oTioo) vno yyjpa. 1. 443 arvyepii vno hai^ovog 
 aXciYi, II. 71 vno . . . ihpsiri. II. 558 I'Tt' dvidyri, 
 
 II. 1059 drvi^Yi^Ci vno Sei^arr, cf IV. 53, 1009.— 
 
 III. 3 vn lp6)Tt; cf IV. 567; also III. 971 ^^ey- 
 ^aa^at vno nvoiiiaiv "Eporog. — III. 702 xaxij 
 vno xYipi, IV. 193 xovpYig vno Syjveai. Cf. N 667; 
 a 136, etc. Also Eurip. Med. 8. 
 
 c) The accompaniment, 
 I. 540 vn 'Op^YJog xi^dpYi. Homer has no 
 example of the accompaniment of a musical 
 
 4 » 
 
 -^Tt;.' » 
 
 \ 
 
 l\ 
 
 \) 
 
 - ♦» 
 
 201 
 
 instrument; but compare the examples of the 
 
 attendant circumstances in Z 171; S 402, yj 193, 
 
 etc. For a closer parallel compare Hes. Sc. 283. 
 
 d) The time. This use is post- Homeric. 
 
 I. 1022, 1038; III. 323, 1360; IV. 1682 
 vno vvxri; cf Aesch. Ag. 1030. 
 
 A. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 I. IN A LOCAL SENSE TO DENOTE: 
 
 a) Motion or aim ^'towards or under. ^' 
 
 II. 113 vno ^(dvyjv ^ope ;KOt^^o$; cf also II. 
 587; III. 1321, 1368, IV. 1062. Cf E 67, 271; 
 V 578, etc, A figurative local sense is seen in 
 I. 452 SeleXlvov xXivovrog vno (o^ov rETiioio; cf. 
 * 51; X 191, etc. Without Homeric parallels 
 are: III. 288 ^dX^Ev vn' kiaovihyiv d^apvynara. 
 
 III. 675 vno ippEvag Ixeto nh^g; cf III. 1403. — 
 
 IV. 39 Ehiv . . . ;ta/le7ta$ vno ;t€lpa$ dvdaaYjg. 
 b) Position ''under'' or ''in''; like ^tzo c. dat. 
 
 I. 50 \Li\ivEv vno axorLYjv opEog. I. 509 vacEa- 
 XEV vn6 aniog; cf I. 102; II. 371, 570,1236; III. 
 278, 762; IV. 1474. Homer e B 603; co 234, etc. 
 
 a. IN A TEMPORAL SENSE. 
 
 I. 587, 1186; II. 1034; IV. 590 vno xvE^g, 
 "toward dusk''. 1.1160 vno SeleXov, "toward 
 evening '. II. 1122; IV. 458 vvx^' vno XvyaiYjv. 
 Cf n 202, X 102 (the only examples in Homer); 
 also Arist. Ach. 139, 1076; Xen. Ana. II. 2, 14 
 and IV. 5, 9. 
 
202 — 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 I 
 
 PREPOSITIONS IN ADVERBIAL 
 
 PHRASES. 
 
 As a supplement to the prepositions in case- construction 
 may be regarded the prepositions in adverbial phrases, where 
 the adverb assumes the nature of a substantive. Cf. Kriiger- 
 Pokel, P. I., Sec. 66, A. 3-4 ; P. II., Sec. 66, A. 1-2. 
 
 The following examples occur in Apollonius : 
 
 With lirC : — I. 516; IV. 728 iiri S-ffv. According to Ruther- 
 ford, New Phrynichus. p. 121, iirl 8^v is an ^* unintellii^ent^^ 
 imitation of the Homeric iirl Srjpdu ( ! ? ). As a matter of fact, 
 ^iri 5t7/j6i' occurs only once in Homer (I 415), but seven times 
 in Apollonius (I. 615, 870, 1072 ; II. 519, 759; III. 949, 1048.) 
 — I- ^359; IV. I $27 iirl tvt66v. III. II45; IV. i $16 ivl r6(r<rov; 
 cf r 12 ; € 251. "IV. 1335 iiri ^laKpbv : cf 6 160 ; { 117.— II. 942 
 iwl Trporiptixre. I. 661 iwlvoWSp; cf. II. 439 xepiiroWdv. — More 
 interesting is II. 428 iiri 5i <rx€56i', which evidently is tmesis for 
 ^t-<rx€36K (II. 492, 606; IV. 1108, 1 185, 1348, etc). Compare 
 8td 5' dfiirepis (A 377. P 309; 422 ) for Si-afjurepis ; iK 5' dvofxa- 
 *cXiJ5i;v ( 5 278 ) for i^-ovofiaKXifiSTjv ; 5id 5' dvStxo ( Hes. Op. 13) 
 for didvSixa. In this connection may be mentioned a very 
 curious example from Apollonius ; viz., III. 700<nJi' re bpiicrreipa 
 wi\€<r$at^ where the scholiast takes <rip in tmesis with the noun 
 and explains (rvv-dp-j^trreipa by iTvv-€py6s ** co-helper."* 
 
 With lie: — I. 1078; II. 533; IV. 623 iK Si rbdiv, cf. IV 431 
 iiiri Kilvov^ i^ o5 and the Homeric ^^^t toO^ ire ( I 106 ). 
 
 Withtls: — I. 1 138 ^pSev is aUi; II. 718 €ts aliv. Cf. Aesch. 
 Pro. 732, Eum. 836; Soph. Aj. 570. — IV. 1313 e/j iripoxre. 
 
 Withji«TA: — I. 624 pxB' (xrTepovy cf. h. Merc. 126; also ^5 
 li<rT€pop{fi 126). II. 653 ov furit. StiBA; II. 451, 881, 1288; III. 
 955 ov pjirh, St}p6p, with which compare the synonymous phrase 
 dijpdp 3' oiJ fjxriweiTa {11. 1 259; III. 1329 ; also 3319; ^519). 
 
 • Cf. p. 48. 
 
 — 203 — 
 
 With&ird: — II. 192; IV. 1090, II72 dirb tv\ov, Cf. t I17. 
 'A7r6 TTjXov might also be written as one word ; cf Kar' avrbdi nd 
 KaTavrbdi. This last word deserves special attention on account 
 of Rutherford's note in the New Phrynichus, p. 121 ; viz. 
 "Any freak of diction may be expected in a writer like Ap. 
 Rh , who at an age, when Greek had already lost all 
 its great qualities, attempted to write in an old style which he 
 little understood. He naturally makes even more blunders 
 than are found in modern attempts to imitate classical styles, 
 and by misunderstanding the facts of tmesis in Homer has 
 been led to use many forms intrinsically absurd. In II. X. 
 273 iSav f>' iivai, Xnririjp Si /car' avrddi irdPTas apicrrovs, the Kard be- 
 longs to Xiirirrip, but in Apollonius Karavrddi unblushingly 
 takes the place of the simple a^rSdi; cf. II. 778." That this 
 criticism is unmerited, the Argonautica itself is the best proof. 
 The fact that in six passages Kar' has to be taken with oiJt6^i, 
 written also Karavrddi* is not so bad as Rutherford tried to 
 make it. In Homer we have a good parallel in 4^ 147 irap' 
 avrddi fxrjy lepeixreLP ii irriyd^, where irap' cau hardly be in tmesis 
 with the verb, but it is to be taken with the adverb, or rather 
 it itself is adverbial, emphasizing the other adverb airroSi, with 
 which later it blends into one word. Moreover, that Apol- 
 lonius recognized Kard to be in tmesis in K 273, seems to 
 appear from his own examples, in which Kard is in tmesis 
 with the verb, although standing immediately before airrbdi { I. 
 1356; II. 894 ; III. 648, 888; IV. 298), abSc ( I. 1079; II. 530 ) 
 or airroO ( I. 565 ). 
 
 That differences in the diction of Apollonius and Homer exist 
 is quite natural. There are stylistic differences, and great ones 
 at that, even in the Iliad and Odyssey, as they are in the early 
 and late writings of every individual writer. Hence it should 
 not l)e surprising if an imitative writer does not reproduce his 
 model perfectly. Apollonius, imbued with the spirit of his 
 contemporaries, was a scholar rather than a poet, and in ti:e 
 field of Homeric studies he produced undoubtedly the most 
 creditable work of his age. 
 
 • Cf. p. 28. 
 
— 204 — 
 
 CONCLUSION. 
 
 The purpose of this thesis has been to show how 
 closely Apollonius reproduced the Homeric usages of 
 the prepositions. The investigation proved to be a 
 source of constantly growing interest on account of 
 the striking similarities in the two writers on the 
 whole and the intentional differences or deviations 
 of the latter from the former in detail. It is indeed 
 astonishing to find a writer of the Alexandrian Epos 
 so well versed in the Homeric idiom with all its 
 peculiarities of form and meaning, without the aid of 
 a Gehring or Ebeling ; but still more surprising is it 
 that Apollonius, after having thoroughly mastered 
 the Homeric language, did not remain a slavish 
 imitator. His aim in telling the often- told story of 
 the Argonauts was not to make a cento. It was 
 rather to write a poem that should be epic in coloring, 
 but at the same time intelligible to his readers and in 
 keeping with their taste. This demanded judicious 
 selection. Forms, uses and words that would seem 
 too strange, and were of so rare occurrence in Homer 
 as scarcely to merit the name of being Homeric, had 
 to be discarded ; others had to be avoided because, 
 being adopted into the later language, they had 
 become too prosaic for the elevated diction of epic 
 poetry. The others were to be imitated with the 
 risk of going to excess. That Apollonius should keep 
 here a perfect equilibrium would be expecting too 
 much. That things inconsistant with Homeric usage, 
 and even incongruous in the eyes of one who knows 
 the history of Greek Syntax should occasionally occur 
 was unavoidable ; but I hope to have shown in this 
 thesis that Apollonius is far from deserving what 
 Rutherford says of him in the New Phrynichus, p. 
 121. Separated, though he was, from Homer by 
 a long line of eminent writers, who mark so many 
 stages in the evolution of the Greek language,— stand- 
 ing altogether outside of the period of the Classic 
 
 i "** 
 
 
 — 205 — 
 
 Literature of the Greeks, and living in Alexandria, 
 when that city had become the centre of a new kind 
 of literary activity, viz., that of imitation and artifi- 
 ciality rather than of invention and originality, — 
 Apollonius admirably acquitted himself of his task by 
 reflecting the Homeric diction. The Argonautica is 
 a masterpiece of systematic industry, even though it 
 lacks the quickening spark of the genius of Homer ; 
 and it fully shows that the Homeric language was 
 under his discerning eye not petrified or dead ; but 
 w^as living, organic, capable of further development 
 and productive of new words. It is this quality, 
 more than anything else, that gives the work of 
 Apollonius the stamp of a strong personality, and 
 makes it especially interesting from a linguistic point 
 of view. If Apollonius had not understood his proto- 
 type. Homer, we should expect to find in his work a 
 strange mixture of poetic and prosaic usages. The 
 Argonautica, however, testifies to a clear conception 
 of purely poetic and prosaic constructions. In 
 general, the prepositions which are less frequent in 
 Apollonius than in Homer are prosaic; e. g. xara izapd^ 
 Tzpd, 7r/)09. With the utmost care Apollonius avoided 
 also those particular usages of prepositions that were 
 essentially prosaic. Thus ti^rd with the genitive is 
 entirely absent from the Argonautica ; -/><>? is rare 
 (not once with the dative); and no trace of the 
 articular infinitive with prepositions is found. On 
 the other hand, the more poetic prepositions, as «/xf «', 
 dvd^ am^ and also the double prepositions StU, Ttapix 
 and 07:ix are comparatively frequent in Apollonius. 
 Likewise he uses er? with the person in the singular 
 and fJLsrd c. ace. in the same usage more frequently 
 than Homer. Also post position and the adverbial 
 use of prepositions gain in the Argonautica. 
 
— 2o6 — 
 
 SYNOPTIC TABI^K OF AI,!, THE USES OF THE PREPOSITIONS 
 
 IN APOLLONIUS. 
 
 
 I. 
 
 II. 
 
 III. 
 
 IV. 
 
 Total. 
 
 
 Adverbial. 
 
 In Tmesi". 
 
 With Cases 
 
 In Ad. Phr. 
 
 dlJ.<pl 
 
 20 
 
 7 
 
 69 
 
 
 
 96 
 
 aua 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 r>5 
 
 
 
 83 
 
 dvTl 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 dw6 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 69 
 
 3 
 
 93 
 
 did 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 (d5 
 
 
 
 76 
 
 6iV 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 165 
 
 3 
 
 171 
 
 iK 
 
 
 
 31 
 
 163 
 
 4 
 
 198 
 
 ip 
 
 15 
 
 17 
 
 298 
 
 
 
 330 
 
 iiri 
 
 1 
 
 36 
 
 292 
 
 17 
 
 352 
 
 Kard 
 
 
 
 Ift 
 
 88 
 
 
 
 107 
 
 fierd 
 
 14 
 
 4 
 
 83 
 
 6 
 
 107 
 
 ■wafd. 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 47 
 
 wepi 
 
 23 
 
 9 
 
 60 
 
 
 
 92 
 
 Trpb 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 Tp6i 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 18 
 
 a6p 
 
 10 
 
 7 
 
 65 
 
 
 
 82 
 
 inrip 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 44 
 
 
 
 46 
 
 xmb 
 
 
 
 
 
 119 
 
 
 
 119 
 
 diroTrpb 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 8l4k 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 21 
 
 
 
 22 
 
 Siavpo 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 iirnrpd 
 
 11 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 wapiK 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 11 
 
 
 
 17 
 
 irepiir/>6 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Trp6irap 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 vpoTTph 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 inriK 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 14 
 
 inr€Kirp6 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 inroTTpb 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 f 'Tcpf r' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 \ dlX<f>i T€ 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Total. 
 
 124 
 
 205 
 
 1743 
 
 33 
 
 2105 
 
 I '1 
 
 If we include in this list the five examples in 
 which the preposition is used in a pregnant sense, 
 i. e. as a compound verb («va IV. i322,«i' I. 494 and 
 Ttdpa IV. 1260, 1272, 1553) we have in all 21 10 
 prepositions in the Argonautica. 
 
 ^■^^ 
 
 - 207 — 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 BIBLIOGRAPHY 5 
 
 PREFACE 9 
 
 INTRODUCTION n 
 
 CHAPTER I.:— The Improper or Pseudo-Prepositions. . . 17 
 
 A. With the Genitive 20 
 
 B. With the Dative. 32 
 
 C. Witu the Accusative 33 
 
 D. With the Genitive and Dative • 34 
 
 E. With the Genitive and Accusative 35 
 
 CHAPTER II.:— Prepositions Used as Adverbs 37 
 
 Table Showing their Frequency in Apol. and in Homer. 38 
 
 dfji4.( 39 
 
 Siairpd 40 
 
 kv 40 
 
 IfieL 41 
 
 4iriirp6 42 
 
 |i.€Td 42 
 
 irapd, irap^K 43 
 
 ir£p( 44 
 
 ircpC T d(ji<)>C T€ 45 
 
 «nr€piirp6, irpd, irpoirpi 4^ 
 
 irp6s 47 
 
 triiv 47 
 
 Prepositions Equivalent to Compound Verbs 49 
 
 CHAPTER III.:— Prepositions Used in Tmesis 51 
 
 Table Siiowing their Frequency in Apol. and in Homer 59 
 
 djt^C 60 
 
 dvd 61 
 
 dir6 63 
 
 8id 65 
 
 8Uk 66 
 
 4v. 70 
 
 hti 71 
 
 fls 73 
 
 Kard 73 
 
 ficrd 75 
 
 irapd, irap^K 7^ 
 
 ircpt 76 
 
 irp6s 77 
 
 orvv 77 
 
 {t-nip 78 
 
 Mk 78 
 
 vir€Kirp6 79 
 
 Summary of Prepositions in Tmesis 79 
 
— 208 
 
 CHAPTER IV.:— Why Prepositions in Case-Con- 
 struction are Rarer in Poetry than in Prose 8l 
 
 A. SIMPLE CASES TO EXPRESS I.OCAI. RBI^ATIONS 82 
 
 i) Local Genitive 82 
 
 2) Ablatival Genitive 83 
 
 3) Locative Dative 87 
 
 4) The Accusative of the Goal 89 
 
 B. SUFFIXES -0€V AND -Si TO EXPRESS I,OCAI, 
 
 REI.ATIONS 91 
 
 i) Forms in -Ofv 9^ 
 
 2) Forms in -St 92 
 
 CHAPTER v.: —Prepositions in Case-Construction 95 
 
 General Tables of Statistics 97 
 
 I. PREPOSITIONS WITH ONE CASE I05 
 
 A. With the Genitive 105 
 
 &vtC 105 
 
 av6 106 
 
 Ik no 
 
 irpo, irpiiirap, irpotrp^i viroirp6 1 19 
 
 vir^K 120 
 
 B. With the Dative 121 
 
 Iv 121 
 
 <rvv 136 
 
 C. With the Accusative 139 
 
 els . . .^ 139 
 
 irtpC T &^(^C Ti 147 
 
 II. PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES (Gen. and Ace) 148 
 
 8id 148 
 
 SUk 151 
 
 Kard 152 
 
 irap^K 157 
 
 vvip 158 
 
 in. PROPOSITIONS WITH THREE CASES 161 
 
 &|Ji4»( 161 
 
 &vd 166 
 
 lirC 1 70 
 
 jurd 185 
 
 wapd 189 
 
 irfp( 193 
 
 irpds 197 
 
 vir6 198 
 
 CHAPTER VI.:— Prepositions in Adverbial Phra-es 202 
 
 CONCLUSION 204 
 
 TABI^B OF AIX THE PREPOSITIONS IN APOI,I,ONIUS . .206 
 
 X 
 
 ^* 
 
COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY 
 
 0032206437 
 
 / 
 
 f Ill 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 ^i;::^^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 t 
 00 O 
 
 00 o 
 
/ 
 
 i 
 
 ■.iq 
 •f'i 
 
 4" [: 
 
 -5. *■ 
 
 f ■■ 'I . 
 
 i- >'l 
 
 M 
 
 !aJ>i' 
 
 
 S v..